Manual SDC 3.5

(Not for use in Japan) No.
CP-SP-1150E
Single Loop Controller

Model C35/36
User’s Manual
for
Installation & Configuration
Thank you for purchasing an Azbil

Corporation product.
This manual contains information for
ensuring the correct use of this product.
It also provides necessary information
for installation, maintenance, and
troubleshooting.
This manual should be read by those
who design and maintain equipment
that uses this product. Be sure to keep
this manual nearby for handy reference.
Getting Up to Speed with model C35/36
The quick reference guide on pages D-1 to D-8 summarizes key operations, parameters,
and settings, and gives concrete operation examples using illustrations. Try looking at these
pages first, and then read the main text for details.
A separate color version of the quick guide printed on dirt-resistant paper is available for
convenient use on the work site (document No. CP-SP-1203E). Contact the azbil Group or a
distributor for details.
NOTICE
Be sure that the user receives this manual before the product is used.
Copying or duplicating this user’s manual in part or in whole is forbidden.
The information and specifications in this manual are subject to change
without notice.
Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free from
inaccuracies and omissions. If you should find an error or omission, please
contact the azbil Group.
In no event is Azbil Corporation liable to anyone for any indirect, special or
consequential damages as a result of using this product.
©©2004–2019 Azbil Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Modbus™ is a trademark and the property of Schneider Electric SE, its subsidiaries
and affiliated companies.
Safety Requirements
To reduce the risk of an electric shock that could cause personal injury,
follow all safety notices in this document.
This symbol warns the user of a potential shock hazard where hazardous
live voltages may be accessible.
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the
equipment must be impaired.
Do not replace any component (or part) not explicitly specified as replaceable by your supplier.
All wiring must be in accordance with local norms and carried out by authorized and experienced personnel.
A switch in the main supply is required near the equipment.
Main power supply wiring requires a (T) 0.5 A, 250 V fuse(s) (IEC 127).
EQUIPMENT RATINGS
zz
Supply voltages: 100 to 240 V AC (operating power supply voltage 85 to 264 V AC)
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Power consumption: 12 VA max.
EQUIPMENT CONDITIONS
zz
Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors.
Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard.
Temperature: 0 to 50 °C
Humidity: 10 to 90 %RH (non-condensing)
Vibration: 2 m/s2 (10 to 60 Hz)
Over-voltage category: Category II (IEC60364-4-443, EN60664-1)
Pollution degree: 2
Installation location: Indoors
Altitude: 2000 m or less
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
zz
The controller must be mounted into a panel to limit operator access to the rear terminal.
Specifications of common mode voltage: The common mode voltages of all I/O except for main
supply and relay outputs are less than 30 Vrms, 42.4 V peak and 60 V DC.
STANDARDS COMPLIANCE
zz
EN61010-1,
EN61326-1 (For use in industrial locations)
During EMC testing, the reading or output may fluctuate by ±10 %FS.
i
Conventions Used in This Manual
The safety precautions explained in the following section aim to prevent injury to the operator and others, and to
prevent property damage.
Warnings are indicated when mishandling this product

WARNING might result in death or serious injury.
Cautions are indicated when mishandling this product

CAUTION might result in minor injury to the user, or only physical
damage to the product.
In describing the product, this manual uses the icons and conventions listed below.
Use caution when handling the product.
The indicated action is prohibited.
Be sure to follow the indicated instructions.
Handling Precautions:
Handling Precautions indicate items that the user should pay attention to when handling
this device.
: This indicates the item or page that the user is requested to refer to.
Note: Notes indicate information that might benefit the user.
(1) (2) (3): The numbers within parenthesis indicate steps in a sequence or parts in an explanation.
[para], [mode] These indicate keys on the keyboard of this unit, and messages and menus that appear on
etc.: the personal computer screen.
>> : Indicates the result of an operation or the status after the operation.
ii
Numeric value and character display on LED
zz
Numeric values The 7-segment LED expresses numeric values as follows:
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
Alphabetical characters T he 7-segment LED expresses alphabetical characters shown below.

There are some alphabetical characters, which are not displayed on the LED.
A B C D E
a b c d e
F G H I J
f g h i j
K L M N O
k l m n o
P Q R S T
p q r s t
U V Y Z –
u v y z
Handling Precautions
As shown above, numeric value “2” and alphabetic character “Z” are shown
in the same manner.
Accordingly, numeric value “5” and alphabetic character “S”, as well as
numeric value “9” and alphabetic character “Q” are also shown in the same
manner.
iii
Safety Precautions
WARNING
Do not use this device in an environment with conductive pollution, or with dry non-
conductive pollution which can become conductive due to condensation, etc.
Otherwise, problems such as tracking phenomena may damage parts, resulting in fire.
When wiring the power for this device, be sure to mount a shutoff switch for the main power
to this unit within reach of the operator.
In addition, when wiring the power for AC power models, install a time-lag (T) fuse (rated
current 0.5 A, rated voltage 250 V) as specified by IEC 127.
Otherwise, tracking phenomena or parts failure due to other factors may cause fire.
Do not disassemble this device.
Doing so might cause electric shock or faulty operation.
Before removing, mounting, or wiring this device, be sure to turn off the power to the device
and all connected devices. Failure to do so might cause electric shock.
Do not touch electrically charged parts such as the power terminals.

Doing so might cause electric shock.
CAUTION
Use this device within the operating ranges recommended in the specifications (temperature,
humidity, voltage, vibration, shock, mounting direction, atmosphere, etc.).
Do not block ventilation holes.

Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation.
Wire this device properly according to predetermined standards.

Also wire the device using specified power leads according to recognized installation
methods.
Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty operation.
Do not allow lead clippings, chips or water to enter the controller case.
Firmly tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque as listed in the specifications.
Insufficient tightening of terminal screws might cause electric shock or fire.
Do not use unused/spare terminals on this device as relay terminals.

Doing so might cause electric shock, fire, or faulty operation.
We recommend attaching the terminal cover (sold separately) after wiring this device.
Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire, or faulty operation.
Use the relays within the recommended life.

Failure to do so might cause fire or faulty operation.
If there is a risk of a power surge caused by lightning, use a surge absorber (surge protector)
to prevent fire or device failure.
Do not make incorrect connections. If the cables are connected incorrectly, this might cause
the unit to malfunction.
iv
CAUTION
The controller requires 6 seconds to stabilize after power ON. Great care should be taken
when the relay output from the controller is used as interlock signals.
The part between the control output 1 and control output 2 is not isolated. When necessary,
use an appropriate isolator.
Do not connect multiple loader cables to multiple units from one personal computer. The
current coming from other circuits might cause the PV value indication error to occur.
Do not connect any terminating resistor in the communication path when performing the
RS-485 wiring.
Doing so might cause the communication to fail.
Do not operate the key with a pencil or sharp-tipped object.
Doing so might cause faulty operation.
v
The Role of This Manual
Four manuals are available for Model C35/36 Single Loop Controller (hereafter referred to as “this unit”).
Read appropriate manuals according to your requirements. If you do not have your required manual, contact the
azbil Group or its dealer.
Additionally, you can download necessary manuals from “http://www.azbil.com”.
Single Loop Controller Model C35/36 User’s Manual for

Installation & Configuration
Manual No. CP-SP-1150E
This manual.
The manual describes the hardware and all functions of this unit. Personnel in charge
of design, manufacture, operation, and/or maintenance of a system using this unit
and those in charge of communication software of a system using the communication
functions of this unit must thoroughly read this manual. This manual also describes
the installation, wiring, connections for communication, all functions and settings of
this unit, operating procedures, communication with host station, such as personal
computer, communication addresses, troubleshooting, and detailed specifications.
Single Loop Controller Model C35/36 User’s Manual for Installation

Manual No. CP-UM-5289JE
This manual is supplied with the product. Personnel in charge of design and/or
manufacture of a system using this unit must thoroughly read this manual. This
manual describes the safety precautions, installation, wiring, list of parameters,
and primary specifications. For further information about operation, refer to
another manual, Installation & Configuration.
User’s Manual for Smart Loader Package Model SLP-C35 for

Single Loop Controller Model C15/25/26/35/36 Manual No. CP-UM-5290E
This manual is supplied with the Smart Loader Package. The manual describes
the software used to make various settings for C15/25/26/35/36 using a
personal computer. Personnel in charge of design or setting of a system using
C15/25/26/35/36 must thoroughly read this manual. The manual describes
installation of the software into a personal computer, operation of the personal
computer, various functions, and setup procedures.
-XXXXE
CP-UM
Quick Reference Guide for Model C35/36

e
ce Guid
Quick Referen
XXXXXXX
Manual No. CP-UM-1203E

For those using this device for the first time or for operators on the work site,
this guide serves as a reference when setting or modifying parameters. Key
operations, menu flowcharts and parameter settings are presented with color
illustrations.
vi
Organization of This User’s Manual
This manual is organized as follows.
Chapter 1. OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the applications, features, model selection guide, and part
names and functions of this unit. Since the part names described in this chapter are
used in the subsequent descriptions, the part names and functions of this unit must
be understood correctly in this chapter.
Chapter 2. OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS

This chapter describes the outline and operation flow of the functions of this unit.
Chapter 3. INSTALLATION
This chapter describes the environmental conditions, installation dimensions,
installation procedures, and necessary tools when installing this unit.
Chapter 4. WIRING
This chapter describes the wiring procedures, wiring precautions, and connection
examples.
Chapter 5. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION

This chapter describes each function of this unit in detail.
Chapter 6. LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA

This chapter lists up the display items of this unit and their contents.
Chapter 7. CPL COMMUNICATION FUNCTION

This chapter describes how to communicate this unit with a host unit, such
as a personal computer or PLC through Azbil Corporation’s standard CPL
communication using RS-485.
Chapter 8. Modbus COMMUNICATION FUNCTION

This chapter describes how to communicate this unit with a host unit, such as a
personal computer or PLC through Modbus communication.
Chapter 9. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA

This chapter shows the list of communication data inside the memory of this unit.
Chapter 10. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter describes the maintenance and inspection of this unit, as well as
troubleshooting.
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION

This chapter describes how to calibrate this unit in order to keep the accuracy and
to safely operate this unit for an extended period of time.
Chapter 12. DISPOSAL

This chapter describes safety precautions and how to dispose of this unit when the
unit is no longer used.
Chapter 13. SPECIFICATIONS

This chapter describes the general specifications, performance specifications, and
optional parts of this unit.
vii
Contents
Safety Requirements
Conventions Used in This Manual
Safety Precautions
The Role of This Manual
Organization of This User’s Manual
Flowchart of key operations and displays D-2

Operation examples D-4
List of parameters D-6
Chapter 1. OVERVIEW 1-1
1 - 1 Overview 1-1

Model selection table 1-2
Accessories and optional parts 1-3
1 - 2 Part Names and Functions 1-4
Main unit and console 1-4
Rear panel 1-7
Chapter 2. OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS 2-1
2 - 1 Input/Output Configuration 2-1

2 - 2 Key Operation 2-2
Data setting procedures 2-4
[mode] key operating procedures 2-7
User level 2-7
2 - 3 Operation Modes 2-8
Chapter 3. INSTALLATION 3-1
Installation locations
3-1
External dimensions
3-1
Panel cutout dimensions
3-2
Mounting procedures
3-3
Chapter 4. WIRING 4-1
4 - 1 Wiring 4-1

Terminal assignment label symbols 4-3
Wiring precautions 4-3
Connection of open collector output to digital input 4-6
Connection of communication (RS-485) cable 4-6
Connection with solid state relay (SSR) 4-8
Connection method for the motor drive relay output (R1) 4-11
viii
Connection with current-input type controllers
4-11
Wiring with zener barriers
4-12
Noise preventive measures
4-12
4 - 2 Recommended Cables 4-13
Chapter 5. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5-1
5 - 1 PV Input 5-1

PV input range type
5-2
Temperature unit
5-4
Cold junction compensation (T/C)
5-4
PV square root extraction dropout
5-4
Decimal point position
5-5
PV range low limit/high limit
5-6
PV ratio and PV bias
5-6
PV low limit alarm threshold
5-6
PV filter
5-7
PV hold
5-7
PV low limit/high limit and PV low limit/high limit alarms
5-7
Zener barrier adjustment
5-8
5 - 2 Mode 5-10
AUTO/MANUAL mode 5-10
RUN/READY mode 5-10
LSP/RSP mode 5-10
Auto tuning (AT) stop/start 5-11
Release all digital output (DO) latches 5-11
Communication digital input 1 (communication DI 1) 5-11
5 - 3 Control 5-12
Control method 5-14
Control action and Heat/Cool control 5-15
Special control outputs 5-15
MANUAL mode change 5-16
PID control initialization 5-16
Initial output of PID control 5-17
PID decimal point position 5-17
ON/OFF control 5-18
Output variation limit 5-18
PID control 5-19
Zone PID 5-23
Heat/Cool control 5-24
Auto tuning (AT) 5-26
Just-FiTTER 5-28
RationaLOOP 5-28
SP lag 5-28
5 - 4 Auto Tuning (AT) Function 5-29
Starting procedures 5-29
Stopping procedures 5-29
ix
5 - 5 Set Point (SP) 5-32
SP setup in operation display mode
5-33
LSP system group
5-33
SP ramp type
5-33
RSP input range type
5-33
RSP range low limit/high limit
5-34
RSP ratio and RSP bias
5-34
RSP filter
5-35
RSP low limit/high limit and RSP low limit/high limit alarms
5-35
RSP and LSP1 to 8
5-35
PID group number
5-36
LSP group number
5-36
DI Assignment of LSP group selection
5-37
SP ramp unit
5-38
SP ramp-up/ramp-down
5-38
SP multi-ramp
5-40
SP low limit/high limit
5-42
DI Assignment of SP ramp enabled/disabled
5-42
5 - 6 Step Operation 5-43
LSP system group
5-43
SP ramp type
5-44
SP ramp unit
5-45
STEP time unit
5-45
STEP PV start
5-46
STEP loop
5-47
STEP operation LSP, PID group No., ramp, time
5-48
Operation type of internal contact
5-50
5 - 7 Digital Input (DI) and Internal Contact 5-51
Operation type 5-52
Internal event No. assignment 5-53
Input bit function 5-54
Input assignment 5-55
Polarity of input assignment 5-56
Polarity of input bit function 5-57
DI Assignment setting with the SLP-C35 Smart Loader Package 5-57
5 - 8 Internal Event 5-58
Operation 5-59
Operation type 5-65
Direct/reverse, standby, and EVENT state at READY 5-66
Alarm OR, special OFF setup, and delay time unit 5-67
Main setting, sub setting, and hysteresis 5-68
ON delay and OFF delay 5-69
5 - 9 Digital Output (DO) 5-71
MV1/MV2 process 5-72
Operation type 5-74
Output assignment 5-75
Polarity of output assignment 5-77
Polarity of output bit function 5-78
x
Latch
5-78
DO Assignment setting with SLP-C35 Smart Loader Package
5-79
5 - 10 Application Examples 5-80
Examples of applications using assignment functions
5-80
5 - 11 Continuous Output 5-87
Output range
5-87
Output type
5-87
Output scaling low limit/high limit
5-88
MV scalable bandwidth
5-89
5 - 12 Current Transformer (CT) Input 5-90
CT type 5-91
CT output 5-91
CT measurement wait time 5-91
Number of CT turns and number of CT power wire loops 5-92
5 - 13 Console Display and Key Operation 5-94
Key operation type 5-94
[mode] key function 5-94
MODE display setup 5-95
PV/SP display setup 5-96
MV display setup 5-97
Event setting value display setup 5-98
Event remaining time display setup 5-98
CT input current value display setup 5-99
User level 5-99
LED monitor 5-99
MS indicating lamp 5-100
User Function 5-103
Key lock, communications lock, and loader lock 5-107
Password 5-108
5 - 14 Position Proportional Control 5-109
Position proportional type 5-109
Position proportional dead zone 5-111
Motor long life mode 5-111
Motor adjust 5-111
Motor wiring and motor auto adjust operation 5-113
Input with motor fully closed and input with motor fully open 5-115
Motor full close–full open time 5-115
Chapter 6. LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA 6-1
6 - 1 List of Operation Displays 6-1

Operation displays 6-1
6 - 2 List of Parameter Setting Displays 6-3
Mode bank 6-3
SP bank 6-4
Event bank 6-5
PID bank 6-7
Parameter bank 6-10
xi
Extended tuning bank
6-11
Zone bank
6-11
6 - 3 List of Setup Setting Displays 6-12
Setup bank
6-12
Event configuration bank
6-19
DI Assignment bank
6-22
DO Assignment bank
6-26
User Function bank
6-29
Lock bank
6-30
Instrument information bank
6-30
Chapter 7. CPL COMMUNICATION FUNCTION 7-1
7 - 1 Outline of Communication 7-1

Features
7-1
Setup
7-1
Communication procedures
7-2
7 - 2 Message Structure 7-3
Message structure
7-3
Data link layer
7-3
Application layer
7-6
7 - 3 Description of Commands 7-7
Continuous data read command (RS command)
7-7
Continuous data write command (WS command)
7-8
Fixed length continuous data read command (RD command)
7-9
Fixed length continuous data write command (WD command)
7-10
Fixed length random data read command (RU command)
7-11
Fixed length random data write command (WU command)
7-12
7 - 4 Definition of Data Addresses 7-13
7 - 5 Numeric Representation in the Application Layer 7-14
7 - 6 List of Termination Codes 7-15
7 - 7 Reception and Transmission Timing 7-16
Timing specifications for instruction and response message 7-16
RS-485 driver control timing specifications 7-16
7 - 8 Cautions when Making Communication Programs for the Master Station 7-17
Example of communications program 7-17
Chapter 8. Modbus COMMUNICATION FUNCTION 8-1
8 - 1 Outline of Communication 8-1

Features 8-1
Setup 8-1
Communication procedures 8-2
8 - 2 Message Structure 8-3
Message structure 8-3
Command type 8-6
Other specifications 8-6
xii
8 - 3 Description of Commands 8-7
Read command (03H)
8-7
Write command (10H)
8-9
8 - 4 Specifications Common with CPL Communication Function 8-11
Definition of data addresses 8-11
Numeric representation 8-11
RS-485 driver control timing specifications 8-11
Chapter 9. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA 9-1
List of communication data

9-1
Chapter 10. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 10-1
Maintenance
10-1
Alarm displays and corrective action
10-2
Behavior in case of PV input failure
10-3
Behavior in case of RSP input failure
10-4
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION 11-1
Starting the calibration

11-1
Exiting the calibration
11-1
Cautions before starting the calibration
11-2
Measuring instruments required for calibration
11-2
Calibration procedures
11-2
Chapter 12. DISPOSAL 12-1
Chapter 13. SPECIFICATIONS 13-1
Specifications
13-1
Accessories and optional parts
13-7
Appendix App.-1
Glossary App.-1
Index
xiii
This guide offers a summary of key operations, parameter flowcharts, and settings, for convenient reference
at the operation site. This guide is made for repeated use. Dirt wipes off easily and even notes written with an
oil-based felt-tip pen can be removed with an eraser. If more detailed information on model C35/36 is needed,
refer to the user's manuals: CP-SP-1150E for installation and configuration.
Upper display Upper display

Mode
indicator Indicator during AT
Lower display
Lower display
Mode indicator Various indicators
Multi-Status (MS) display
[mode] key [display] key [mode] key [display] key
[<], [ ], and [ ] keys [enter] key
[para] key [enter] key
[para] key Loader connector Loader connector

[<], [ ], and [ ] keys
Upper display This display shows either the PV value or the display value and set value for each displayed item. If an alarm is triggered, the
normal display and alarm code are displayed alternately. During auto tuning (AT), the rightmost decimal point flashes twice
repeatedly.
Lower display This display shows either the SP/MV/CT or the display value and set value for each displayed item. The rightmost decimal
point lights up or flashes to show RUN/READY mode or communications status, depending on the setting.
Multi-Status (MS) display Turns ON in READY mode or when an alarm occurs, depending on the ON conditions and the current status. When lit, in ad-
dition to flashing and reciprocating between left and right, it performs MV graph, DI monitor, internal event monitor, and
other display functions.
Mode indicators man: Lights when MANUAL (AUTO mode if not lit)
rsp: Lights when RSP (LSP mode if not lit)
ev1, ev2, ev3: Lights when event relays are ON
ot1, ot2: Lights when the control output is ON (always lit when the current output is used)
[mode] key • When this key is pressed and held for more than 1 second in the operation display mode, any of the following operations
from 0 to 7 which have been set previously can be executed:
0 : Mode key does not operate
1 : AUTO/MANUAL mode selection (Initial value)
2 : RUN/READY mode selection
3 : AT (Auto Tuning) start/stop selection
4 : LSP (Local SP) group selection
5 : Release all DO (Digital Output) latches
6 : LSP/RSP mode selection
7 : ON/OFF selection of communication DI1
[display] key This key is used to change the display item in the operation display mode.
When pressing this key in the bank selection, bank setup, or user function setup display mode, the display is changed ot the
operation display.
[para] key When this key is kept pressed for 2 s. or longer in the operation display mode, the display is then changed to the setup
display.
[<], [ ] , [ ] keys Theses keys are used to increase or decrease the numeric value, or to shift the digit.
The [ ] and [ ] keys are used to change the bank or display item.
[enter] key This key is used to begin changing settings (display goes from lit to flashing) and to finalize new settings (display goes from
flashing to steadily lit).
Loader connector This connector is used for connecting to a PC using the dedicated cable supplied with the Smart Loader Package.
: Initial value
(Not for use in Japan) D-1

Flowchart of key operations and displays
When the power
is turned ON
[display] key PV value LSP group Step No. PV value
[display] key number
Upper and lower displays
remain off for 5s after
SP value SP value Step remaining MV value
power ON. Each mode
indicator lights sequentially, (2) time (1)
and then the operation
Timer remaining Internal event 3 Internal event 3 Timer remaining
display appears.
time 3 sub-setting main setting time 2
[display] key
Internal event 3 Setting value Setting value Internal event 2
[para] key delay time delay time
2-second press + hold

[display] key *3 of [para] key
[para] key
[Mode] or [SP] [Event] [PID] [Parameter] [Extended tuning] [Zone]
User [ ] key
function
[ ] key
to (2)
[enter] key
While AUtO 2-second
is flashing, [enter] 2-second press + press + hold
*1
[enter] key key hold of [para] key of [para] key
[ ] key
(AUTO) (MANUAL)
While MAn
is flashing,
[enter] key
to (1)
*2
*2
[para] key
[para] key or
[ ] key
D-2
 Some items are not displayed depending on the availability of optional functions, model number,
display setup (C73 to C78 ) and User level (C79 ).
 Pressing [display] key while bank item or user function item is displayed has the effect of canceling
Operation displays
and returning to the operation display item.
Heat manipulated Cool manipulated MFB PV value CT1 CT2
variable variable [display] key
MV value MV value MFB value AT progress Current value Current value

value
Internal event 2 Internal event 2 Timer remaining Internal event 1 Internal event 1
sub-setting main setting time 1 sub-setting main setting
Setting value Setting value Internal event 1 Setting value Setting value
delay time
Bank selection
[para] key
[Setup] [Event configuration] [DI assignment] [DO assignment] [User function] [Lock] or [Instrument information]
[ ] key
[ ] key
2-second
[enter] key press +
hold of
[para] key
Analog input
SP
Communications
Key operations and displays
Continuous outputs
Control actions
*1 The parameters and numerical values registered as user functions UF are displayed.
*2 In the RSP mode, RSP and PI D.r are displayed first.
*3 If no key is pressed for 3 minutes, the display automatically returns to 2, the basic display.
Position proportional
 Explanation of arrows
[display] key :
[para] key, [ ] key, [para] key or [ ] key :
[enter] key :
SP
 Movement through each setup menu

• [ ] key
• [para] key or [ ] key
D-3
Operation examples Red letters
Blue letters
: Items before operation
: Items during operation
Setup of PV input range type Execution of auto tuning (AT)

1 Press [display] once
to get the operation
2 Press and hold [para]
for more than 2s to get
AT forces ON/OFF of the MV a number of times (a limit cycle) to cal-
culate PID values.
display. the parameter setup Check that this operation does not create any problems for the as-
display. sociated equipment before executing AT.
If the sensor has not been
MOde flashes on the
1 2
wired or is disconnected, Press [display] once Press and hold [para]
an alarm for abnormal PV upper display.
input (any one from AL0 1 to get the operation for more than 2s to get
to AL 1 1 ) may appear on display. the parameter setup
the upper display. display.
MOde flashes on the
upper display.
3 Press [ ] or [ ] repeat-
edly, and Stup flashes
4 Press [enter].
The current set value
on the upper display. for C0 1 (PV input
range type) is
displayed.
3 Press [enter] or [<]
to get A--M on the
4 Press [ ] as needed
until At and at.Of
upper display and appear on the upper
autO on the lower and lower displays
display. respectively.
5 Press [enter].
The rightmost digit on the lower display flashes and its value
If the control method is
ON/OFF control and if Bit
3 (AT stop/start display) of
can be changed. the mode display setting
Press [<], [ ] or [ ] to change to the desired sensor type in the (C73 ) is set to "disabled: 0,"
nothing is displayed.
PV input range list.
Then press [enter] to finalize your selection.
If the number is flashing, the [enter] key has not yet been 5 When [enter] is
pressed, at.Of flashes
6 Press [ ] or [ ] once,
and at.Of flashes on
pressed, and the setting has not yet been saved.
on the lower display. the lower display.
The display flashes only
in RUN and AUTO modes,
and only if there is no PV
problem.
Setup of event operation type Also, if DI is set to "AT stop/
start", the display does not
flash and the setting can-
In this example, the event 1 operation type is set to deviation high not be changed.
limit.
7 If [enter] is pressed, at.ON remains steadily lit and AT begins.
During AT, the rightmost decimal point flashes twice repeat-
edly.
display. the parameter setup When AT is done, the light goes off and the new PID values
display. go into effect.
MOde flashes on the
During the AT process, if the mode is changed to READY or MANUAL, if PV
upper display. input is faulty, or if a power failure occurs, AT stops automatically without
changing the PID values.
AT can also be stopped by changing the setting from At.ON to At.OF (return
to step 4 above).
3 Press [ ] or [ ] repeat-
edly to get evCf
4 Press [enter] to get
e 1.c 1 on the upper
Setup of SP value
flashing on the upper display and 0 is dis-
display. played on the lower 1 Press [display] re-
peatedly so that the
2 If [enter] is pressed,
the rightmost digit
display.
orange SP indicator on the lower display
0 on the lower display indi- lights up on the lower flashes and numerical
cates that the event opera- display. value can be changed.
tion type is set to "none."
The operation display
now shows the SP.
5 When [enter] is
pressed, the rightmost
6 Press [enter], and the
displayed value 4
digit on the lower dis- on the lower display
play flashes. changes from flashing 3 Press [<], [ ] or [ ] to
change to the desired
the displayed value
Press [ ] or [ ] to get 4 to continuously lit and
SP value. is set and the display
flashing on the display. the displayed value
The flashing of the changes from flashing
is set.
4 on the lower display number indicates that to continuously lit.
indicates that the event the setting has not yet
operation type is set for If the [display] key is
deviation high limit. been finalized. pressed without pressing
[enter] key, the status re-
If an SP limit is in effect, the turns to that of step 1.
Similarly, use e2.C 1 to set the event 2 operation type, and use numerical value cannot be
changed to a value above
e3.C 1 for event 3. the limit. The SP limit must
be changed first.
D-4
For step numbers indicated in red like 5 , the following precaution applies:
• If the key lock is set, the numerical value does not flash, and the value cannot be changed.
To change a numerical value, cancel the key lock first.
AUTO/MANUAL mode selection Setup of event value
2 Press and hold [mode]
for more than 2s, Man
In this example, the event set value and hysteresis for the event 1
operation type is set to deviation high limit.
display. flashes on the lower
The [mode] key can be

display. 1 Press [display] once
used for 1 of 7 different If the control method is display. the parameter setup
operations. set to "ON/OFF control"
The initial (factory) set- display. MOde flashes
and if the DI assignment
ting is "AUTO/MANUAL is "AUTO/MANUAL," the on the upper display.
selection". display does not blink
and the setting cannot be
changed.
3 When Man appears,

stop pressing [mode].
4 Press [<], [ ] or [ ] to
The MV is shown on
the lower display.
MV value.
Even while the num-
3 Press [ ] twice or [ ]
repeatedly, and EV
4 Press [enter] to get e 1
on the upper display
The rightmost digit of ber is flashing, the MV flashes on the upper and 0 is displayed on
the MV on the lower is changed at the same display. the lower display.
display flashes and its time that the number
value can be changed. is changed. 0 on the lower display indi-
cates that the event main
setting is "0".
For the flashing MV in step 3, either bumpless transition (the same

value as before the change) or preset MANUAL value (the value set
in setup C20 ) can be selected (in setup C19 , Output operation at 5 If [enter] is pressed,
the rightmost digit
the changed numeri-
changing Auto/Manual). on the lower display cal value is set and
flashes, and can be changes from flashing
changed. to continuously lit.
Execution of position proportional control auto adjust Press [<], [ ] or [ ], and
When control output is R1 (motor relay output) and setup C57 is "0"
value for event set
(initial value) or "1", the following position proportional control auto
value. In this case, the
adjust is necessary. flashing of the numeri-
cal value implies that it
is not yet set.
display. the parameter setup Similarly, use e2 to set a value for event 2, and e3 to set a value
display. MOde flashes for event 3.
on the upper display.
7 To continue from this
point and set hyster-
8 In the same way that
event settings were
esis as well, press [ ] changed, press [enter]
twice or [ ] repeatedly to make the number
to get E 1.HY on the flash, and then press
upper display. The [<], [ ] or [ ] to change
3 Press [ ] or [ ] repeat- 4 Press [enter] to get
C0 1 on the upper
lower display says 5. to the desired setting
edly until StUP is
for hysteresis. After
flashing on the upper display. 5 on the lower display
that, press [enter] to
display. Press [<], [ ] or [ ] to indicates that the event
hysteresis is "5". finalize the setting.
change to C60 .
(C60 : motor adjust)
Similarly, use E2.HY to set a value for event 2, and E3.HY to set a
value for event 3.
Memo
5 If [enter] is pressed, the
lower display flashes.
6 CA.CL is displayed on
the upper display and
Press [ ] or [ ] to get 1 . open contact is ON.
Press [enter] and auto The lower display
adjustment starts. shows the MFB count
value and when count
is stable, CA.OP is dis-
played on the upper
diplay and closed con-
tact is ON.
When the count value
is stable, auto adjust
completes to get op-
eration display.
After starting auto adjust, press [display] key to stop auto adjust.
During auto adjust the key operation except [display] key of stop-
ping auto adjust is impossible.
D-5
List of parameters
: Essential parameters for PV measurement and control
: Basic parameters
: Required parameters when using optional functions
Et [Extended tuning bank]
List of operation displays Display
Item Contents Initial value Setting value
Display Item Contents Initial Setting At.ty AT type 0: Normal 1: Immediate response 2: Stable *1 0
Upper display: PV value value JF.bd  Just-FiTTER setting band 0.00 to 10.00 0.30
Lower display: SP SP.LG  SP lag constant 0.0 to 999.9 0.0
PV SP (Target value) SP low limit to SP high limit 0 At-P  AT Proportional Band adjust 0.00 to 99.99 1.00
SP At-I  AT Integral time adjust 0.00 to 99.99 1.00
LSP 1 (Display example) LSP No. 1 to LSP system group (Max. 8) 1 At-d  AT Derivative time adjust 0.00 to 99.99 1.00
LSP (1st digit: Value at the right end digit) Ctr.A  Control algorithm 0: PID(Conventional PID) 1: Ra-PID(High-performance PID) 0
St 1- (Display example) Step operation remaining time Setting is disabled. – JF.Ov  Just-FiTTER assistance coefficient 0 to 100 0
Step No. The step No. distinguishes up ramp, down ramp, *1 Normal = Standard control characteristics, Immediate response = Control characteristics that respond immediately to
Step remaining time and soak. external disturbance, Stable = Control characteristics having less up/down fluctuation of PV
PV MV (Manipulated Variable) -10.0 to +110.0% Setting is enabled in MANUAL –
MV mode (Numeric value flashed) ZOne [Zone bank]
HEAt Heat MV (Manipulated Variable) Setting is disabled. –
Numeric value -10.0 to +110.0% Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value
COOL Cool MV (Manipulated Variable) – ZO- 1 to ZO-7  Zone 1 to 7 -1999 to +9999U 9999U
Numeric value ZOdf  Zone hysteresis 0 to 9999 5U 5U
fb MFB (Motor opening feedback Setting is disabled. +10.0 to +110.0% –
Numeric value value) Flashing when the value is 0.0 to 100.0% during estimate.
PV
At 1 (Display example)
AT progress display (1st digit=
Numeric value at right end digit)
Setting is disabled. – List of setup setting displays
CT current value 1 Setting is disabled. –
StUP [Setup bank]
Ct 1
Numeric value
Ct2 CT current value 2 Setting is disabled. – Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value
Numeric value
C0 1 PV input range type For details, refer to the PV Input Range Table 88
E1 Internal Event 1 main setting -1999 to +9999U or 0 to 9999U 0
Numeric value C02 Temperature unit 0: Celsius (°C) 1: Fahrenheit (°F) 0
E 1.Sb Internal Event 1 sub setting 0 C03  Cold junction compensation 0: Performed (internal) 1: Not performed (external) 0
Numeric value C04 Decimal point position 0: No decimal point 0
1 to 3: 1 to 3 digits below decimal point
t 1.-- (Display example) Timer remaining time 1 Setting is disabled. –
PV range low limit When the PV input type is DC voltage/DC current, 0
Analog input
Numeric value Upper display: The distinction by ON delay or C05
OFF delay is displayed at the side location of “t1.”. C06 PV range high limit -1999 to +9999U 1000
E2 Internal Event 2 main setting Same as Internal Event 1 main setting 0 C07  SP low limit PV input range low limit to PV input range high 0
Numeric value C08  SP high limit limit 1000
E2.Sb Internal Event 2 sub setting Same as Internal Event 1 sub setting 0 C09  PV square root extraction dropout 0.0 to 100.0% (PV square root extraction is not 0.0
Numeric value performed when set at "0.0".)
t2.-- (Display example) Timer remaining time 2 Same as Timer remaining time 1 – C 10 RSP input range type 0: 4 to 20mA 1: 0 to 20mA 2: 0 to 5V 0
Numeric value 3: 1 to 5V 4: 0 to 10V
Internal Event 3 main setting Same as Internal Event 1 main setting 0 C 1 1 RSP range low limit -1999 to +9999U 0
E3
Numeric value C 12 RSP range high limit 1000
E3.Sb Internal Event 3 sub setting Same as Internal Event 1 sub setting 0 C 13  PID calculation adjustment function *1 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 0
Numeric value C 14 Control action (Direct/Reverse) 0: Heat control (Reverse action) 1: Cool control (Direct action) 0
t3.-- (Display example) Timer remaining time 3 Same as Timer remaining time 1 – C 15  Output operation at PV alarm 0: Control calculation is continued. 0
Numeric value 1: Output at PV alarm is output.
C 16  Output at PV alarm -10.0 to +110.0% 0.0
C 17  Output at READY (Heat) -10.0 to +110.0% 0.0
List of parameter setting displays C 18  Output at READY (Cool) -10.0 to +110.0% 0.0
Control action
C 19  Output operation at changing AUTO/MANUAL 0: Bumpless transfer 1: Preset 0

C20  Preset MANUAL value -10.0 to +110.0% 0.0 or 50.0
MOdE [Mode bank] C2 1  Initial output type (mode) of PID control 0: Auto 1: Not initialized 2: Initialized 0
C22  Initial output of PID control -10.0 to +110.0% 0.0 or 50.0
Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value
C23  PID decimal point position (decimal 0: No decimal point 0
A--M AUTO/MANUAL AUTO : AUTO mode MAN : MANUAL mode AUTO point of integral time and delivative time) 1: 1 digit after decimal point
r--r RUN/READY RUN : RUN mode RDY : READY mode RUN C24  Zone PID operation 0: Disabled 1: Changed by SP 2: Changed by PV 0
l--r LSP/RSP lSp : LSP RSp : RSP LSP C26 Heat/Cool control 0: Not used 1: Used 0
At AT stop/start At.OF : AT stop At.ON : AT start AT stop C27  Heat/Cool 0: Normal 1: Energy saving 0
dO.Lt Release all DO latches Lt.ON : Latch continue Lt.OF : Latch release Latch continue C28 Heat/Cool control dead zone -100.0 to +100.0% 0.0
C.dI 1 Communication DI1 dI .OF : OFF dI .On : ON OFF C29  Heat/Cool change point -10.0 to +110.0% 50.0
C30 LSP system group 1 to 8 1
SP [SP bank] C3 1  SP ramp type 0: Standard 1: Multi-ram
2: Step operation When the power is turned ON
0
Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value again, the step operation is stopped (READY)
3: Step operation When the power is turned ON
RSP RSP Setting is disabled. – again, the step operation is reset
PIDr  PID group No. (RSP) 1 to 8 1 C32  SP ramp unit 0: 0.1U/s 1: 0.1U/min 2: 0.1U/h 1
SP- 1 to SP-8 SP (for LSP 1 to 8) SP low limit to SP high limit 0 C33  STEP time unit 0: 0.1s 1: 1s 2: 1min 0
SP
Pid. 1 to Pid.8  PID group No. (for LSP 1 to 8) 1 to 8 1 C34  STEP PV start 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 0
rMP. 1 to rMP.8  Ramp (for LSP1 to 8) 0 to 9999 0 C35  STEP loop 0: Stop 1: Loop 2: Final step continued 0
tIM. 1 to tI M.8  Time (for LSP to 8) 0.0 to 999.9 or 0 to 9999 0 C36 CT1 operation type 0: Heater burnout detection 1: Current value measurement 0
C37 CT1 output 0 to 1: Control output 1 to 2, 2 to 4: Event output 1 to 3 0
Ev [Event bank] C38
C39
CT1 measurement wait time 30 to 300ms
CT2 operation type Same as CT1
30
0
Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value C40 CT2 output Same as CT1 0
E 1 to E8 Internal Event 1 to 8 main setting -1999 to +9999 or 0 to 9999 * 0 C4 1 CT2 measurement wait time Same as CT1 30
E 1.Sb to E8.Sb Internal Event 1 to 8 sub setting 0 C42 Control output 1 range Current output 1: 4 to 20mA 2: 0 to 20mA 1
Continuous voltage output 1: 1 to 5 V 2: 0 to 5 V 3: 0 to 10 V
E 1.Hy to E8.Hy Internal Event 1 to 8 hysteresis 0 to 9999 * 5
C43 Control output 1 type 0: MV 1: Heat MV 2: Cool MV 3: PV 0
E 1.On to E8.On  Internal Event 1 to 8 ON delay time 0.0 to 999.9 or 0 to 9999 0 4: PV before ratio, bias, and filter 5: SP 6: Deviation
E 1.OF to E8.OF  Internal Event 1 to 8 OFF delay time 0 7: CT1 current value 8: CT2 current value
* The decimal point position varies by meeting the internal event operation type. 9: MFB (Including estimation MFB) 10: SP+MV 11: PV+MV
C44 Control output 1 scaling low limit -1999 to +9999U 0.0
Continuous output
PI D [PID bank] C45 Control output 1 scaling high limit 100.0

C46 Control output 1 MV scalable bandwidth 0 to 9999 (Valid when control output 1 type is 10 or 11) 200
Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value C47 Control output 2 range Same as control output 1 1
P- 1 to P-8 Proportional band (PID1 to 8 group) 0.1 to 999.9% 5.0 C48 Control output 2 type Same as control output 1 3
I - 1 to I -8 Integration time (PID1 to 8 group) 0 to 9999s or 0.0 to 999.9s 120 C49 Control output 2 scaling low limit Same as control output 1 0
(No integration control action when set at "0") C50 Control output 2 scaling high limit Same as control output 1 1000
d- 1 to d-8 Derivative time (PID1 to 8 group) 0 to 9999s or 0.0 to 999.9s 30 C5 1 Control output 2 MV scalable bandwidth Same as control output 1 200
(No derivative control action when set at "0") C52 Auxiliary output range Same as control output 1 1
rE- 1 to rE-8 Manual reset (PID1 to 8 group) -10.0 to +110.0% 50.0 C53 Auxiliary output type Same as control output 1 3
OL- 1 to OL-8 MV low limit (PID1 to 8 group) -10.0 to +110.0% 0.0 C54 Auxiliary output scaling low limit Same as control output 1 0
OH- 1 to OH-8 MV high limit (PID1 to 8 group) -10.0 to +110.0% 100.0 C55 Auxiliary output scaling high limit Same as control output 1 1000
P- 1C to P-8C Cool-side proportional band 0.1 to 999.9% 5.0 C56 Auxiliary output MV scalable bandwidth Same as control output 1 200
(PID1 to 8 group)
C57 Position proportional type 0: MFB control + Estimated position control 0
I - 1C to I -8C Cool-side Integration time (PID1 0 to 9999s or 0.0 to 999.9s 120 1: MFB control
to 8 group) (No integration control action when set at "0")
2: Estimated position control (MFB disabled)
Position proportional
d- 1C to d-8C Cool-side derivative time (PID1 0 to 9999s or 0.0 to 999.9s 30 3: Estimated position control (MFB disabled)
to 8 group) (No derivative control action when set at "0") + Position adjustment at power ON.
OL. 1C to OL.8C Cool-side MV low limit (PID1 to 8 group) -10.0 to +110.0% 0.0 Position proportional dead zone 0.5 to 25.0% 10.0
C58
OH. 1C to OH.8C Cool-side MV high limit (PID1 to 8 group) -10.0 to +110.0% 100.0 Motor long life mode 0: Aiming at controllability 1
C59
1: Aiming at service life of potentiometer
PARA [Parameter bank] C60 Motor adjust 0: Stop 1: Start 0
C6 1 Input with motor fully closed 0 to 9999 1000
Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value C62 Input with motor fully open 0 to 9999 3000
CtrL Control method 0: ON/OFF control 1: Fixed PID 0 or 1 C63 Motor full close-full open time 5.0 to 240.0s 30.0
MV low limit at AT -10.0 to +110.0% 0.0 Communication type 0: CPL 1: Modbus (ASCII format) 2: Modbus (RTU format) 0
Control
At. OL C64
Communication
At. OH MV high limit at AT -10.0 to +110.0% 100.0 C65 Station address 0 to 127 (Communication is disabled when set at "0".) 0
dI FF ON/OFF control differential 0 to 9999U 5 C66 Transmission speed (bps) 0: 4800 1: 9600 2: 19200 3: 38400 2
OFFS  ON/OFF control operating point offset -1999 to +9999U 0 C67 Data format (Data length) 0: 7 bits 1: 8 bits 1
FL PV filter 0.0 to 120.0s 0.0 C68 Data format (Parity) 0: Even parity 1: Odd parity 2: No parity 0
rA  PV ratio 0.001 to 9.999 1.000 C69 Data format (Stop bit) 0: 1 bit 1: 2 bits 0
bI PV bias -1999 to +9999U 0 C70  Communication minimum response time 1 to 250ms 3
PV
fl2  RSP filter 0.0 to 120.0s 0.0 C7 1  Key operation type 0: Standard type 1: Special type 0
ra2  RSP ratio 0.001 to 9.999 1.000 C72 [mode] key function 0: Invalid 1: AUTO/MANUAL selection 1
bI2  RSP bias -1999 to +9999U 0 2: RUN/READY selection 3: AT Stop/Start
CyU  Time proportional cycle unit 1 0 to 3 *1 0 4: LSP group selection 5: Release all DO latches
SP MV Time proportional output
Key operation • display
Time proportional cycle 1 5 to 120s or 1 to 120s *2 10 or 2 6: LSP/RSP selection

Cy
7: Communication DI1 selection 8: Invalid
CyU2  Time proportional cycle unit 2 0 to 3 *1 0
C73  MODE display setup Bit 0: AUTO/MANUAL display (Enabled: +1) 255
Cy2 Time proportional cycle 2 5 to 120s or 1 to 120s *2 10 or 2 (Sum of the weighting) Bit 1: RUN/READY display (Enabled: +2)
tP. ty  Time proportional cycle mode 0: Controllability aiming type 0 or 1 Bit 2: LSP/RSP display (Enabled: +4)
1: Operation end service life aiming type (Only ON/ Bit 3: AT Stop/Start display (Enabled: +8)
OFF operation within Time proportional cycle) Bit 4: Release all DO latches display (Enabled: +16)
outl  MV variation limit 0.0 to 999.9%(No limit when set at "0.0U") 0.0 Bit 5: Communication DI1 ON/OFF display (Enabled: +32)
Other invalid setting, 0, +64, +128
SPU  SP up ramp (U/min) 0.0 to 999.9U(No ramp when set at "0.0U") 0.0 C74  PV/SP display setup Bit 0: PV display (Enabled: +1) 15
SPd  SP down ramp (U/min) 0.0 (Sum of the weighting) Bit 1: SP display (Enabled: +2)
*1 0: Unit of "1s" 1: Fixed at 0.5s 2: Fixed at 0.2s 3: Fixed at 0.1s U: Unit Maximum unit of Industrial volume in Bit 2: LSP group number display (Enabled: +4)
Other invalid setting, 0, +8
*2 5 to 120s when output includes the relay output PV range (°C, Pa,L/min, etc.)
D-6
• Items marked  in the tables are displayed in standard and/or high function configuration.
• To change a user level, refer to Changing the user level in the lower right part of this page.
Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value UF [User function bank]
C75  MV display setup Bit 0: MV display (Enabled: +1) 15
(Sum of the weighting) Bit 1: Heat MV/cool MV display (Enabled: +2) Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value
Bit 2: MFB display (Enabled: +4)
Bit 3: AT progress display (Enabled: +8) UF- 1 to UF-8  User function 1 to 8 – –
C76  Event setting value display 0: Not displayed 0
setup (Operation display) 1: Set value of Internal event 1 is displayed
2: Set values of Internal event 1 to 2 are displayed LOC [Lock bank]
3: Set values of Internal event 1 to 3 are displayed
C77  Event remaining time display setup 0: Not displayed 1: Internal event 1 is displayed 0 Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value
(Operation display) 2: Internal event 1 to 2 is displayed Key lock 0: All settings are possible 0
LOC
3: Internal event 1 to 3 is displayed 1: Mode, event, operation display, SP, UF, lock,
C78  CT input current value display setup 0: Not displayed 1: CT1 current value is displayed 0 manual MV can be set
(Operation display) 2: CT1 to 2 current values are displayed 2: Operation display, SP, UF, lock, manual MV can be set
C79 User level 0: Simple configuration 1: Standard configuration 1 3: UF, lock, manual MV can be set
2: High function configuration
C80  LED monitor 0: Not used 0 C.LOC  Communication lock 0: read/write enabled 1: read/write disabled 0
1: Flashing while data is sending through RS-485 communication. L.LOC  Loader lock 0: read/write enabled 1: read/write disabled 0
2: Flashing while data is receiving through RS-485 communication. PASS Password display 0 to 15 (5: Password 1A to 2B display) 0
3: Logical OR of all DI statuses 4: Flashing in READY mode
C8 1  MS indicating lamp ON condi- 0: Normally OFF 1: Normally ON 2 to 9: Internal event 1 to 8 39 PS 1A Password 1A 0000 to FFFF (Hexadecimal value) 0000
tion (1st priority) 10 to 13: Undefined 14: MV1 15: MV2 16 to 17: Undefined PS2A Password 2A 0000 to FFFF (Hexadecimal value) 0000
18 to 21: DI1 to 4 22 to 25: Undefined Password 1B 0000 to FFFF (Hexadecimal value) 0000
PS 1b
Key operation • display
26 to 30: Internal contact 1 to 5 31 to 33: Undefined

34 to 37: Communication DI 1 to 4 38: MANUAL 39: READY PS2b Password 2B 0000 to FFFF (Hexadecimal value) 0000
40: RSP 41: AT 42: During ramp 43: Undefined 44: Alarm
45: PV alarm 46: Undefined 47: [mode] key pressing status
48: Event output 1 terminal status 49: Control output 1 terminal status I d [Instrument information bank]
C82  MS indicating lamp ON status 0: lit 1: Slow flashing 2: Flashing twice 1
(1st priority) 3: Fast flashing 4: Left to right 5: Right to left Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value
6: Reciprocating between left and right 7: Deviation OK
8: Deviation graph 9: MV graph 10: Heat-side MV graph I d0 1  ROM ID 2: Fixed 0
11: Cool-side MV graph 12: MFB graph 13: DI monitor I d02  ROM Version 1 XX. XX (2 digits after decimal point) –
14: Internal contact monitor 15: Internal event monitor ROM Version 2 XX. XX (2 digits after decimal point) –
I d03 
C83  MS indicating lamp ON condi- Same as MS display, Condition (1st priority) 44
tion (2nd priority) I d04  Loader information –
C84  MS indicating lamp ON status Same as MS display, Status (1st priority) 6 I d05  EST information –
(2nd priority) I d06  Manufacturing date code Subtract 2000 from the year. –
C85  MS indicating lamp ON condi- Same as MS display, Condition (1st priority) 1 (year) Example: "3" means the year 2003.
tion (3rd priority)
I d07  Manufacturing date code Month + day divided by 100. –
C86  MS indicating lamp ON status Same as MS display, Status (1st priority) 9
(3rd priority) (month, day) Example: "12.01" means the 1st day of December.
C87  MS indicating lamp deviation range
0 to 9999U 5 I d08  Serial No. –
C88  Special function 0 to 15 (This value becomes "0" when the power is turned ON.) 0
C89  Zener barrier adjustment
The value can be changed with the adjustment. The numeric 0.00
value cannot be directly input with the manual operation.
C90  Number of CT1 turns 0: 800 turns 1 to 40: CT turns divided by 100 8 Precaution for setup
C9 1  Number of CT1 power wire loops 0: 1 time 1 to 6: Number of times 1
C92  Number of CT2 turns 0: 800 turns 1 to 40: CT turns divided by 100 8 • The type of auto tuning can be changed by changing the value of
 Number of CT2 power wire loops 0: 1 time 1 to 6: Number of times 1
At.ty (AT type) in the extended tuning bank. Set it to match the
C93
C97 PV input failure (under range) 0: -10 %FS 0
type *1 1: -5 mV (This setting is applicable if C01 (PV input range
type) is set for sensor type B (No.17) or PR40-20 (No. 23)) control characteristics.
*1 Cannot be selected if ROM version 1 ( i d 02 ) of the instrument information bank is 2.26 or earlier.
• Make sure that the motor will be adjusted. Set C60 (Motor auto
EvCF [Event configuration bank] adjust) in [Setup bank] to “1” (Start).
Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value • For position proportional control models, derivative time (D) will
E 1.C 1 to E8.C 1 Internal event 1 to 8 Configuration 1 Refer to event type (see page 8) 0
E 1.C2 to E8.C2 Internal event 1 to 8 Configuration 2 The digits are determined to 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and be 0 seconds when AT is complete. If satisfactory control results
4th digit from the right end.
1st digit: Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 cannot be obtained, set At-d (AT derivative time adjust) in
2nd digit: Standby 0: None 1: Standby 2: Standby + Standby at SP change
3rd digit: EVENT state at READY 0: Continue 1: Forced OFF
0
0
[Extended tuning bank] to “1.00.”
4th digit: Undefined 0 0
E 1.C3 to E8.C3  Internal event 1 to 8 Configuration 3 The digits are determined to 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and
1st digit: Alarm OR

4th digit from the right end.
0: None 1: Alarm direct + OR operation
2: Alarm direct + AND operation
0 Memo
3: Alarm reverse + OR operation
4: Alarm reverse + AND operation
2nd digit: Special OFF 0: As usual 0
1: When the event set value (main setting) is 0, the event is "OFF".
3rd digit: Delay time unit 0: 0.1s 1: 1s 2: 1min 0
4th digit: Undefined 0 0
di [DI assignment bank]

dI 1 . 1 to dI 5. 1 Internal contact 1 to 5 0: No function 1: LSP group selection (0/+1) 0
Operation type 2: LSP group selection (0/+2) 3: LSP group selection (0/+4)
4: PID group selection (0/+1) 5: PID group selection (0/+2)
6: PID group selection (0/+4) 7: RUN/READY selection
8: AUTO/MANUAL selection 9: LSP/RSP selection
10: AT Stop/Start 11: Invalid 12: Control action direct/reverse
13: SP Ramp enabled/disabled 14: PV Hold
15: PV Maximum value hold 16: PV Minimum value hold
17: Timer Stop/Start 18: Release all DO latches (Continue/Release)
Changing the user level
19: Advance 20: Step hold
dI 1.2 to dI 5.2  Internal contact 1 to 5 0: Not used (Default input) 1: Function 1 ((A and B) or (C and D)) 0 This controller's user level can be set to 1 of 3 types in setup C79 .
Input bit operation 2: Function 2 ((A or B) and (C or D)) 3: Function 3 (A or B or C or D)
4: Function 4 (A and B and C and D) The number of possible displays and settings decreases according
dI 1.3 to dI 5.3  Internal contact 1 to 5 0: Normally opened 1: Normally closed 2: DI1 3: DI2
Input assignment A 4: DI3 5: DI4 6 to 9: Undefined
2 to 5
or 0 to the user level: high function > standard > simple. All items are
10 to 17: Internal event 1to 8
dI 1.4 to dI 5.4  Internal contact 1 to 5
Input assignment B 18 to 21: Communication DI1 to 4 22: MANUAL 23: READY
0 displayed when high function is selected.
24: RSP 25: AT running 26: During SP ramp
dI 1.5 to dI 5.5  Internal contact 1 to 5 0
1 2
27: Undefined 28: Alarm occurs 29: PV alarm occurs
Input assignment C
dI 1.6 to dI 5.6  Internal contact 1 to 5
30: Undefined 31: mode key pressing status
0
Press [display] once Press [ ] or [ ] repeat-
32: Event output 1 status 33: Control output 1 status
dI 1.7 to dI 5.7
Input assignment D
 Internal contact 1 to 5 The digits are determined to 1st, 2nd, 3rd and
to get the operation edly as needed to get
Polarity A to D 4th digit from the right end. display. STUP flashing on the
1st digit: Polarity A 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0
2nd digit: Polarity B 0 Next, press and hold upper display.
3rd digit: Polarity C 0
4th digit: Polarity D 0 [para] for more than 2s
dI 1.8 to dI 5.8  Internal contact 1 to 5 Polarity 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 to get the parameter
dI 1.9 to dI 5.9  Internal contact 1 to 5 0: Every Internal Event 0
Internal event No. assignment 1 to 8: Internal Event No. setup display. MOde
flashes on the upper
dO [DO assignment bank]
display.
Ot 1. 1 to Ot2. 1�  Control output 1 to 2, event 0: Default output 1 to 2: MV1 to 2 0
4
Ev 1. 1 to Ev3. 1 output 1 to 3 Operation type 3 to 6: Function 1 to 4
Ot 1.2 to Ot2.2�  Control output 1 to 2, event 0: Normally opened 1: Normally closed 14: Output 1 Press [enter]. When [enter] is
Ev 1.2 to Ev3.2 output 1 to 3 Output assign- 2 to 9: Internal Event 1 to 8 10 to 13: Undefined 15: Output 2
ment A 14 to 15: MV1 to 2 16 to 17: Undefined 2: Event 1 C0 1 is shown on the pressed, the lower
18 to 21: DI1 to 4 22 to 25: Undefined
26 to 30: Internal Contact 1 to 5
3: Event 2
4: Event 3 upper display. display flashes.
Ot 1.3 to Ot2.3�  Control output 1 to 2, event output 31 to 33: Undefined 34 to 37: DI1 to 4 38: MANUAL
39: READY 40: RSP mode 41: AT running
0
Press [<], [ ] or [ ] to Press [ ] or [ ] to
Ev 1.3 to Ev3.3 1 to 3 Output assignment B
Ot 1.4 to Ot2.4�
Ev 1.4 to Ev3.4
Ot 1.5 to Ot2.5�


Control output 1 to 2, event output 42: During SP ramp 43: Undefined
1 to 3 Output assignment C 44: Alarm occurs 45: PV alarm occurs
Control output 1 to 2, event output 46: Undefined 47: Mode key pressing status
0
0
3 change to c79 (user
level).
setting, and press
48: Event output 1 status 49: Control output 1 status
Ev 1.5 to Ev3.5 1 to 3 Output assignment D
Control output 1 to 2, event The digits are determined to 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and
[enter] to finalize your
Ot 1.6 to Ot2.6� 
Ev 1.6 to Ev3.6 output 1 to 3 Polarity A to D 4 th digit from the right end. selection.
1st digit: Polarity A 0: Direct 0
2nd digit: Polarity B 1: Reverse 0 0: Simple configuration
3rd digit: Polarity C 0
4the digit: Polarity D 0 1: Standard configuration
Ot 1.7 to Ot2.7�  Control output 1 to 2, event 0: Direct 0 (initial value)
Ev 1.7 to Ev3.7 output 1 to 3 Polarity 1: Reverse 2: High function configuration
Ot 1.8 to Ot2.8�  Control output 1 to 2, event 0: None 1: Latch (Latch at ON) 0
Ev 1.8 to Ev3.8 output 1 to 3 Latch 2: Latch (Latch at OFF except for initialization at power ON)
D-7
PV input range table Event type
[Thermocouple] [RTD]
Operation Set Direct action Reverse action
C0 1 Sensor Range Range C0 1 Sensor Range Range
type value : shows that the ON/OFF is changed at this value. : shows that the ON/OFF is changed at this value.
set value type (°C) (°F) set value type (°C) (°F) : s hows that the ON/OFF is changed at a point : s hows that the ON/OFF is changed at a point
1 K -200 to +1200 -300 to +2200 41 Pt100 -200 to +500 -300 to +900 that "1U" is added to this value. that "1U" is added to this value.
2 K 0 to 1200 0 to 2200 42 JPt100 -200 to +500 -300 to +900 No event 0 Always OFF Always OFF
3 K 0.0 to 800.0 0 to 1500 43 Pt100 -200 to +200 -300 to +400 PV high 1
4 K 0.0 to 600.0 0 to 1100 44 JPt100 -200 to +200 -300 to +400 HYS ON ON HYS
limit
5 K 0.0 to 400.0 0 to 700 45 Pt100 -100 to +300 -150 to +500 Main setting Main setting
6 K -200.0 to +400.0 -300 to +700 46 JPt100 -100 to +300 -150 to +500 PV PV
7 K -200.0 to +200.0 -300 to +400 47 Pt100 -100 to +200 -150 to +400 PV low limit 2
8 J 0 to 1200 0 to 2200 48 JPt100 -100 to +200 -150 to +400 ON HYS HYS ON
9 J 0.0 to 800.0 0 to 1500 49 Pt100 -100 to +150 -150 to +300 Main setting Main setting
PV PV
10 J 0.0 to 600.0 0 to 1100 50 JPt100 -100 to +150 -150 to +300
11 J -200.0 to +400.0 -300 to +700 51 Pt100 -50.0 to +200.0 -50 to +400 PV high/low 3
ON HYS HYS ON HYS ON HYS
12 E 0.0 to 800.0 0 to 1500 52 JPt100 -50.0 to +200.0 -50 to +400 limit
13 E 0.0 to 600.0 0 to 1100 53 Pt100 -50.0 to +100.0 -50 to +200 Main setting *1 Sub-setting *1 Main setting *1 Sub-setting *1
PV PV
14 T -200.0 to +400.0 -300 to +700 54 JPt100 -50.0 to +100.0 -50 to +200
15 R 0 to 1600 0 to 3000 55 Pt100 -50.0 to +100.0 -50 to +200 Deviation 4
HYS ON ON HYS
16 S 0 to 1600 0 to 3000 56 JPt100 -60.0 to +40.0 -60 to +100 high limit
17 B 0 to 1800 0 to 3300 57 Pt100 -60.0 to +40.0 -60 to +100 SP + Main setting SP + Main setting
PV PV
18 N 0 to 1300 0 to 2300 58 JPt100 -40.0 to +60.0 -40 to +140
19 PL II 0 to 1300 0 to 2300 59 Pt100 -40.0 to +60.0 -40 to +140 Deviation 5
low limit ON HYS HYS ON
20 WRe5-26 0 to 1400 0 to 2400 60 JPt100 -10.00 to +60.00 -10 to +140
21 WRe5-26 0 to 2300 0 to 4200 61 Pt100 -10.00 to +60.00 -10 to +140 SP + Main setting SP + Main setting
PV PV
22 Ni-Ni·Mo 0 to 1300 0 to 2300 62 JPt100 0.0 to 100.0 0 to 200
Deviation 6
23 PR40-20 0 to 1900 0 to 3400 63 Pt100 0.0 to 100.0 0 to 200 ON HYS HYS ON HYS ON HYS
high/low
24 DIN U -200.0 to +400.0 -300 to +700 64 JPt100 0.0 to 200.0 0 to 400
limit Main setting Sub-setting Main setting Sub-setting
25 DIN L -100.0 to +800.0 -150 to +1500 65 Pt100 0.0 to 300.0 0 to 500
26 Gold iron 0.0K to 360.0 K 0 to 360 K 66 JPt100 0.0 to 300.0 0 to 500 SP PV SP
chromel PV
67 Pt100 0 to 500 0 to 900
68 JPt100 0 to 500 0 to 900 Deviation 7
HYS ON ON HYS
[DC voltage/DC current] high limit
(Final SP SP + Main setting SP + Main setting
C0 1 set value Input type Range PV PV
reference)
81 0 to 10 mV The scaling and deci-
82 -10 to +10 mV mal point position can Deviation 8
low limit ON HYS HYS ON
83 0 to 100 mV be changed variably
in a range of –1999 to (Final SP SP + Main setting SP + Main setting
84 0 to 1 V PV PV
86 1 to 5 V +9999 reference)
87 0 to 5 V Deviation 9
88 0 to 10 V high/
89 0 to 20 mA Initial value low limit Main setting Sub-setting Main setting Sub-setting
90 4 to 20 mA (Final SP SP SP
reference) PV PV
*1 • The accuracy of the B thermocouple is ±4.0 %FS for a range of 260 °C or less, ±0.4 %FS for 260
to 800 °C and ±0.2 %FS for 800 to 1800 °C. The PV values under 20 °C are not shown. Heater 1 16
• The accuracy of the No.15 (sensor type R) or No.16 (sensor type S) is ±0.2 %FS for a range of 100 burnout/
°C or less, and ±0.15 %FS for 100 to 1600 °C. Over-current Main setting *1 Sub-setting *1 Main setting *1 Sub-setting *1
• The accuracy of the No.23 (sensor type PR40-20) is ±2.5 %FS for 0 to 300 °C, and ±1.5 %FS for CT1 at output ON CT1 at output ON
300 to 800 °C, ±0.5 %FS for 800 to 1900 °C. OFF before measuring the CT1 current value OFF before measuring CT1 current value
• The accuracy of the No.26 (sensor type gold iron chromel) is ±1.5 K.
Heater 1 17
• The accuracy of the No. 55 to 62 and 81 are ±0.15 %FS ±1digit for each ranges. HYS ON ON HYS
short-circuit
*2 The indicated low limit for a B thermocouple is 20 °C. However, if ROM version 1 of the instrument Main setting Main setting
information bank (I d02 ) is prior to 2.04, the value is -180 °C. CT1 at output OFF CT1 at output OFF
OFF before measuring CT1 current value OFF before measuring CT1 current value
List of alarm codes Heater 2 18
burnout/
Alarm Failure name Cause Corrective action Over-current Main setitng *1 Sub-setting *1 Main setting *1 Sub-setting *1
code CT2 at output ON CT2 at output ON
AL0 1PV input failure Sensor burnout, incorrect wiring, Check the wiring. OFF before measuring CT2 current value OFF before measuirng CT2 current value
(Over-range) incorrect PV input type setting Set the PV input type
Heater 2 19
AL02 PV input failure Sensor burnout, incorrect wiring, again. HYS ON ON HYS
short-circuit
(Under-range) incorrect PV input type setting Main setting Main setting
AL03 CJ failure Terminal temperature is Check the ambient CT2 at output OFF CT2 at output OFF
faulty (thermocouple). temperature.
OFF before measuring CT2 current value OFF before measuring CT2 current value
PV input failure Sensor burnout, incorrect Check the wiring.
(RTD) wiring Alarm 23 ON if alarm occurs (alarm code AL01 to 99). OFF if alarm occurs (alarm code AL01 to 99).
(status) OFF in other cases. ON in other cases.
AL05 RSP input failure *1 Sensor line break, incorrect Checking wiring or reset
(over range) wiring, incorrect RSP range RSP range code. High and 33
Input failure
RSP input failure *1 setting low limits of

AL06
MFB value*2 Main setting*1 Sub-setting*1 Main setting*1 Sub-setting*1
(under range)
MFB MFB
AL07 MFB input failure Motor line break, incorrect Checking wiring or confirm
wiring the MFB input. : initial value
AL 10 Motor adjust- Motor line break, incorrect wir- Checking wiring, confirm the
ment failure ing, motor power supply failure. motor power supply, reset. *1 If the main setting is greater than the sub-setting, operations are performed with the
AL 1 1 CT input failure A current exceeding the • Use a CT with the cor- main setting and sub-setting automatically swapped.
(Over-range) upper limit of the display rect number of turns for *2 Motor feedback
(CT input 1 or 2, range was measured. The the display range.
or both) number of CT turns or the • Reset the number of CT Event types other than the above:
number of CT power wire turns. Operation type Set Operation type Set Operation type Set
loops is incorrectly set, or • Reset the number of CT value value value
wiring is incorrect. power wire loops.
• Check the wiring. SP high limit 10 Loop diagnosis 1 20 During AT (status) 27
AL70 A/D conversion A/D converter is faulty. Replace the unit. SP low limit 11 Loop diagnosis 2 21 During SP ramp 28
failure SP high/low limit 12 Loop diagnosis 3 22 Control action (status) 29
AL95 Parameter failure Power is shut-down while • Restart the unit.
MV high limit 13 READY (status) 24 ST setting standby (status) 30
the data is being set, or • Set the data again (set
data is corrupted by noise. data for AL95 /97 and MV low limit 14 MANUAL (status) 25 Estimated position contorol (status) 31
AL96 Adjustment data Power is shut-down while adjustment data for
Unit failure
MV high/low limit 15 RSP (status) 26 Timer (status) 32

failure the data is being set, or AL96 /98 .
data is corrupted by noise. • Replace the unit.
AL97 Parameter failure Data is corrupted by noise.
(RAM area)
AL98 Adjustment data Data is corrupted by noise.
failure (RAM area)
AL99 ROM failure ROM (memory) is faulty. • Reset the unit.
• Replace the unit.
*1 D
isplays in RSP mode
• If ROM version 1 (i d02 ) of the instrument information bank
is 2.04 or earlier, CT input failure (AL 1 1 ) is not displayed.
D-8
Chapter 1. OVERVIEW
1 - 1 Overview
This unit is a compact controller having a mask of 48 × 96 mm or 96 × 96 mm and provides the following features:
• The depth is only 65 mm, providing excellent space-saving.
• The front panel is only 5 mm thick. This ensures excellent thin design.
• The display panel is large. This provides excellent visibility.
• [mode] key, [para] key, digit-shift keys, [display] key, and [enter] key are
provided on the front panel. This ensures easy setup operation.
• Various input types are available, thermocouples (K, J, E, T, R, S, B, N, PLII,

WRe5-26, Ni-NiMo, PR40-20, DIN U, DIN L, gold iron chromel), RTDs (Pt100,
JPt100), current signals (4 to 20 mAdc, 0 to 20 mAdc), and voltage signals (0 to
10 mV DC, -10 to +10 mV DC, 0 to 1 V DC, 1 to 5 V DC, 0 to 5 V DC, and 0 to
10 V DC).
• The accuracy is ±0.1 %FS and the sampling cycle time is 0.1 s. This ensures high
accuracy.
• For control output types, relay, voltage pulse for driving SSR, current output, and
continuous voltage outputs are provided. Additionally, these control output types
can be combined for control outputs 1 and 2.
• Three event output points or two event output points (independent contacts) are
provided as standard functions.
• 2-point CT input, 4-point digital input, RSP input, and RS-485 can be combined
as optional functions.
• Current output or continuous voltage output is provided as auxiliary output.
• The unit can be configured for the heat/cool control using the 2nd control output
and/or event relay.
• The unit can be controlled by means of the ON/OFF control or fixed PID control
method.
• In addition to the PID control, two algorithms, RationaLOOP and Just-FiTTER,

are built-in, which ensures excellent controllability.
• The personal computer loader port is provided as standard function. The setup
can be configured easily with use of the personal computer loader.
• Use of optional the SLP-C35 Smart Loader Package makes it possible to easily
perform the read/write operation of the parameters.
In addition to the table format setup, the operation and control status can be
monitored using the trend display. This unit can be operated without use of
program on the host unit.
• The unit conforms to the IEC directive and the CE marking is affixed on the unit.
(Standards compliance: EN61010-1 and EN61326-1)
1-1
Chapter 1. OVERVIEW
Model selection table

The following shows the model selection table of this unit:
Basic Mounting Control PV Power Option Additional treatment Specifications Notes
model No. output input supply
1 2 1 2
C35 SDC35 Mask size 48 mm × 96 mm
C36 SDC36 Mask size 96 mm × 96 mm
T Panel mounting type
Control output 1 Control output 2
R0 Relay output NO None (relay output for
control output 1: NC)
(Note 1) R1 Motor drive relay output Motor drive relay output With
OPEN side CLOSE side MFB
V0 Voltage pulse output None (for SSR drive)
(for SSR drive)
VC Voltage pulse output Current output
(for SSR drive)
VD Voltage pulse output Continuous voltage output
(for SSR drive)
VV Voltage pulse output Voltage pulse output
(for SSR drive) (for SSR drive)
C0 Current output None
CC Current output Current output
CD Current output Continuous voltage output
D0 Continuous voltage output None
DD Continuous voltage output Continuous voltage output
U Universal
A AC Model (100 to 240 V AC)
D DC Model (24 V AC/24 V DC)
1 Event relay outputs 3 points
2 Event relay output: 3 points, auxiliary output (current output)
3 Event relay output: 3 points, auxiliary output (voltage output)
(Note 1) 4 Event relay output: 2 points (independent contact)
(Note 1) 5 Event relay output: 2 points (independent contact),
auxiliary output (current output)
(Note 1) 6 Event relay output: 2 points (independent contact),
auxiliary output (voltage output)
0 None
(Notes 2, 3) 1 Current transformer input: 2 points,
Digital input: 4 points
Digital input: 4 points, RS-485 communication
Digital input: 2 points, RSP input
(Notes 2, 3) 4 Current transformer input: 2 points, Digital input: 2
points, RSP input, RS-485 communication
(Note 4) 0 No additional treatment
D Inspection Certificate provided
Y Complying with the traceability certification
Note 1. Can not be selected for the DC Model. 0 None
Note 2. Current transformer sold separately. A UL-marked product
Note 3. When the control output is R1, the current transformer input is not applied. MFB input is applied instead.
Note 4. Additionally, tropicalization and anti-sulfidation treatments can be ordered. However, there are some
specifications restrictions. For details, contact the azbil Group.
1-2
Chapter 1. OVERVIEW

Name Model No.
Mounting bracket 81409654-001 (Accessory)
Current transformer QN206A* (800 turns, 5.8 mm hole dia.)
QN212A* (800 turns, 12 mm hole dia.)
Hard cover 81446915-001 (for C35)
81446916-001 (for C36)
Soft cover 81441121-001 (for C35)
81441122-001 (for C36)
Terminal cover 81446912-001 (for C35)
81446913-001 (for C36)
* Not UL-certified.
1-3
Chapter 1. OVERVIEW
1 - 2 Part Names and Functions

Main unit and console

C35
zz
pv
Upper display
sp
out
Lower display
man rsp ev1 ev2 ev3 ot1 ot2

Mode indicator
mode display
[mode] key [display] key

enter
[<], [ ], and [ ] keys [enter] key
<
<
para
[para] key
Model No. and serial No. label

Console Loader connector
Main unit
Jack cover
Cap
C36
zz
man pv
rsp
ev1
Upper display
Mode ev2
indicator ev3
sp
ot1
out
Lower display
ot2
Multi-Status (MS)
mode display display
[mode] key [display] key
para enter
[para] key
Loader connector
Console [enter] key
Model No and serial No. label [<], [ ] and [ ] keys
<
<
Main unit
Jack cover
Cap
Main unit: Contains the electronic circuit for I/O signals of measuring
instruments, CPU, and memory.
Console: Contains the display panel showing numeric value and status, and
operation keys.
Cap: Covers the slit, which is used to pull out the console from the main
unit.
The user must not touch the cap. This cap is used only by Azbil
Corporation’s engineers when repairing this controller. If the cap is pulled
forcibly, this may be broken.
1-4
Chapter 1. OVERVIEW
Detailed description of console

zz
[mode] key
When this key is kept pressed for 1 s or longer in the operation display mode, any
of the following operations, which have been set previously, can be performed:
• AUTO/MANUAL mode selection
• RUN/READY mode selection
• Auto Tuning (AT) start/stop selection
• Local SP (LSP) group selection
• Release all Digital Output (DO) latches
• LSP/RSP mode selection
• ON/OFF selection of communication Digital Input (DI) 1
When pressing the [mode] key in the setup display mode, the display is changed
to the operation display.
[display] key
This key is used to change the display item in the operation display mode.
When pressing this key in the bank selection, bank setup, or user function setup
display mode, the display is changed to the operation display.
[para] key
When this key is kept pressed for 2 s or longer in the operation display mode, the
display is then changed to the bank selection display.
[<], [ ], [ ] keys
<
<
These keys are used to increase or decrease the numeric value, or to shift the
digit.
The [ ] and [ ] keys are used to change the bank in the bank selection display
<
<
mode. In the bank setup display mode, these keys are used to change the display
item.
[enter] key
This key is used to start changing setup values. Additionally, the key is also used
to set setup values currently being changed.
When pressing this key in the bank selection display mode, the bank is set and
the display is changed to the bank setup display.
Upper display
This display shows the PV value or the name of each display item (display value
or set value). If an alarm occurs in the operation display mode, the normal
display and alarm code are displayed alternately.
The decimal point at the right end digit shows auto tuning (AT) status. The
decimal point flashes twice repeatedly during execution of AT.
Lower display
This display shows the SP value, or the display value or set value of each display
item. The decimal point at the right end digit shows the RUN/READY mode or
communication status.
1-5
Chapter 1. OVERVIEW
Mode indicators
[man]: AUTO/MANUAL mode indicator. Lights in MANUAL

mode.
[rsp]: LSP/RSP mode indicator. Lights in RSP mode.
[ev1], [ev2], [ev3]: Event output 1 to 3 indicator. Lights when event relays are
ON.
[ot1], [ot2]: Control output 1 and 2 indicator. Lights when the control
output is ON. The indicators are always lit when the current
output or continuous voltage output is used.
By combining the lighting conditions with the lighting status, three groups can be
set for priority display.
For lighting conditions, the internal event ON status, DI ON status, and READY
mode are provided.
For lighting status, flashing, reciprocating between left and right, and MV graph
are provided.
Jack cover: This jack cover protects the loader connector. When
connecting the loader, pull this cover upward by finger.
Loader connector: This connector is used for connecting to a personal computer

using the dedicated cable supplied with the Smart Loader
Package.
• To select the LSP group using the [mode] key, it is necessary to set a value
of “2” or more in [LSP system group].
• To show the RUN/READY mode and communication status using the
decimal point at the right end digit on the lower display, select “High
function configuration” and make the [LED monitor] settings.
• Do not operate the key with a sharp object (such as tip of mechanical
pencil or needle). Doing so might cause the unit to malfunction.
• If the jack cover is pulled forcibly, it may be broken. Never attempt to pull
this cover forcibly.
1-6
Chapter 1. OVERVIEW
Rear panel

C35
zz
Terminal part
C36
zz
Terminal part
Terminal part: The power supply, input, and output are connected to the terminals.
The M3 screw is used. When connecting to the terminal, always use
a correct crimp type terminal lug suitable for the M3 screw.
The tightening torque of the terminal screw is 0.4 to 0.6 N·m.
1-7
2 - 1 Input/Output Configuration
Other
Control output 1, 2
(Current output/
Analog continuous voltage output)
PV input PV output
process process
Control Auxiliary output
process (Current output/
RSP input RSP (ON/OFF continuous voltage output)
process control,
PID control)
Digital
Digital input 1 to 4 input
process
Control output 1, 2
(Relay output,
voltage pulse output)
CT Event process
CT input 1, 2
process
Digital
Event output 1 to 3
output
Other (Relay output)
process
Position
MFB input MFB process proportional
process
Other
PV input
zz
Sensor or range is selected for the PV input. When the PV input is the DC voltage
or DC current, the PV scaling high limit/low limit can be set.
Control output
zz
When the control output type of the model is “R: Relay” or “V: Voltage pulse”,
the control output becomes the ON-OFF control output or time proportional
output. When the time proportional output is used, the time proportioning cycle
time can be set. When the control output type of the model is “C: Current” or “D:
Continuous voltage”, the control output becomes the continuous output (analog
output). When the model has two control outputs, the heat/cool control can be
used only with "Basic configuration".
When the control output type of the model is “R1: Position proportional output +
MFB”, the position proportional control can be performed using two relays.
Event output
zz
When the model provides the event, the alarm or control mode set in [Event type]
can be output as digital output (DO).
Digital input (DI)
zz
When the model provides the DI, the function set with the DI assignments can be
selected.
Current transformer (CT) input
zz
When the model provides the CT input, the heater burnout alarm can be output
from the event output.
Remote SP (RSP) input
zz
When the model provides the RSP input, the range of the RSP input can be selected
and the RSP input range scaling low limit/high limit can be set.
Motor Feed Back (MFB) input
zz
When the model provides the position proportional output, the feedback data of
the modutrol motor opening can be input.
2-1
2 - 2 Key Operation

Various displays or settings can be called up on the console through key operation.
The following describes the general flow of key operation:
The display and setting data are arranged as shown in the following tree-structure:
Operation Display
PV and SP 5-96 Bank Selection
LSP group selection 5-33 Mode Mode bank
Step No. and remaining time SP AUTO/MANUAL 5-10
of step operation 5-48
Event RUN/READY 5-10
PV and MV 5-97 PID LSP/RSP 5-10
Heat MV 5-97 Parameter AT stop/start 5-11
Cool MV 5-97 Extended tuning Release all DO latches 5-11
MFB 5-97 Zone Communication DI 1 5-11
AT progress 5-97 Setup
CT input 1 current value 5-99 Event configuration SP bank
CT input 2 current value 5-99 DI assignment LSP1 group SP 5-43
Internal Event 1 main setting 5-68 DO assignment LSP1 group PID 5-43
Internal Event 1 sub-setting 5-68 User function LSP1 group ramp 5-43
Timer remaining time 1 5-98 Lock LSP1 group hold time 5-43
Internal Event 2 main setting 5-68 Instrument information
•••
Internal Event 2 sub-setting 5-68 LSP8 group SP 5-43
Timer remaining time 2 5-98 LSP8 group PID 5-43
Internal Event 3 main setting 5-68 LSP8 group ramp 5-43
Internal Event 3 sub-setting 5-68
LSP8 group hold time 5-43
Timer remaining time 3 5-98
Various banks
User Function (Utilization)
•••
User Function 1 5-103
User Function 2 5-103 Lock bank
User Function 3 5-103 Key lock 5-107
User Function 4 5-103 Communication lock 5-107
•••
User Function 6 5-103 Password 1B 5-108

User Function 7 5-103 Password 2B 5-108
ROM ID 6-30
ROM version 1 6-30
•••
Manufacturing date code (month, day) 6-30

Serial No. 6-30
(Note) The figures shown on the right of the display and setting columns in the tree-structure indicate the relevant pages.
2-2
Display when the power is turned ON. The mode indicators are lit sequentially form the
SDC36
left during a period of 5 to 6 sec after the power
OFF
man
pv
rsp
has been turned ON while both the upper display

ev1
ev2
ev3
OFF
sp
and lower display are OFF.

ot1
out
ot2
When all mode indicators have been lit, the display

mode display
para enter
is changed to the operation display.
No key operation for 3 minutes No key operation for

or more. 3 minutes or more.
Press the [display] or [mode] key. Press the [display] or [mode] key.
Operation display Bank selection display Bank setup display

Keep the (example. mode bank)
[para] key
pressed
for 2 sec.
Press the
PV/SP display or longer. Mode bank selection [enter] or
AUTO/MANUAL
[<] key.
change
Press the [para] key.
Press the [display] key.
Press the [ ] [ ] key. Press the [para] key.
<
<
Press the [ ] [ ] key.
<
<
MV display SP bank selection
RUN/READY change

Press the [display] key. Press the [ ] [ ] key. Keep the
<
<
Press the [ ] [ ] key.

<
<
Other display and setup Other banks [para] key

pressed Other setup
(Operate the [display] (Operate the [para], [ ]
for 2 sec. (Operate the [para], [ ]
key repeatedly.) and [ ] keys repeatedly.)
or longer. and [ ] keys repeatedly.)
Press the [para] key. Press the [para] key.

Press the [display] key. Press the [ ] [ ] key. Press the [ ] [ ] key.
<
<
<
<
The display and setup status shown above are examples for explanation.
Therefore, some displays or settings are not shown actually according to the
model and/or setup contents.
• For details about display and setup contents of the operation display,
Bank selection display, and Bank setup display,
6 - 1 List of Operation Displays (p. 6-1),
6 - 2 List of Parameter Setting Displays (p. 6-3) and
6 - 3 List of Setup Setting Displays (p. 6-12).
In the lists shown above, the banks to which each setting item is
belonged are described.
• When pressing the [<] key with the [para] key kept pressed instead of
pressing of the [para] key on the setting display, various displays and
settings can be operated in the reverse order. However, the operation
that both the [para] key and [<] key are kept pressed for 2 s or longer, is
invalid.
• When pressing the [<] key with the [display] key kept pressed instead of
pressing the [display] key in the operation display mode, various displays
and setting displays can be operated in the reverse order.
2-3
Data setting procedures

Two types of data setting procedures are provided, standard type and special type.
A desired type can be selected using the setup bank [C7 1: Key operation mode/
type].
Standard type: The [enter] key is used to start changing the setup value and
to set the value currently being changed.
Special type: The [<], [ ], or [ ] key is used to start changing the setup
<
<
value. To set the value currently being changed, wait for 2 s
without pressing of any key. (However, only the standard type
operation can be performed in the bank setup display mode.)
Type setup Setup bank Setup bank

Display mode C7 1 = 0 C7 1 = 1
Operation display Standard type Special type
Bank setup display Standard type Standard type
User function setup display Standard type Special type
Standard type
zz
(1) Operate the [display], [para], [<], [ ], or [ ] key to display desired data to be
<
<
set.
(How to display the data is explained in "General flow of key operation"

described previously.)
pv pv
sp sp
(This Figure shows the display when (This Figure shows the display when
setting the PV range type of the setup setting the RUN/Ready selection in
setting [C01].) the parameter setting [r--r].)
(2) Press the [enter] key.

>> W
hen the lower display shows a numeric value, the 1st digit starts flashing.
Additionally, when the lower display shows a character string, the entire
character string starts flashing.
When a numeric value is displayed, the value can be increased or decreased
or the flashing digit can be moved using the [<], [ ], or [ ] key.
<
<
When a character string is displayed, the entire flashing character string

can be changed using the [ ], or [ ] key.
<
<
pv pv
sp sp
the 1st digit of "0001" is flashing.) the entire character string "rUn" is
flashing.)

2-4
(3) Press the [enter] key.
>> The flashing display is stopped, and then the data you have changed is set.
pv pv
sp sp
Special type
zz
(1) Operate the [display] or [para] key to display desired data to be set.
(How to display the data is explained in "General flow of key operation"

described previously.)
pv pv
sp sp
setting the PV range type of the setup setting the RUN/Ready selection in
setting [C01].) the parameter setting [r--r].)
(2) Press any of the [<], [ ], and [ ] keys.

<
<
>> W
hen the lower display shows a numeric value, the 1st digit starts flashing.
Additionally, when the lower display shows a character string, the entire
character string starts flashing.
When a numeric value is displayed, the value can be increased or decreased
or the flashing digit can be moved using the [<], [ ], or [ ] key.
<
<
When a character string is displayed, the entire flashing character string

can be changed using the [ ], or [ ] key.
<
<
pv pv
sp sp
the 1st digit of "0001" is flashing.) the entire character string "rUn" is
flashing.)
2-5
(3) Release the key and wait for a while.
>> After 2 s have elapsed, the flashing display is stopped, and then the data you
have changed is set.
pv pv
sp sp
• If the data does not start flashing even though the [enter] key is pressed
(for a standard type) or the [<], [ ], or [ ] key is pressed (for a special
<
<
type), this data cannot be changed.
For example, when the RUN/READY is assigned in the DI Assignment,
RUN/READY cannot be selected using the key on the front panel.
• If the character string cannot be changed using the [ ] key while the
<
entire character string is flashing, press the [ ] key.
<
On the contrary, if the character string cannot be changed using the [ ]
<
key, press the [ ] key.
<
• When pressing the [para] key while the display is flashing on the bank
setup display or user function setup display, the next data is displayed
without changing of the data. Additionally, when pressing the [display]
or [mode] key while the display is flashing, the display returns to the
operation display without changing of the data.
• When pressing the [display] key while the display is flashing on the
operation display, the next data is displayed without changing of the
data.
• The MV (manipulated variable) display in the MANUAL mode continues
the flashing status even after pressing of the key has been stopped. At
this time, the flashing value is output as MV.
2-6
[mode] key operating procedures

When the [mode] key is kept pressed for 1 s or longer on the operation display, the
selection operation, which has been set using the [mode] key function (C72) of the
setup setting, can be performed.
The Figure on the right shows an example that the
[mode] key is pressed in the RUN/READY selection pv
(C72 = 2) setting.
(1) If the current mode is the READY mode when

the PV/SP is shown on the operation display,
the character string "rUn" on the lower display
starts flashing.
(2) When the [mode] key is kept pressed for 1 s

pv
or longer, the READY mode is changed to the
RUN mode and the flashing of the character
string "rUn" is stopped.
(3) When pressing of the [mode] key is stopped, pv

the display is returned to the original display.
• If the MODE key function of the setup setting is set disabled (C72 = 0) or
if the set selection operation is invalid, the selection operation cannot be
performed using the [mode] key.
• When pressing the [mode] key on the parameter setting display or setup
setting display instead of the operation display, the display is returned
to the operation display. However, even though the [mode] key is kept
pressed continually, the selection operation cannot be performed. In this
case, stop pressing the key once, and then press the [mode] key.
User level

The user level of this unit can be selected from three levels, "Basic configuration",
"Standard configuration", and "High function configuration" using [C79: User
level] of the setup setting.
Chapter 6. LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA.
Even though the user level is changed, the functions other than setting
display cannot be changed. The user level is set to "Standard configuration"
or "High function configuration" and more advanced functions are set.
After that, when the setup is returned to "Basic configuration", this function
setup cannot be displayed, but the function itself is operated.
2-7
2 - 3 Operation Modes

The following shows the transition of operation modes:
RUN + AUTO mode READY + AUTO mode
LSP mode RSP mode LSP mode RSP mode
RUN/READY
AT stop AT running AT stop
AUTO/MANUAL AUTO/MANUAL
RUN + MANUAL mode READY + MANUAL mode
LSP mode RSP mode RUN/READY LSP mode RSP mode
AT stop AT stop
RUN: Control status
READY: Control stop status
AUTO: Automatic operation (This unit automatically determines the MV values.)
MANUAL: Manual operation (The MV values are operated manually.)
LSP: Local SP (The control is performed using the SP stored in the measuring instrument.)
RSP: Remote SP (The analog input from the external device is used as SP.)
AT: Auto tuning (The PID constants are set automatically using the limit cycle.)
2-8
CAUTION
Use this device within the operating ranges recommended in the specifications (temperature,
humidity, voltage, vibration, shock, mounting direction, atmosphere, etc.).
Do not block ventilation holes.
Installation locations

Choose an installation location with the following characteristics:
• With the exception of supply power and relay contact output, the I/O common
mode voltage to ground must be 30 Vrms max., 42.4 V peak max., 60 V DC max.
• Not subject to high or low temperature/humidity.
• Free from cilicone gas and other corrosive gases such as sulfide gas.
• Little dust or soot.
• Appropriate protection from direct sunlight, wind or rain.
• Little mechanical vibration or shock.
• Not under high voltage lines or near welding machines or other sources of
electrical noise.
• At least 15m away from high voltage ignition device for a boiler, etc.
• Not subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• No flammable liquids or fumes.
• Indoors
External dimensions

C35
zz Unit: mm
5 65 43.8
48 Mounting bracket (Accessory)
Terminal screw M3
SDC35
pv
sp
out
91.8
105
man rsp ev1 ev2 ev3 ot1 ot2

96
mode display
enter
para
7.2
C36
zz Unit: mm
5 65 91.8
96 Mounting bracket (Accessory) Terminal screw M3
SDC36
man
pv
rsp
ev1
ev2
ev3
sp
ot1
91.8
105
out
96
ot2
mode display
para enter
7.2
3-1
Panel cutout dimensions

Make the mounting holes according to the panel hole marking dimensions.
C35
zz Unit: mm
Stand-alone mounting Gang-mounting

30 min. 44+0.5
0 (48xN-4) +0.5
0
92 +0.5
92 +0.5
0
0
30 min.
C36
zz Unit: mm
Stand-alone mounting Gang-mounting

30 min. 92 +0.5
0 (96xN-4) +0.5
0
+0.5
+0.5
0
0
92
92
30 min.
• When three or more units are gang-mounted horizontally, the maximum
allowable ambient temperature is 40 °C.
• Provide a space of at least 30 mm or more above and below the controller.
3-2
Mounting procedures

• The mounting must be horizontal within 10 degrees tilted on the back side
lowering or within 10 degrees tilted on the back side rising.
• The mounting panel should be used with a thickness of less than 9 mm of firm
board.
Ordinal mounting
zz
Tools:
Phillips-head screwdriver
Mounting bracket
Panel hole
Grooves for mounting brackets

(top and bottom)
Main unit
Screws for
mounting bracket
Plate thickness is
9 mm or less.
Panel
(1) Insert this unit from the front of the panel.
(2) Fit the mounting bracket from the back of the panel.
(3) Push the mounting bracket against the panel until the hook of the mounting
bracket is firmly engaged with the groove of the main unit.
(4) Tighten the upper and lower screws of the mounting bracket.
• To fasten this controller onto the panel, tighten a mounting bracket
screws, and turn one more half turn when there is no play between the
bracket and panel. Excessive tightening of the screws may deform the
controller case.
3-3
Using a hard cover

zz
For panel mounting type, it is possible to attach the hard cover to the front console.
Use of hard cover makes it possible to prevent the settings from being changed due
to accidental operation or to operate the unit in poor installation environment. The
display can be seen with the cover kept closed. Raise the cover to operate the key.
Items to be prepared:
Hard cover (for SDC35) Part No. 81446915-001 (Optional unit)
Hard cover (for SDC36) Part No. 81446916-001 (Optional unit)
Hard cover
Panel
Main unit
(1) As shown in the Figure, mount the hard cover.

(2) Insert this unit from the front of the panel.
bracket and panel. Excessively tightening the screws may deform the
controller case.
How to use the hard cover

zz
When operating the unit with the hard cover, flip the lower end of the cover
upward. At this time, the cover is so designed that it can be kept open without
holding the cover by hand.
After the cover has been flipped upward, slide it to the right as shown in the Figure.
The hard cover is then locked/latched at an angle of approximately 30 ° to the panel
surface. In this status, the key operation and loader connection can be made.
To return the cover to the previous position, slide the cover to the left and when
released it flips downward and covers the unit.
Top cover of hard cover
30 ˚
Keep the cover open.
3-4
Using a soft cover

zz
For the panel mounting type, it is possible to attach the soft cover to the front
console.
The key can be operated with the soft cover attached.
Attaching the soft cover to the front console provides the protection (IP66) similar
to the waterproof mounting using the gasket.
Items to be prepared:
Soft cover (for SDC35) Part No. 81441121-001 (Optional unit)
(for SDC36) Part No. 81441122-001 (Optional unit)
Panel
Main unit
Soft cover
Main unit
Soft cover
Panel
The gasket supplied with the main unit is not used.
(1) Attach the soft cover so that it covers the console of the main unit.
(2) Insert the unit with the soft cover attached from the front of the panel.
bracket and panel. Excessively tightening the screws may deform the
controller case.
• If gang-mounted, dustproof and waterproof protection may not be
maintained.
3-5
Chapter 4. WIRING
4 - 1 Wiring
WARNING
Do not use this device in an environment with conductive pollution, or with dry non-
conductive pollution which can become conductive due to condensation, etc.
Otherwise, problems such as tracking phenomena may damage parts, resulting in fire.
When wiring the power for this device, be sure to mount a shutoff switch for the main power
to this unit within reach of the operator.
In addition, when wiring the power for AC power models, install a time-lag (T) fuse (rated
current 0.5 A, rated voltage 250 V) as specified by IEC 127.
Otherwise, tracking phenomena or parts failure due to other factors may cause fire.
Before removing, mounting, or wiring this device, be sure to turn off the power to the device
and all connected devices. Failure to do so might cause electric shock.
Do not touch electrically charged parts such as the power terminals.

Doing so might cause electric shock.
CAUTION

Wire this device properly according to predetermined standards.
Also wire the device using specified power leads according to recognized installation
methods.
Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty operation.
Do not allow lead clippings, chips or water to enter the controller case.
Firmly tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque as listed in the specifications.
Insufficient tightening of terminal screws might cause electric shock or fire.
Do not use unused/spare terminals on this device as relay terminals.

Doing so might cause electric shock, fire, or faulty operation.
e recommend attaching the terminal cover (sold separately) after wiring this device.
W
Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire, or faulty operation.
se the relays within the recommended life.

U
I f there is a risk of a power surge caused by lightning, use a surge absorber (surge protector)
to prevent fire or device failure.a
Do not make incorrect connections. If the cables are connected incorrectly, this might cause
the unit to malfunction.
The controller requires 6 seconds to stabilize after power ON. Great care should be taken
when the relay output from the controller is used as interlock signals.
The part between the control output 1 and control output 2 is not isolated. When necessary,
use an appropriate isolator.
Do not connect multiple loader cables to multiple units from one personal computer. The
current coming from other circuits might cause the PV value indication error to occur.
4-1
Chapter 4. WIRING
CAUTION
Do not connect any terminating resistor in the communication path when performing the RS-
485 wiring. Doing so might cause the communication to fail.
Always mount a switch for shut-down of the main power of this unit in an area easily
accessible to the operator when performing electric wiring of this unit. Additionally, connect
a slow-action type (T) fuse having a rated current of 0.5A and rated voltage of 250V to the
wiring for the instrument power supply of the AC power supply model. (IEC127)
4-2
Chapter 4. WIRING
Terminal assignment label symbols

The following table shows the meanings of the symbols used for the terminal
assignment label attached to the side panel of this unit:
Symbol Contents
~ AC
DC power supply
Caution, there is danger of electric shock
Caution
Wiring precautions

• Before starting the wiring work, carefully check the label on the side panel of
this unit to understand the model No. and terminal No. to carry out the wiring
properly.
• Use an appropriate crimp type terminal lug suitable for the M3 screw to connect
the terminals. The tightening torque of the terminal screw must be 0.4 to
0.6 N·m.
• Pay special attention so that no crimp type terminal lugs are in touch with
adjacent terminals.
• To connect 2 (max.) crimp terminals to the same terminal screw, bend the crimp
terminals beforehand.
• Keep the input/output signal cables 50 cm or more away from the drive power
cable and/or power cable. Additionally, do not lay the input/output signal cables
and the drive power cable and/or power cable together in the same conduit or
duct.
• When connecting this unit and other measuring instrument in parallel,
carefully check the conditions necessary for other instrument before starting the
instrumentation.
• The digital input is so designed that it is potential free input. A contact for micro
current must be used.
• The heater current carrying conductor must be routed through the current
transformer. Additionally, carefully check that the heater current does not exceed
the allowable current limit stated in the specification. If the heater current
exceeds the allowable current limit, this might cause damage to this unit.
• The input of the current transformer cannot be used for the phase angle control.
• An optional terminal cover is available to prevent electric shock. (Model No.:
81446912-001 for C35 or 81446913-001 for C36)
Terminal cover
• The part between the control output 1 and control output 2 is not isolated. When
necessary, use an appropriate isolator.
4-3
Chapter 4. WIRING
• If the motor connected to the motor drive relay output is used with a 100/200 V AC
power supply, the use of an external auxiliary relay is recommended. If an auxiliary
relay is not used, thoroughly check the operating conditions (operating voltage of
the motor, inrush current, frequency of switching, etc.) before use.
• Do not wire in the same duct for the motor drive terminals 13, 14, 15 and the
MFB input terminals 7, 8, 9 and also do not use 6-core cable.
Doing so might cause the unit to malfunction due to noise at start-up of the
motor.
• Make sure that devices and equipment connected to this device have reinforced
insulation suitable for the maximum operating voltage of this device's power
supply and input/output ports.
• This unit has been designed to start functioning after an initial stabilization
period of 5 seconds after power ON, in order to ensure stable operation. After
that, the unit then enters the operation mode. However, to satisfy the specified
accuracy, it is necessary to warm up the unit for at least 30 min.
IMPORTANT Terminating resistor
• Do not connect any terminating resistor in the RS-485 communication path.
Doing so might cause the communication failure.
Wiring of C35/36
zz
Power supply
Control output
1 Load 13
AC power supply NO
100 to 240 V AC 2 14 Relay
NC
Load 15
DC power supply 1
24 V AC/24 V DC 13 OPEN
(non polar) 2
14 Motor drive relay
CLOSE
15
Event output
1 13 13 +
3 Load
Load 3 – Voltage pulse/current/
14 continuous voltage
2 2 14
Load 4
Relay 15
Load 5 1 3 15
COM Load 13 1 + Voltage pulse/current/
6 4 16 – continuous voltage
14
5 17 Voltage pulse/current/
2 +
Load 3 Load 15 continuous voltage
2
Relay 6 18
4
independent
contact Load 5 7 19
1
6 8 20
Input 9 21
Auxiliary output
7 10 22
CT1 16 +
Load Current or continuous
CT input 8 –
11 23 17 voltage
CT2
9
12 24
Open Y
7 DI
T 4
8 18
MFB
Close G 3
9 19
Digital input
2
20
PV input
1
21
10
– +
11 18
Thermocouple mA/V RSP
+ –
12 19
2
20
C Digital input
10 1
21
B
RTD 11
Communication
A
12
DA 22
+
10 DB 23 RS-485
DC current
mA
–
11 SG 24
DC voltage V
+
12
4-4
Chapter 4. WIRING
Recommended crimp type terminal lugs

zz
For wiring of C35/36, use an appropriate crimp type terminal lug suitable for the
M3 screw.
C or
less
B or
less
A
Applicable Terminal dimensions (mm) Recommended crimp terminal Applicable electrical JST Mfg. Co.
screw size A B C JIS indication wire size Model No. (Reference)

M3 6.1 5.8 5.8 RAV1.25 - 3 0.3 to 1.3 mm2 V1.25 - 3
AWG22 to 16 V1.25 B3A
• When installing this unit in a place where the vibration or impact is large,
always use an appropriate round crimp type terminal lug to avoid loose
terminal connections.
• Pay special attention so that no crimp type terminal lugs are in touch with
adjacent terminals.
4-5
Chapter 4. WIRING
Connection of open collector output to digital input

The following shows a connection example when connecting to four digital input
points.
This unit
5V
18
19
20
21
24
Connection of communication (RS-485) cable

3-wire system
zz
This unit (slave station)
DA
22
DB
23
Master station SG
Shield 24
+
SG This unit (slave station)
Shield
DA
22
FG
DB
23
SG
24

• Do not connect any terminating resistor in the communication path.
• Even though any units requiring the terminating resistor in the
communication path, do not connect any terminating resistor.
• Do not connect DA and DB. Doing so might cause damage to this unit.
• Ground the shield line to one point on one end of the cable.
• Be sure to connect SG terminals each other.
Failure to do so might cause unstable communications.
4-6
Chapter 4. WIRING
5-wire system
zz
DA
22
DB
23
Master station SG
Shield 24
–
SG
Shield
DA
FG 22
DB
23
SG
24
• Do not connect any terminating resistor in the communication path.

• Even though any units requiring the terminating resistor to exist in the
communication path, do not connect any terminating resistor.
• Do not connect DA and DB. Doing so might cause damage to this unit.
• Ground the shield line to one point on one end of the cable.
• Be sure to connect SG terminals each other.
Failure to do so might cause unstable communications.
4-7
Chapter 4. WIRING
Connection with solid state relay (SSR)

To drive the SSR, a model having voltage pulse outputs (V0, VC, VV, or VD) must
be used.
Generally, the SSR is classified into two groups, constant current type and resistor
type.
Constant current type

zz
The two conditions listed below must be satisfied.
• Input current (maximum): Check that the input current is within the maximum
allowable current or less, then the parallel connection
can be made.
• Operating voltage range: Check that the voltage between the terminals of the
voltage pulse output is within the specified range.
1. Azbil Corporation's PGM10N/PGM10F series

This example shows the calculation for the connection of the SDC35 and the
PGM10N015.
(Note: For connection with other model number, check the specifications of each
model.)
• Input current: Since the input current is 10 mA or less,
up to two units (10 mA × 2 = 20 mA < 24
mA [maximum allowable current]) can be
connected in parallel.
• Operating voltage range (input): The rating voltage is 3.5 to 30 V DC.
Therefore, the voltage between the
terminals is within the range.
Voltage between terminals (two PGM10N units)
= Open voltage - internal resistance × total drive current
= 19 V DC ±15 % - 82 Ω ±0.5 % × 20 mA
= 15 to 20 V
Connection diagram
This unit
+
+ +
– – –
PGM10N/PGM10F PGM10N/PGM10F
Number of connectable units
SSR to be used Connection V0/VC/VD model VV model

Azbil Corporatoin PGM10N Parallel connection Up to 2 units Up to 4 units (Note)
Azbil Corporatoin PGM10F Parallel connection Up to 2 units Up to 4 units (Note)
(Note) 2 units for each output
4-8
Chapter 4. WIRING
2. Omron's G3PA, G3PB, G3NA
• Input current: Since the input current is 7 mA or less, up to three units

(7 mA × 3 = 21 mA < 24 mA [maximum allowable current])
can be connected in parallel.
• Operating voltage range (input): The rating voltage is 5 to 24 V DC or 12 to

24 V DC. Therefore, the voltage between
the terminals is within the range.
Voltage between terminals (three G3PA units)

= Open voltage - internal resistance × total drive current
= 19 V DC ±15 % - 82 Ω ±0.5 % × 21 mA
= 14 to 20 V
Connection diagram
This unit
+
+ + +
– – – –
G3PA G3PA G3PA
SSR to be used Connection V0/VC/VD model VV model

Omron G3PA Parallel connection Up to 3 units Up to 6 units (Note)
Omron G3PB Parallel connection Up to 3 units Up to 6 units (Note)
Omron G3NA Parallel connection Up to 3 units Up to 6 units (Note)
4-9
Chapter 4. WIRING
Resistor type (Azbil Corporation's PGM_ _2A1, etc.)

zz
When necessary, an appropriate external resistor is connected in series so that the
voltage between the input terminals of the SSR you are using is within the specified
range.
(Example) Connection of two Azbil Corporation PGM units
Connection diagram
External resistor R1
This unit 3 4 3 4
R0 +
R2 Vf R2 Vf
V
- PGM_ _2A1 PGM_ _2A1
V: 19 V ± 15 %
R0: 82 Ω ± 0.5 %
R1: 680 Ω
R2: 260 Ω
Vf: 1.1 V
Voltage between terminals ofPGM = (V - 2 × Vf) / (R0 + R1+ R2 + R2) × R2 + Vf

= 4.5 V
Input voltage range of PGM: Since the input voltage range is 3 to 6 V, the
operation is possible.
External resistors
SSR to be Number of units Connection External Notes

used to be connected resistor
PGM_ _2A1 1 – 1 kΩ (series connection) Rating is 1/2W or more.
2 Series connection 680 Ω (series connection) Rating is 1/2W or more.
3 Series connection 330 Ω (series connection) Rating is 1/2W or more.
4 Series connection None
SSR to be used Connection V0 model VV model

PGM_ _2A1 Series connection Up to 4 units Up to 8 units (Note)
4-10
Chapter 4. WIRING
Connection method for the motor drive relay output (R1)

Open Y
7
T
MFB 8
Close G
9
13 OPEN
Motor drive relay 14

CLOSE
15
• If connecting a 100 or 200 V AC motor to the motor drive relay output,
use an external auxiliary relay.
• Do not wire in the same duct for the motor drive terminals 13, 14, 15 and
the MFB input terminals 7, 8, 9 and also do not use 6-core cable.
Doing so might cause a malfunction due to motor start-up noise.
• Avoid setting the PID control such that the output excessively repeats
ON-OFF operations.
Doing so might shorten the life of the built-in relay.
If [C59: Motor long life mode] is set at “1,” the number of relay operations
can be reduced with almost no influence on the control results.
• When [C57: Position proportional type] is set at “2” or “3,” connections
to MFB terminals 7, 8 and 9 are not necessary. (This is the case of control
without a feedback function.)
• When [C57: Position proportional type] is set at “0” or “1” with motor
feedback function (MFB enabled), be sure to execute [C60: Motor adjust].
• When [C57: Position proportional type] is set at “2” or “3” without
motor feedback function (MFB disabled), be sure to input the value of
[C63: Motor full close-full open time] exactly.
Connection with current-input type controllers

When the power to this controller is turned off, the current input circuit is cut off.
If multiple current-input type SDCs are connected in series and you want to turn
them on/off individually, convert them to voltage input by adding resistors (No.
81401325, sold separately) to the circuit.
Current output device SDC35/36
4 to 20 mA SDC15
man
rsp
pv
SDC36
pv
ev1
ev2
250 Ω 1 to 5 V
ev3
sp
ot1
out
sp ot2
mode display
mode
rdy man ev1 ev2 ev3 ot1 ot2 para enter
para
SDC35/36
SDC36
man pv
rsp
ev1
250 Ω 1 to 5 V
ev2
ev3
sp
ot1
out
ot2
mode display
para enter
4-11
Chapter 4. WIRING
Wiring with zener barriers

Take the following notes into account if connecting an RTD to the PV input of the
unit through a zener barrier.
• Be sure to adjust the zener barriers following the instructions in chapter 5. If the
unit is adjusted in combination with recommended zener barriers, the indication
accuracy of the PV input is up to ±0.5 %FS ±1 digit, depending upon the
instrumentation conditions.
• Set the unit's PV input range to a value other than Nos. 53−62, so that the
internal resistance of the zener barrier does not exceed the allowable resistance
for the range.
• Use zener barriers recommended by Azbil Corporation. With zener barriers that
do not meet the specifications below, accuracy may be dramatically degraded. If
unrecommended zener barriers are used, contact the azbil Group.
Internal resistance ≤ 85 Ω
(Note: Consider the wiring resistance as well as the internal resistance.)
Working voltage ≥ 1 V
Leakage current: ≤ 1 µA (at 1 V)
Recommended zener barriers (for RTD)
Product No. 8907/22-02/120 (Azbil Corporation)
Product No. NZB3-1R75 (Nakamura Electric Mfg. Co., Ltd.)
Take the following note into account if connecting an Thermocouple to the PV
input of the unit through a zener barrier.
• If the unit is adjusted in combination with recommended zener barriers, the
indication accuracy of PV input is up to ±0.5 % FS ±1 digit, depending on the
instrumentation conditions.
• Use zener barriers recommended by Azbil Corporation. With zener barriers that
do not meet the specifications below, accuracy may be dramatically degraded. If
unrecommended zener barriers are used, contact the azbil Group.
Working voltage ≥ 1 V
Leakage current: ≤ 1 µA (at 1 V)
Recommended zener barriers (for TC)
Product No. 8907/22-05/110 (Azbil Corporation)
Product No. NZB2-1R52 (Nakamura Electric Mfg. Co., Ltd.)
Noise preventive measures

The power is taken from the single-phase instrument power supply to consider
noise preventive measures.
If the noise from the power supply is large, an appropriate insulation transformer is
added to the power supply and an appropriate line filter must be used.
(Azbil Corporation's line filter model No.: 81442557-001)
If the noise has a fast rising edge, an appropriate CR filter must be used.
(Azbil Corporation's CR filter model No.: 81446365-001)
After the noise preventive measures have been taken, do not bundle the
primary and secondary sides of the insulation transformer together or lay/
route them in the same conduit or duct.
4-12
Chapter 4. WIRING
4 - 2 Recommended Cables

Contact the thermocouple wires to the terminals in case of a thermocouple input. When a thermocouple is
connected to terminals, or wiring distance is long, connect the wire via a shielded compensating lead wire.
• For input/output other than thermocouples, use a JCS 4364 instrument cable or
equivalent (generally called twisted shielded cable for instrumentation use).
Recommended twisted shielded cables.
Fujikura Ltd. 2 conductors IPEV-S-0.9 mm2 × 1P
3 conductors ITEV-S-0.9 mm2 × 1T
Hitachi Metals, Ltd. 2 conductors KPEV-S-0.9 mm2 × 1P
3 conductors KTEV-S-0.9 mm2 × 1T
• A shielded multiconductor microphone cord (MVVS) may be used, if

electromagnetic induction noise are comparatively low.
4-13
Chapter 5. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH
FUNCTION
5 - 1 PV Input
The following shows the functional block diagram of the PV input:
PV input is thermocouple. PV input is RTD. PV input is DC voltage/DC current.
PV input range type PV input range type PV input range type
(Setting: Setup C0 1) (Setting: Setup C0 1) (Setting: Setup C0 1)
Cold junction compensation PV square root extraction
(Setting: Setup C03) (Setting: Setup C09)
Temperature unit Temperature unit Decimal point position and scaling
(Setting: Setup C02) (Setting: Setup C02) (Setting: Setup C04 to C06)
PV high limit/low limit alarm
PV before ratio, bias, and filter
PV ratio (Setting: Parameter rA)
PV bias (Setting: Parameter bI )
PV filter (Setting: Parameter FL)
PV high limit/low limit
PV hold
(Setting: DI Assignment Operation type dI 1. 1 to dI 5. 1)
PV
5-1
PV input range type

When the PV input range type is thermocouple or RTD, the sensor type and
temperature range can be selected. When the PV input range type is DC voltage or
DC current, the signal type can be selected.
Item (Bank) Display Contents Initial value User level

PV input range type Refer to the PV input range table. 88 Basic,
(Setup bank) Standard,
High function
PV input range table (Thermocouple)

zz
C0 1 Sensor type Range Range C04 C04 C04 initial value when
set value (Celsius) (Fahrenheit) display range*3 C0 1 settings*4
1 K –200 to +1200 °C –300 to + 2200 ˚F ---- Not setting No decimal point
2 K 0 to 1200 °C 0 to 2200 ˚F ---- Not setting No decimal point
3 K 0.0 to 800.0 °C 0 to 1500 ˚F  0 to 1 0
4 K 0.0 to 600.0 °C 0 to 1100 ˚F  0 to 1 1
5 K 0.0 to 400.0 °C 0 to 700 ˚F  0 to 1 1
6 K –200.0 to +400.0 °C –300 to +700 ˚F  0 to 1 1
7 K –200.0 to +200.0 °C –300 to +400 ˚F  0 to 1 1
8 J 0 to 1200 °C 0 to 2200 ˚F ---- Not setting No decimal point
9 J 0.0 to 800.0 °C 0 to 1500 ˚F  0 to 1 1
10 J 0.0 to 600.0 °C 0 to 1100 ˚F  0 to 1 1
11 J –200.0 to +400.0 °C –300 to +700 ˚F  0 to 1 1
12 E 0.0 to 800.0 °C 0 to 1500 ˚F  0 to 1 1
13 E 0.0 to 600.0 °C 0 to 1100 ˚F  0 to 1 1
14 T –200.0 to +400.0 °C –300 to +700 ˚F  0 to 1 1
15 R 0 to 1600 °C 0 to 3000 ˚F ---- Not setting No decimal point
16 S 0 to 1600 °C 0 to 3000 ˚F ---- Not setting No decimal point
17 B 0 to 1800 °C 0 to 3300 ˚F ---- Not setting No decimal point
18 N 0 to 1300 °C 0 to 2300 ˚F ---- Not setting No decimal point
19 PL II 0 to 1300 °C 0 to 2300 ˚F ---- Not setting No decimal point
20 WRe5-26 0 to 1400 °C 0 to 2400 ˚F ---- Not setting No decimal point
21 WRe5-26 0 to 2300 °C 0 to 4200 ˚F ---- Not setting No decimal point
22 Ni-NiMo 0 to 1300 °C 0 to 2300 ˚F ---- Not setting No decimal point
23 PR40-20 0 to 1900 °C 0 to 3400 ˚F ---- Not setting No decimal point
24 DIN U –200.0 to +400.0 °C –300 to +700 ˚F  0 to 1 1
25 DIN L –100.0 to +800.0 °C –150 to +1500 ˚F  0 to 1 1
26 Gold iron chromel 0.0 K to 360.0 K 0.0 K to 360.0 K  0 to 1 1
*1. The accuracy varies according to the range.

The accuracy of the B thermocouple is ±4.0 %FS for a range of 260 °C or less, ±0.4 %FS for 260 to 800 °C and ±0.2 %FS
for 800 to 1800 °C. The PV values under 20 °C are not shown.
The accuracy of the No. 15 (sensor type R) or No. 16 (sensor type S) is ±0.2 %FS for a range of 100 °C or less, and
±0.15 %FS for 100 to 1600 °C.
The accuracy of the No. 23 (sensor type PR40-20) is ±2.5 %FS for 0 to 300 °C, and ±1.5 %FS for 300 to 800 °C, ±0.5 %FS
for 800 to 1900 °C.
The accuracy of the No. 26 (sensor type gold iron chromel) is ±1.5 K.
The accuracy of the No. 55 to 62 and 81 are ±0.15 %FS for each ranges.
The accuracy of the No. 19 (sensor type PLII) in the range of 0 to 32 ˚F does not meet the indication accuracy.
*2. The indicated low limit for a B thermocouple is 20 °C. However, if ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank
(I d02 ) is prior to 2.04, the value is -180 °C.
*3. "Not setting" fixed when Fahrenheit settings.
*4. "No decimal point" fixed when Fahrenheit settings.
5-2
PV input range table (RTD)

zz
C0 1 Sensor type Range Range C04 C04 C04 initial value when
set value (Celsius) (Fahrenheit) display range C0 1 settings
41 Pt100 –200.0 to +500.0 °C –300 to +900 ˚F  0 to 1 1
42 JPt100 –200.0 to +500.0 °C –300 to +900 ˚F  0 to 1 1
43 Pt100 –200.0 to +200.0 °C –300 to +400 ˚F  0 to 1 1
44 JPt100 –200.0 to +200.0 °C –300 to +400 ˚F  0 to 1 1
45 Pt100 –100.0 to +300.0 °C –150 to +500 ˚F  0 to 1 1
46 JPt100 –100.0 to +300.0 °C –150 to +500 ˚F  0 to 1 1
47 Pt100 –100.0 to +200.0 °C –150 to +400 ˚F  0 to 1 1
48 JPt100 –100.0 to +200.0 °C –150 to +400 ˚F  0 to 1 1
49 Pt100 –100.0 to +150.0 °C –150 to +300 ˚F  0 to 1 1
50 JPt100 –100.0 to +150.0 °C –150 to +300 ˚F  0 to 1 1
51 Pt100 –50.0 to +200.0 °C –50 to +400 ˚F  0 to 1 1
52 JPt100 –50.0 to +200.0 °C –50 to +400 ˚F  0 to 1 1
53 Pt100 –50.0 to +100.0 °C –50 to +200 ˚F  0 to 1 1
54 JPt100 –50.0 to +100.0 °C –50 to +200 ˚F  0 to 1 1
55 Pt100 –60.0 to +40.0 °C –60 to +100 ˚F  0 to 1 1
56 JPt100 –60.0 to +40.0 °C –60 to +100 ˚F  0 to 1 1
57 Pt100 –40.0 to +60.0 °C –40 to +140 ˚F  0 to 1 1
58 JPt100 –40.0 to +60.0 °C –40 to +140 ˚F  0 to 1 1
59 Pt100 –10.00 to +60.00 °C –10 to +140 ˚F  0 to 2 2
60 JPt100 –10.00 to +60.00 °C –10 to +140 ˚F  0 to 2 2
61 Pt100 0.0 to 100.0 °C 0 to 200 ˚F  0 to 1 1
62 JPt100 0.0 to 100.0 °C 0 to 200 ˚F  0 to 1 1
63 Pt100 0.0 to 200.0 °C 0 to 400 ˚F  0 to 1 1
64 JPt100 0.0 to 200.0 °C 0 to 400 ˚F  0 to 1 1
65 Pt100 0.0 to 300.0 °C 0 to 500 ˚F  0 to 1 1
66 JPt100 0.0 to 300.0 °C 0 to 500 ˚F  0 to 1 1
67 Pt100 0.0 to 500.0 °C 0 to 900 ˚F  0 to 1 1
68 JPt100 0.0 to 500.0 °C 0 to 900 ˚F  0 to 1 1
PV input range table (DC voltage/DC current)

zz
C0 1 Sensor type Range C04 C04 C04 initial value
set value display range when C0 1 settings
81 0 to 10 mV • Scaling range is -1999 to +9999.  0 to 3 No change
82 –10 to +10 mV  0 to 3 No change
• When C0 1 is changed, the range
83 0 to 100 mV defaults to 0 to 1000.  0 to 3 No change
84 0 to 1 V  0 to 3 No change
89 0 to 20 mA  0 to 3 No change
90 4 to 20 mA  0 to 3 No change
• When the C0 1 PV input range number is set, the decimal point position and
range are initially set automatically as shown in the tables. For details on the
decimal point, refer to the description of setup C04 (decimal point position)
on page 5-5.
• Make sure to set the correct number in setup display C0 1, according to the
type and range of the sensor used. If the setting is wrong, problems such as
large temperature errors in the output may occur.
• For details about the accuracy of each PV input range type,
Chapter 13. SPECIFICATIONS (p. 13-1).
5-3
Temperature unit

When the PV input range type is thermocouple or RTD, the temperature unit can
be selected.

Temperature unit 0: Celsius (˚C) 0 Basic,
(Setup bank) 1: Fahrenheit (˚F). Standard,
High function
• When the PV input range type is thermocouple or RTD, the display and setting
can be configured.
Cold junction compensation (T/C)

When the PV input range type is thermocouple, either of the following can be
selected:
• The cold junction compensation (T/C) is performed inside this unit.
• The cold junction compensation (T/C) is not performed inside this unit since
an external cold junction compensation unit, such as ice bath is used.

Cold junction 0: Cold junction compensation (T/C) is 0 High function
compensation (T/C)(Setup performed (internal).
bank) 1: Cold junction compensation (T/C) is not
performed (external).
• When the PV input range type is thermocouple, the display and setting can be
configured.
PV square root extraction dropout

When the PV input range type is DC voltage or DC current, a dropout value can be
set so that the result of the PV square root extraction used to convert the pressure
(differential pressure) into the flow becomes "0".

PV square root extraction 0.0 %: Square root extraction is not 0.0 % High function
dropout (Setup bank) performed.
0.1 to 100.0 %
• When the PV input range type is DC voltage or DC current, the display and
setting can be made.
• Details of PV square root extraction
The calculation input in % and the calculation result in % are expressed as PVin
and PVout, respectively.
When the PV input is the PV square root extraction dropout set value or more
and less than 100.0 %, the control formula becomes as shown below.
PVout = √ PVin/100 X 100
When the PV input is larger than 0.0 % and smaller than the PV square root
extraction dropout set value, PVout = 0.0 %.
When the PV input is 0.0 % or less or 100.0 % or more, the square root extraction
is not performed. Therefore, PVout = PVin.
5-4
Output after PV square root extraction (PVout)
100 %FS
Y = Xin/100 X100
0 PVin
0 100 %FS
Dropout value (variable change from 0.1 to 100.0 %)
Decimal point position

When the PV input range type is DC voltage or DC current or when the PV
input range type is a part of the PV input range type of thermocouple or RTD, the
decimal point position of the PV input can be set.

Decimal point position 0: No decimal point 0 Basic,
(Setup bank) 1: 1 digit after decimal point Standard,
2: 2 digits after decimal point High function
3: 3 digits after decimal point
• As this setting is changed, the decimal point position of the parameters
related to the decimal point position of the PV input is also changed.
Actually, the decimal point position of the following settings are changed:
SP setting
SP low limit/high limit setting
RSP range low limit/high limit setting
SP ramp-up/ramp-down setting
Event setting and continuous output setting related to PV
Event setting and continuous output setting related to SP
Event setting and continuous output setting related to deviation
(absolute deviation)
• When the PV input range is set to 3 (K thermocouple 0.0 to 800.0 °C),
the decimal point position is 0. This exception ensures compatibility if
PV range type 3 is K thermocouple 0–800 °C without a decimal point,
which is the case when ROM version 1 of the instrument information
bank(I d02) is prior to 2.04.
Note
• For the display conditions, setting range and initial value of range numbers
(C0 1),
 PV input range type (p. 5-2).
5-5
PV range low limit/high limit

When the PV input range type is DC voltage or DC current, the scaling of the PV
input can be set.

PV range low limit When the PV input range type is DC voltage 0 Basic,
(Setup bank) or DC current, the following contents apply: Standard,
-1999 to +9999 (no decimal point) High function
-199.9 to +999.9 (1 digit after decimal point)
PV range high limit -19.99 to +99.99 (2 digits after decimal point) 1000
(Setup bank) -1.999 to +9.999 (3 digits after decimal point)
When the PV input type is thermocouple or
RTD, the range low limit and high limit values
selected using the PV input range type are used.
• When the PV input range type is thermocouple or RTD, the setting item can be
displayed, but the setting cannot be made.
• When the PV input range type is DC voltage or DC current, the display and
setting can be made.
The following describes the relationship between the PV input and PV when
setting up the range low limit and high limit:
PV PV
High limit High limit
Low limit Low limit

Input (%) Input (%)
-10 0 100 110 -10 0 100 110
Low limit < High limit Low limit > High limit
PV ratio and PV bias

The PV ratio and PV bias can be set to compensate the PV.

PV ratio 0.001 to 9.999 1.000 Standard,
(Parameter bank) High function
PV bias -1999 to +9999 U 0 U Basic,
(Parameter bank) Standard,
High function
• Details of PV ratio and PV bias controls

Assuming that the control input is PVin, control result is PVout, PV ratio is RA,
and PV bias is BI, the following control formula is obtained:
PVout = (PVin × RA) + BI
PV low limit alarm threshold

PV input failure (under 0: -10 %FS 0 Simple,
range) type 1: -5 mV Standard,
High function
If ROM version 1 in the instrument information bank (i d02) is 2.26 or earlier, this
item cannot be displayed.
This setting is applicable if C0 1 (PV input range type) is set for sensor type B (No.
17) or PR40-20 (No. 23).
 PV low limit/high limit and PV low limit/high limit alarms (p. 5-7)
5-6
PV filter

This PV filter is a primary delay filter to be used if the PV repeatedly fluctuates
rapidly and the control cannot be performed or if the PV fluctuates finely due to
influence of noise, etc.
As a larger value is set, it becomes difficult to change the PV used for the control of
this unit.
Normally, the PV filter is used with an initial value of "0.0".

PV filter 0.0: No filter 0.0 s Basic,
(Parameter bank) 0.1 to 120.0 s Standard,
High function
OUT = OUT-1 + (IN − OUT-1)/(T/Ts + 1)

IN: Input to filter
OUT: Control output of current filter
OUT-1: Control output of previous filter
T: Filter set value (s)
Ts: Sampling cycle time (0.5 s)
PV hold

It is possible to set the PV to a fixed value using the PV hold, PV Max. hold, and PV
Min. hold of the digital input (DI) functions.
PV hold: PV is set to a fixed value and it is not updated.

PV Max. hold: PV maximum value is held.
The PV value is updated only when the new PV value is larger
than the currently held value.
PV Min. hold: PV minimum value is held.
The PV value is updated only when the new PV value is smaller
than the currently held value.
When using the PV hold, PV Max. hold, or PV Min. hold, the PV indication on the
upper display is flashing.
PV low limit/high limit and PV low limit/high limit alarms

PV low limit and PV high limit are provided for each PV input range type.
In principle, -10 %FS of each range becomes the PV low limit while +110 %FS
becomes the PV high limit.
For details,
 Behavior in case of PV input failure (p. 10-3).
The PV is limited so that it is within a range between the PV low limit and PV high
limit.
If the PV before activation of the PV ratio, PV bias, and PV filter is larger than the
PV high limit, PV high limit alarm (AL0 1) occurs. On the contrary, if this PV is
smaller than the PV low limit, the PV low limit alarm (AL02) occurs.
5-7
Zener barrier adjustment

When the PV input is RTD and uses the Zener barrier, the Zener barrier needs to
be adjusted. Additionally, if three wiring resistances to the PV input terminal have
any variation even though the Zener barrier is not used, the Zener barrier must also
be adjusted.
When using an input other than RTD, this adjustment is not needed and cannot be
performed.

Special function 0 to 15 0 High function
(Setup bank) 5: Zener barrier adjustment enabled. (This value becomes
zero (0) when the
power is turned ON.)
Zener barrier adjustment –20.000 to +20.00 Ω 0.00 Ω High function
(Setup bank) (However, “–20.00” is displayed as “–19.99”.)
The value can be changed with the
adjustment.
The numeric value cannot be directly input
with the manual operation.
Adjusting procedures
zz
Follow the steps below to adjust the Zener barrier.
(1) Turn off the power to the unit and apply wiring No. 1. To adjust the long wires
without a zener barrier, apply wiring No. 2.
Applicable PV range type Wiring status Wiring contents

41 to 52, 63 to 68 1 Remove the RTD, connect a 100.00 Ω resistor
between zener barriers A and B, and connect B to C.
For connections, use resistors that meet the
following specifications.
Allowable tolerance: ±0.05 %. Rated power: 0.1
W minimum. Recommended resistor: C2610E
(100 Ω) made by PCN Corporation
41 to 68 2 Remove the RTD from between the extension
wires, connect a 100.00 Ω resistor between
zener barriers A and B, and connect B to C.
41, 42, 45, 46, 65 to 68 3 Connect zener barriers A and B at the RTD
terminals.
This unit This unit This unit
C Long wiring C C
Zener barrier 10 10 Zener barrier 10
Shorted Shorted
B Long wiring B B
100.00 Ω 100.00 Ω Shorted
A Long wiring A A
Wiring No 1 Wiring No 2 Wiring No 3
(2) Turn ON the power to the unit and set “5” to [C88: Special function].
(3) Display [C89: Zener barrier adjustment].
5-8
(If [C0 1: PV range type] is not RTD or if [C88: Special function] is other than
“5”, [C89: Zener barrier adjustment] is not displayed.)
(4) Press the [enter] key to display a difference in wiring resistance between the A
and B lines on the lower display.
(5) Press the [enter] key to store the difference in wiring resistance between the A
and B lines into this unit as an adjustment value.
(6) Turn OFF the power to the unit and connect the RTD correctly.
• The Zener barrier can be used only when the PV range type is 41 to 52 or
63 to 68.
• Use a Zener barrier whose resistance is low enough so that the total
resistance, including wiring resistance, is 85 Ω or less.
• Adjust the Zener barrier with a resistance difference between the Zener
barrier and long extension wiring of 20 Ω or less. If this resistance
difference is 20 Ω or more, the Zener barrier cannot be adjusted and the
adjustment value becomes 0.00 Ω.
• Once the Zener barrier has been adjusted, the correction is performed
with the same adjustment value even though the PV range type is
changed to other RTD.
• To return the adjusted value to 0.00 Ω, connect PV input terminals 10 and
11, leaving terminal 12 open, and follow the above steps (2) to (5).
• Notes for products with S/N 133220_ _ _
• Be sure to adjust the unit with wiring No. 1. If the unit is adjusted with
wiring No. 3, poor accuracy may result.
• Use zener barriers recommended by Azbil Corporation.
If the unit is used with unrecommended zener barriers, accuracy may be
drastically impaired. Before using such zener barriers, contact the azbil
Group.
5-9
5 - 2 Mode
It is possible to set the AUTO/MANUAL mode selection, RUN/READY mode selection, LSP/RSP mode
selection, Auto Tuning (AT) stop/start selection, release all digital output (DO) latches, and OFF/ON selection of
communication digital input 1 (communication DI 1).
AUTO/MANUAL mode

The AUTO/MANUAL mode selection can be set.

AUTO/MANUAL AUtO : AUTO mode [Communication value is "0".] AUtO Basic,
mode selection MAn : MANUAL mode [Communication value is "1".] Standard,
(Mode bank) High function
• When the AUTO/MANUAL mode is changed, the display is automatically

returned to the operation display.
• If the operation type of internal contacts 1 to 5 is set at “AUTO/MANUAL”,
[A--M: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection] can be displayed, but the setting
cannot be configured.
• When [CtrL: Control method] is set at "0" (ON/OFF control), [A--M: AUTO/
MANUAL mode selection] cannot be displayed and set.
• When [bit 0: AUTO/MANUAL display] of [C73: MODE display setup] is set at "0"
(no display), [A--M: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection] cannot be displayed and
set.
RUN/READY mode

The RUN/READY mode selection can be set.

RUN/READY mode rUn : RUN mode [Communication value is "0".] rUn Basic,
selection rdy : READY mode [Communication value is "1".] Standard,
• If the operation type of internal contacts 1 to 5 is set at “RUN/READY”, [r--r:

RUN/READY] can be displayed, but the setting cannot be configured.
• When [bit 1: RUN/READY display] of [C73: MODE display setup] is set at "0" (no
display), [r--r: RUN/READY mode selection] cannot be displayed and set.
LSP/RSP mode

The LSP/RSP mode selection can be set.

LSP/RSP mode LSP : LSP mode [Communication value is "0".] LSP Basic,
selection RSP : RSP mode [Communication value is "1".] Standard,
• If the operation type of internal contacts 1 to 5 is set at “LSP/RSP”, [L--r: LSP/

RSP mode selection] can be displayed, but the setting cannot be configured.
• When [bit 2: LSP/RSP display] of [C73: MODE display setup] is set at "0" (no
display), [L--r: LSP/RSP mode selection] cannot be displayed and set.
• If the model does not have the RSP mode, [L--r: LSP/RSP mode selection] cannot
be displayed and set.
5-10
Auto tuning (AT) stop/start

The AT stop/start selection can be set.

AT Stop/Start selection At.OF : AT stop [Communication value is "0".] At.OF Basic,
(Mode bank) At.On : AT start [Communication value is "1".] Standard,
High function
• The AT is stopped in the MANUAL or READY mode.

• If the PV high limit alarm (AL0 1) or PV low limit alarm (AL02) occurs, the AT
is stopped.
• If the operation type of internal contacts 1 to 5 is set at "AT stop/start", [At: AT
stop/start selection] can be displayed, but the setting cannot be made.
• When [CtrL: Control method] is set at "0" (ON/OFF control), [At: AT stop/
start selection] cannot be displayed and set.
• When [bit 3 : AT stop/start display] of [C73 : MODE display setup] is set at "0"
(no display), [At: AT stop/start selection] cannot be displayed and set.
For details about AT,
 Auto tuning (AT) (p. 5-26) and 5 - 4 Auto Tuning (AT) Function (p. 5-29).
Release all digital output (DO) latches

Release all digital output (DO) latches can be set.

Release all digital output Lt.On : Latch is continued. [Communication Lt.On Basic,
(DO) latches value is "0".] Standard,
(Mode bank) Lt.OF : Latch is released. [Communication High function
value is "1".])
• If the operation type of internal contacts 1 to 5 is set at "Release all DO latches",

[dO.Lt: Release all DO latches] can be displayed, but the setting cannot be
configured.
• When [bit 4: Release all DO latches display] of [C73: MODE display setup] is
set at "0" (no display), [dO.Lt: Release all DO latches] cannot be displayed and
set.
Communication digital input 1 (communication DI 1)

Communication digital input 1 (communication DI 1) can be set.

Communication digital DI .OF : Communication DI1. OFF DI .OF Basic,
input 1 (communication [Communication value is "0".] Standard,
DI 1) DI .On : Communication DI1. ON High function
(Mode bank) [Communication value is "1".]
• Four communication DIs, DI1 to DI4, are provided. However, only

communication DI 1 can be set using the key operation.
• The function (operation) with communication DI 1 can be set using the DI Assignment.
• When [bit 5: Communication DI 1 display] of [C73: MODE display setup] is set at
"0" (no display), [C.DI 1: Communication DI 1] cannot be displayed and set.
5-11
5 - 3 Control
The following shows the functional block diagram of the control (ON/OFF control, PID control, RationaLOOP
control, and Heat/Cool control, etc.):
ON/OFF control
Control method: ON/OFF control

(Setting: Parameter CtrL
must be set at "0".)
Branching according to
RUN/READY mode selection
READY mode RUN mode
Branching according to Branching according to

output at READY output operation at PV alarm
(Setting: Setup C 1 7) (Setting: Setup C 15)
C 1 7 > 0.0 % C 1 7 ≤ 0.0 % PV is correct or PV is faulty (AL01/02 occurs)

C 15 = 0: and C 15 = 1:
MV1 output ON MV1 output OFF

ON/OFF control
output at PV alarm
(Setting: Parameter dI FF, OFFS)
(Setting: Setup C 16 )
C 16 > 0.0 % C 16 ≤ 0.0 %
MV1 output ON or output OFF
MV1 output ON MV1 output OFF
Note
When the control output type is R1 (motor drive relay output), the ON/OFF control
is not enabled.
5-12
Fixed PID
Control method: Fixed PID

(Setting: Parameter CtrL
must be set at "1".)
SP lag overshoot suppression

(Setting: Extended tuning SP.LG)
RationaLOOP high precision

control logic
(Setting: Extended tuning Ctr.A)
Just-FiTTER overshoot suppression

(Setting: Extended tuning
JF.Ov, JF.bd)
Branching according to MANUAL mode Bumpless transfer/Preset selection

AUTO/MANUAL mode (Setting: Setup C 19, C20)
AUTO mode
PV is faulty and C 15 = 1:
Branching according to Output at PV alarm
Branching according to RUN mode
output operation at PV alarm (Setting: Setup C 16)
RUN/READY mode
(Setting: Setup C 15, C 16)
READY mode PV is correct or

C15 = 0:
Heat/Cool control PID control
(Setting: Setup C26) (Setting: P- 1 to P-8, I - 1 to I -8, d- 1
to d-8, rE- 1 to rE-8, OL- 1 to OL-8,
OH- 1 to OH-8, P- 1C to P-8C, I - 1C to
C26 = 0 C26 = 1
I-8C, d- 1C to d-8C, OL- 1C to OL-8C,
OH- 1C to OH-8C)
Output at READY
(Setting: Setup C 1 7)
MV rate-of-change limit
(Setting: Parameter OUtL)
MV1 = MV
MV
Branching according to C26 = 1

Heat/Cool control
(Setting: Setup C26)
Output at READY C26 = 0 Heat/Cool control

(Setting: Setup C 1 7, C 18) (Setting: Setup C28 , C29 )
MV1 = Heat MV MV2 = Cool MV MV1 = MV MV1 = Heat MV MV2 = Cool MV
Note
When the control output type is R1 (motor drive relay output), the Heat/Cool
control is not enabled.
5-13
Control method

A desired control method can be selected from two kinds of control methods.

Control method 0: ON/OFF control 0 or 1 Basic,
(Parameter bank) 1: Fixed PID Standard,
High function
• When the control output type is the position proportional output, only [1: Fixed
PID] can be selected.
• When the control output type is relay (R0), the initial value becomes "0". The
initial value is "1" in other cases.
• "Fixed" of [1: Fixed PID] means that the PID constant is not changed automatically
since the self-tuning (ST) provided for C35/36 is not run. However, the AT can be
run even in the fixed PID control.
• The following table shows valid and invalid functions related to [1: Fixed PID], as
well as other related parameters:
Classification of Classification of Classification of RationaLOOP AT Just-FiTTER

Heat/Cool control RationaLOOP control action function
Normal control Normal PID P control X * X
PI control X * 
PD control X * X
PID control X  
RationaLOOP P control X * X
PD control X * X
PID control   
Heat/Cool control Normal PID P control X * X
PD control X * X
PID control X  
RationaLOOP P control X * X
PD control X * X
PID control   
Related settings Control AT type Just-FiTTER
algorithm overshoot limit/
restraint/control
coefficient
MV low limit at AT Just-FiTTER
settling band
MV high limit at AT
AT Proportional
band adjust
AT Integral time
adjust
AT Derivative time
adjust
* Adjustment result becomes the PID control.
5-14
Control action and Heat/Cool control

The control action (direct/reverse) and Heat/Cool control (enabled/disabled) can
be selected.
However, when the control output type is R1 (motor drive relay output), the Heat/
Cool control is not enabled.

Control action (direct/ 0: Heat control (Reverse) 0 Basic,
reverse) 1: Cool control (Direct) Standard,
(Setup bank) High function
Heat/Cool control 0: Disabled. 0 Basic,
(Setup bank) 1: Enabled. Standard,
High function
• When the control output type is other than R1 (motor drive relay output), and
when the control method is other than the ON/OFF control (CtrL ≠ 0), [C26:
Heat/Cool control] can be displayed and set.
However, in case of the position proportional control model, the Heat/Cool
• When the Heat/Cool control is set disabled (C26 = 0), [C 14: Control action] can
• When the Heat/Cool control is set disabled (C26 = 0), both [C20: Preset
MANUAL value] and [C22: Initial output of PID control] are changed to "0.0".
• When the Heat/Cool control is set enabled (C26 = 1), both [C20: Preset
MANUAL value] and [C22: Initial output of PID control] are changed to "50.0".
• The reverse action (heat control) is a control that decreases (or turns OFF) the
manipulated variable (MV) as the PV increases.
The direct action (cool control) is a control that increases (or turns ON) the
manipulated variable (MV) as the PV increases.
Special control outputs

The control output at PV alarm and control output at READY can be set.

Output operation at PV alarm 0: Control calculation is continued. 0 High function
(Setup bank) 1: Output at PV alarm is output.
Output at PV alarm -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 % High function
(Setup bank)
Output at READY (Heat) -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 % Standard,
Output at READY (Cool) -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 % Standard,
• When the control method is other than the ON/OFF control (CtrL ≠ 0) and the
Heat/Cool control is set enabled (C26 = 1), [C 18: Output at READY (cool)] can
• The PV alarm status means that AL0 1, AL02, or AL03 occurs.
5-15
MANUAL mode change

The control output when the AUTO mode is changed to the MANUAL mode can
be set.

Output operation at 0: Bumpless transfer 0 Standard,
changing Auto/Manual 1: Preset High function
(Setup bank)
Preset MANUAL value -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 or 50.0 % Standard,
• When [C 19: Output operation at changing Auto/Manual] is set at [0: Bumpless

transfer], the manipulated variable (MV) when the AUTO mode is changed to
the MANUAL mode is retained. When set at [1: Preset], the manipulated variable
(MV) is set to [C20: Preset MANUAL value] when the AUTO mode is changed to
the MANUAL mode.
• When the control method is other than ON/OFF control (CtrL ≠ 0), [C 19:
Output operation at changing Auto/Manual] and [C20: Preset MANUAL value]
can be displayed and set.
• When the Heat/Cool control is not used (C26 = 0), the initial value of [C20:
Preset MANUAL value] is [0.0]. On the contrary, when the Heat/Cool control is
used (C26 = 1), this initial value becomes [50.0].
When the unit is in the MANUAL mode if the power is turned ON, the set
value of C20 becomes the initial manipulated variable (MV).
PID control initialization

Initial output type (mode) 0: Auto 0 High function
of PID control 1: Not initialized.
(Setup bank) 2: Initialized. (If SP value different from the
current value is input.)
• When the control method is other than the ON/OFF control (CtrL ≠ 0), the
display and setting can be performed.
• If the PID group is changed as the SP value or SP group is changed, the
manipulated variable (MV) is stopped at its low limit or high limit, and then the
PV may not change or may overshoot. To prevent such trouble, it is effective to
initialize the PID control.
• The setting is “0” (Auto).
It is judged automatically whether or not the PID control needs to be initialized
as the SP value or SP group is changed. As a result, the PID control is initialized
only when it is required.
• The setting is “1” (Not initialized).
Even though the SP value or SP group is changed, the PID control is not
initialized. This setting is effective when the continuation of the manipulated
variable (MV) is important if the SP value or SP group is changed.
• The setting is “2” (Initialized).
Every time the SP value or SP group is changed, the PID control is always
initialized. This setting is effective when it is important that an increase or a
decrease in manipulated variable (MV) immediately affects the relationship
between the PV and SP when the SP value or SP group is changed.
5-16
Initial output of PID control

Initial output of PID control –10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 % or 50.0 % High function
(Setup bank)
• When the control method is other than the ON/OFF control (CtrL≠0), the
• This value is used for the PID control immediately after the operation mode
is changed from READY to RUN or the operation mode becomes RUN as the
power is turned ON. This value greatly affects the manipulated variable (MV)
when the operation mode is changed.
• When the setting of the Heat/Cool control (C26) is changed, the value is
automatically set again. When [C26: Heat/Cool control] is changed to “Enabled”
(C26=1), the value becomes “50.0 %”. On the contrary, when the setting is
changed to “Disabled” (C26=0), the value becomes “0.0 %”.
PID decimal point position

PID decimal point position 0: No decimal point 0 High function
(Setup bank) 1: 1 digit after decimal point
(Decimal point of integral time and
derivative time)
• When the control method is other than the ON/OFF control (CtrL≠0), the
• When this setting is set at “0”, the integral time and derivative time settings
become 0 to 9999 s.
• When this setting is set at “1”, the integral time and derivative time settings
become 0.0 to 999.9 s.
When the setting of the PID decimal point position is changed, the integral
time and derivative time values are divided by 10 (1/10) or multiplied by 10,
and the control characteristics may be changed greatly.
After the setting has been changed, always set the integral time and
derivative time to an appropriate value again.
For example, if the setting of the PID decimal point position is changed
from “0” to “1” with integral time of 120 s, the integral time becomes 12.0 s.
5-17
ON/OFF control

The ON/OFF control related items can be set.

ON/OFF control differential 0 to 9999 U 5 U Basic,
High function
ON/OFF control operating -1999 to +9999 U 0 U High function
point offset (Parameter
bank)
• [ON/OFF control differential: dI FF] and [ON/OFF control operating point

offset: OFFS] can be displayed and set when the control method is the ON/OFF
control (CtrL = 0).
• The following Figure shows the operation of the ON/OFF control:

ON dI FF dI FF ON
SP + OFFS SP + OFFS
PV PV
Heat control (Reverse action) Cool control (Direct action)
 shows that the ON/OFF is changed at this value.

 shows that the ON/OFF is changed at a point that "1 U" is added to this
value.
• The following describes examples showing how to use the ON/OFF control
operating point offset:
To turn OFF the output at 205 °C or more and turn ON the output at less than
190 °C with the heat control and SP = 200 °C, the differential is set to 15 °C and
the offset is set to 5 °C.
To turn OFF the output at 5 °C or less and turn ON the output at more than 10 °C
with the cool control and SP = 10 °C, the differential is set to 5 °C and the offset is
set to -5 °C.
Output variation limit

Variation in the manipulated variable (MV) can be limited.

Output variation limit 0.0: No limit 0.0 High function
(Parameter bank) 0.1 to 999.9 %
• The upper limit (%) for the absolute value of MV variation can be set in 1 s
intervals. However, because the sampling cycle is 0.1 s, the actual MV variation
is limited to 1/10 of the value set. For example, when 5.0(%/s) is set, the variation
per 0.1 s is limited to ±0.5 %. In addition, when 0.1(%/s) is set, the variation per
0.1 s is limited to ±0.01 %.
• When 0.0 is set, there is no limit on MV variation.
• When the model is a motor drive relay output type with a motor long life mode
(C59 = 1), display and setting are not possible because the MV variation limit
function operates automatically.
5-18
PID control

In the fixed PID control, the PID control related items can be set.

Proportional band (PID1) 0.1 to 999.9 % 5.0 % Basic,
(PID bank) Standard,
Integration time (PID1) 0 to 9999 s or 0.0 to 999.0 s * 120 s High function
(PID bank) (No integration control action when set at "0".)
Derivative time (PID1) 0 to 9999 s or 0.0 to 999.0 s * 30 s
(PID bank) (No derivative control action when set at "0".)
Manual reset (PID1) -10.0 to +110.0 % 50.0 %
(PID bank)
MV low limit (PID1) -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 % Standard,
(PID bank) High function
MV high limit (PID1) -10.0 to +110.0 % 100.0 %
(PID bank)
Cool-side proportional 0.1 to 999.9 % 5.0 % Basic,
band (PID1) (PID bank) Standard,
Cool-side integration time 0 to 9999 s or 0.0 to 999.0 s * 120 s High function
(PID1) (PID bank) (No integration control action when set at "0".)
Cool-side derivative time 0 to 9999 s or 0.0 to 999.0 s * 30 s
(PID1) (PID bank) (No derivative control action when set at "0".)
Cool-side MV low limit -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 % Standard,
(PID1) (PID bank) High function
Cool-side MV high limit -10.0 to +110.0 % 100.0 %
(PID1) (PID bank)
Proportional band (PID 2) Same as PID 1 5.0 % Basic,
Standard,
Integration time (PID 2) 120 s High function
Derivative time (PID 2) 30 s
Manual reset (PID 2) 50.0 %
MV low limit (PID 2) Same as PID 1 0.0 % Standard,

High function
MV high limit (PID 2) 100.0 %
Cool-side proportional Same as PID 1 5.0 % Basic,

band (PID 2) Standard,
Cool-side integration time 120 s High function
(PID 2)
Cool-side derivative time 30 s
(PID 2)
Cool-side MV low limit Same as PID 1 0.0 % Standard,
(PID 2) High function
Cool-side MV high limit 100.0 %
(PID 2)
Standard,
* For presence of the decimal point, when [C23 : PID Decimal point position] is set (Continue on next page.)
at “0”, the decimal point does not exist. When this setting is set at “1”, the decimal
point exists.
5-19

High function

(PID 3)
(PID 3)
(PID 3)
Standard,

High function

(PID 4)
(PID 4)
(PID 4)
Standard,

High function

(PID 5)
(PID 5)
(PID 5)
(Continue on next page.)
5-20

Standard,

High function

(PID 6)
(PID 6)
(PID 6)
Standard,
Integral time (PID 7) 120 s High function

High function

(PID 7)
(PID 7)
(PID 7)
Standard,

High function
5-21

(PID 8)
(PID 8)
(PID 8)
display and setting can be configured.
• [... for cool side] related items can be displayed and set when [C26: Heat/Cool
control] is set to [1: Enabled].
• When the Integration time (I - - ) is set at “0 s” or Cool-side integration time
(I - - C) is set at “0 s” in the Heat/Cool control, no integration control action is
performed. The Manual reset (rE- - ) can be used in both the heat and cool
controls.
• Parameter settings for the cool control are displayed only when the Heat/Cool
control is set enabled.
• When the Integral time for heat side or cool side is "0 s", the operation is
processed with both Integral time for heat side and cool side set at "0 s".
• If the setting is made so that the output low limit is greater than the output high
limit, the operation is performed with the low limit swapped for the high limit
automatically.
• Priorities for PID group change

Priorities for PID group change are shown below.
Priority
High Low
DI function Zone function During RSP SP group

assignment of
When PID group > During use > [SP group linked] > PID group
change is [RSP dedicated
selected. group selectable]
• If PID group change is used for an internal contact (DI), zone PID does
not function. When zone PID is used, do not use PID group change by
selecting PID group selection as the function of an internal contact (DI).
5-22
Zone PID

In the PID fixed control, the PID group auto change function by the SP or PV can
be selected.

zone PID operation 0: Disabled. 0 High function
(Setup bank) 1: Changed by SP.
2: Changed by PV.
Zone 1 (Zone bank) –1999 to +9999 U 9999 U High function
Zone 2 (Zone bank) 9999 U
Zone hysteresis 0 to 9999 U 5 U

(Zone bank)
• When the PID fixed control (CtrL=1) is used, the display and setting can be
performed.
• When [C24: Zone PID operation] is set at “0: Disabled.”, the PID group setting of
the SP bank becomes valid.
• When the zone PID operation is set at “Enabled.” (C24=1 or 2), the PID group
setting of the SP bank becomes invalid and the PID group is automatically
changed as described in the following. Additionally, a hysteresis can be set so that
the PID group is not changed frequently by a small change of the PV or SP at a
position close to the zone set value.
PV SP
PID 8 group PID 8 group
Zone 7 Zone 7
Zone 6 Zone 6
Zone 5 Zone 5
Zone 4 Zone 4
Zone 3 Zone 3
Zone 2 Zone 2
Zone 1 Zone 1
PID group zone change by PV PID group zone change by SP
• Operation at a changeover point between zones is as shown below.

As an example, the change between PID1 and PID2 is shown.
PID2 Shows that the PID group changes at this value.
Hysteresis for zone Shows that the PID group changes at the point
PID1
Zone 1 setpoint where 1U is added to this value.
5-23
Heat/Cool control

The Heat/Cool control related items, such as Heat/Cool, Heat/Cool control dead
zone, and Heat/Cool change point can be set.
However, when the control output type is R1 (motor drive relay output), the Heat/
Cool control is not enabled.

Heat/Cool 0: Normal 0 Standard,
(Setup bank) 1: Energy saving High function
Heat/Cool control dead -100.0 to +100.0 % 0.0 % Basic,
zone Standard,
Heat/Cool change point -10.0 to +110.0 % 50.0 % High function
(Setup bank)
The following shows the Heat/Cool control calculation:

PID (heat) PID (cool)
Heat/Cool
PID (heat) PID (cool)

Constants P, I, d, rE Constants oL, oH Constants oL, oH
PV PID control Heat/Cool output Heat MV

(Fixed at reverse action) MV (PID control result) calculation
SP Cool MV
Heat/Cool control dead zone

Heat/Cool control change point
• When [C26: Heat/Cool control] is set to [1: Enabled], the display and setting can
be made.
• When MV ≥ 50 %, the control is changed to the PID (heat).
• When MV < 50 %, the control is changed to the PID (cool).
• When [C27: Heat/Cool] is set to [1: Energy saving], the heat/cool change is
suppressed to indirectly obtain the energy saving effect. However, when [C28:
Heat/Cool control dead zone] is less than 0.0 %, the energy saving effect cannot
be obtained.
• How the relationship between the output (heat) and output (cool) is made for the
PID control result (MV) is set.
Note
Heat/cool output
zz
 Formulas and limits for the heat/cool MV
“Deadband” in the explanation below refers to a heat/cool control dead zone.
The cool MV and the heat MV are determined by the following formulas and the
MV high and low limits.
Heat MV = (MV − heat/cool control change point − 0.5 × dead zone) × change rate
Cool MV = (heat/cool control change point − MV − 0.5 × dead zone) × change rate
100
Change rate =
Heat/cool control change point − 0.5 × dead zone
5-24
However, MV high and low limits, output low limit (cooling), and output high limit
(cooling) are related to the heat MV and cool MV as follows.
100 %
MV high limit
Cool Heat
Output high limit (cooling) MV MV
Output low limit (cooling)

MV low limit
MV
0% 100 %
Note: The thick line and thick dotted line represent heat MV and cool MV respectively.
• MV low limit ≤ heat MV ≤ MV high limit
• Output low limit (cooling) ≤ cool MV ≤ output high limit (cooling)
• Use the controller within the following range: 0.0 < heat/cool control change
point < 100.0.
• In the formula for rate of change, do not make the denominator = 0.
• Regardless of the heat/cool control change point setting, 50 % of MV is always the

point at which the PID group switches.
 Examples of output
Dead zone
100.0 % 100.0 % 100.0 % 100.0%
Cool MV Heat MV Cool MV Heat MV
0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 %

0.0 % 50.0 % 100.0 % MV 0.0 % 50.0 % 100.0 % MV
Figure 1. Figure 2.
Dead zone = 0.0 % Dead zone > 0.0 %
Heat/cool control change point = 50.0 % Heat/cool control change point = 50.0 %
Absolute value
of the dead zone
100.0 % 100.0 % 100.0 %
Cool MV Heat MV
Cool MV 33.3 %
Heat MV
0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 %
0.0 % 50.0% 100.0 % MV 0.0 % 75.0 % 100.0 % MV
Figure 3. Figure 4.
Dead zone < 0.0 % Dead zone = 0.0 %
Heat/cool control change point = 50.0 % Heat/cool control change point = 75.0 %
In figure 4, when the MV is 100 %, the heat MV is 33.3 %. In this case, when the
heat/cool control change point is 50 % or more, if the MV is 100 %, the heat MV
high limit is less than 100 %. The change rate of the heat MV relative to the MV is
the same as that of the cool MV relative to the MV.
5-25
Auto tuning (AT)

The following AT related items can be set:

MV low limit at AT -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 % Basic,
MV high limit at AT -10.0 to +110.0 % 100.0 % High function
(Parameter bank)
AT type 0: Normal (Standard control characteristics) 0
(Extended tuning bank) 1: Immediate response (Control
characteristics that respond immediately
to external disturbance.)
2: Stability (Control characteristics having
less up/down fluctuation of PV)
AT Proportional band adjust 0.00 to 99.99 1.00 High function
(Extended tuning bank)
AT Integral time adjust 0.00 to 99.99 1.00
AT Derivative time adjust 0.00 to 99.99 Position proportional
(Extended tuning bank) control model: 0.00 *,
Nonposition propor.
types: 1.00
* A
T derivative time adjustment coefficient
Since the coefficient on position proportional control models (with code R1 in the control output segment of the model
No.) is originally set at 0.00, the derivative time is 0 seconds when AT is complete. To have the AT result affect control,
change the setting to 1.00.
• The manipulated variable (MV) during execution of AT can be limited by the
MV low limit at AT (At.OL) and MV high limit at AT (AT.OH).
When the Heat/Cool control is not used, the MV becomes a value limited by both
the MV low limit at AT (At.OL)/MV high limit at AT (At.OH) and MV low
limit (OL-_ )/MV high limit (OH-_ ) of the PID constant.
When the Heat/Cool control is used, the MV becomes a value limited by the MV
low limit at AT (At.OL )/MV high limit at AT (At.OH ), the heat MV becomes
a value limited by the MV low limit (OL-_ )/MV high limit (OH-_ ) of the PID
constant, and the cool MV becomes a value limited by the cool-side MV low limit
(OL._C)/cool-side MV high limit (OH._C) of the PID constant.
• The AT type (At.ty) is a setting item that the PID constant of the control
characteristics suitable for the system is calculated by the AT.
Set value 1 (immediate response) is adjusted to the process that the heater heating
directly affects the PV to aim at the adjustment considering the immediate response.
Set value 2 (stability) is adjusted to the process that the heater heating indirectly
affects the PV to aim at the adjustment considering the stability.
• If the setting is made so that the MV low limit at AT is greater than MV high
limit at AT, the operation is performed with the low limit swapped for the high
limit automatically.
Note
When compared to the AT functions of Azbil Corporation's older models, set
value 1 (immediate response) is close to the SDC10 and set value 0 (normal) is
close to the SDC20/21 and SDC30/31.
5-26
The following figure shows the conceptual diagram expressing differences in

control result using the PID constant calculated by each AT type:
PV
AT type = 1
(Immediate response)
SP
AT type = 0 (Normal)
AT type = 2 (Stability)
Time
Difference in PV change when SP is changed.
• For the AT Proportional band adjust (At-P), AT Integral time adjust (At-I),
and AT Derivative time adjust (At-d), the value that the PID constant
calculated by the AT is multiplied by each coefficient is written into the set value
of the PID constant. However, the coefficient must be a value in the PID constant
setting range.
Note
• In the Heat/Cool control, it is possible to execute the AT only on the heat or
cool side.
• Setting that the AT is activated for only the heat PID constant in the Heat/
Cool control:
50.0 % <MV low limit at AT (At.OL) < MV high limit at AT (At.OH)
• Setting that the AT is activated for only the cool PID constant in the Heat/
Cool control:
MV low limit at AT (At.OL ) < MV high limit at AT (At.OH ) < 50.0 %
For details about AT,

 Auto tuning (AT) stop/start (p. 5-11) and 5 - 4 Auto Tuning (AT)
Function (p. 5-29).
5-27
Just-FiTTER

This Just-FiTTER function provides the effect of the overshoot suppression and the
following items can be set:

Just-FiTTER assistance 0 to 100 0 Standard,
coefficient (“0”: JF function disabled) High function
Just-FiTTER settling band 0.00 to 10.00 % 0.30 % High function
• Function of Just-FiTTER assistance coefficient (JF.Ov)
When the Just-FiTTER assistance coefficient (JF.Ov) is set to “0”, the Just-
FiTTER function becomes invalid.
When this coefficient is “1” or more, the effect of the overshoot limit/restraint/
control becomes larger as the coefficient becomes larger.
• Function of Just-FiTTER settling band (JF.bd)
When the % value of the width of the absolute value deviation to the PV range is
larger than the set value, the Just-FiTTER function is started. When this value
is smaller than the set value, this is judged as that the PV is settled by the Just-
FiTTER function.
RationaLOOP

This RationaLOOP function suppresses the unstable trend if the immediate
response to external disturbance is increased by the high precision control logic.
The following items can be set:

Control algorithm 0: PID (Conventional PID) 0 Standard,
(Extended tuning bank) 1: RationaLOOP (High-performance PID) High function
display and setting can be made.
SP lag

This SP lag function suppresses changes in MV when the SP is changed. The
following items can be set:

SP lag constant 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 High function
(Extended tuning bank) (No effect when set at “0.0”.)
• Function of SP lag constant (SP.LG)
When the SP lag constant is set at "0.0", the SP lag function becomes invalid.
When this value is "0.1" or more, changes in MV when the SP is changed become
smaller and the effect of the overshoot suppression becomes larger as the value
becomes larger.
5-28
5 - 4 Auto Tuning (AT) Function

The auto tuning (AT) function is used when the PID constants are set automatically with the control method set at
“Fixed PID” ([CtrL = 1]).
The AT function can be used when the control method is set to “Fixed PID”.
Starting procedures

(1) Make sure that the PV input or operation end (heater power, etc.) is
controllable.
(2) Using the [r- -r] setup of the mode bank, multi-status display, and LED
monitor, make sure that the operation is in the RUN mode. If the indicator
[rdy] is lit and the operation is in the READY mode, change the mode to the
RUN mode.
(3) Make sure that the mode indicator [man] is off and the operation is in
the AUTO mode. If the indicator [man] is lit and the operation is in the
MANUAL mode, change the mode to the AUTO mode.
(4) Set the parameter setting [AT Stop/Start selection] to “AT start ([At] =
[At.On])”.
Stopping procedures

The AT function is completed automatically. To stop the AT function, which is
running, change the parameter setting [AT Stop/Start selection] to AT stop ([At]
= [At.OF]). Additionally, the AT function is stopped when changing the READY
mode to the MANUAL mode.
Display during execution of AT

zz
The decimal point at the 1st digit of the upper display (right end digit) flashes twice
repeatedly while the AT function is running. When the AT function is completed
and the PID constants are changed, this LED goes off.
pv man pv
rsp
LED ev1
sp
out
ev2 LED
ev3
sp
ot1
man rsp ev1 ev2 ev3 ot1 ot2 out
ot2
mode display display

mode
enter
para enter
para
Operation during execution of AT

zz
The AT function calculates the PID constants using the limit cycle.
(1) When the AT function is started, a point, where the SP and PV deviations
are split to “2:1”, is determined as ON/OFF change point of the manipulated
variable (MV).
(2) When the limit cycle is judged as stable, the PID constants are changed and the
AT function is completed.
5-29
PV
SP
1/3
2/3
Insufficient Stable
stability cycle
AT start Normal end Time
In the Heat/Cool control, the AT function is run in the status that both the heat MV
and cool MV are operated.
In the first half, the MV is changed to the MV low limit/MV high limit. In the
latter half, the MV is changed in a slightly narrow range.
The following Figure shows an example of the AT execution when the Heat/Cool
control deadband is 0.0 %, Heat/Cool control change point is 50.0 %, MV low limit
is 0.0 %, and MV high limit is 100.0 %:
MV (%)
100.0
50.0
0.0
Time
Heat MV (%)
100.0
50.0
0.0
Time
Cool MV (%)
100.0
50.0
0.0
Time
PV
AT is running.
SP change
point
Time
• Before starting the AT function, put the PV input and/or actuator (heater
power, etc.) in the controllable status.
• When the control method is set at “ON/OFF control” ([CtrL] = 0), the AT
function cannot be started. To operate the AT function, set the control
method to “Fixed PID” ([CtrL] = 1).
• To start the AT, it is absolutely necessary that the operation is in the
READY mode and AUTO mode, and no PV input errors occur.
• If the mode is changed to the READY mode or MANUAL mode or if the PV
input error or power failure occurs during execution of the AT function,
the AT function is stopped without changing of the PID constants.
5-30
• On position proportional control models (with code R1 in the control output

segment of the model No.), the factory setting for At-d (AT derivative time
adjust) in the Extended tuning bank is 0.00, and therefore the derivative
time is 0 seconds when AT is complete. To have the AT result affect control,
change the At-d setting to 1.00 and re-execute AT. For details,
 Auto tuning (AT) (p. 5-26).
• When the Heat/Cool control is not used, the MV becomes a value limited
by both ranges, one range is between the MV low limit at AT (AT.OL) and
MV high limit at AT (AT.OH), and the other is between the MV low limit
(OL-_ ) and MV high limit (OH-_ ) of the PID constant. When there are no
common portions in two ranges, the AT function is stopped automatically.
• When the Heat/Cool control is used, the MV becomes a value limited by
the MV low limit at AT (At.OL)/MV high limit at AT (At.OH), the heat MV
becomes a value limited by the MV low limit (OL-_ )/MV high limit (OH-_ )
of the PID constant, and the cool MV becomes a value limited by the Cool-
side MV low limit (OL._C)/Cool-side MV high limit (OH._C) of the PID
constant.
• When the MV low limit at AT (AT.OL)/high limit (AT.OH), MV low limit
(OL-_ )/high limit (OH-_ ), Cool-side MV low limit (OL._C)/Cool-side MV
high limit (OH._C) of the PID constant are set unevenly, the PV may not be
changed up or down even though the MV is changed by the AT. In this case,
the AT is kept continued. Then, stop the AT manually, set the high limit and
low limit of the manipulated variable again, and restart the AT.
• The number of limit cycles and period of time from the AT start to AT end
may vary depending on the control subject.
• The MV ON and OFF are repeated several times during execution of the
AT function to perform the limit cycle. (The OFF operation described here
means MV limited by the MV low limit at AT ([At.OL]) or MV high limit
at AT ([OL]). The default setting before shipment is “0 %”. Additionally,
the ON operation described here means MV limited by the MV high limit
at AT ([At.OH]) or MV high limit at AT ([OH]). The default setting before
shipment is “100 %”. If this AT operation does not function correctly, take
either of the following measures:
(1) Change the MV low limit at AT ([At.OL]) or MV high limit at AT
([At.OH]) to an appropriate value, and then start the AT function.
(2) Set the PID constants manually without use of AT.
• The AT progress value can be seen in the operation display mode.
For details,
 Operation displays in section 6 - 1 List of Operation Displays
(p. 6-1).
When the Heat/Cool control is not used, the AT progress value
decrements from [4] during execution of the AT function and becomes [0]
at completion of the AT function.
When the Heat/Cool control is used, the AT progress value decrements
from [8] during execution of the AT function and becomes [0] at
completion of the AT function.
In both cases, the AT progress value may be “1” or “0” when the AT process
is in the transient status.
• Appropriate PID constants cannot be obtained depending on the control
subject. If this happens, set the PID constants manually.
• The MV ON/OFF change point determined when the AT function is
started does not change even though the SP is changed while the AT is
running. For details about AT function,
 Auto tuning (AT) stop/start (p. 5-11) and  Auto tuning (AT)
(p. 5-26).
5-31
5 - 5 Set Point (SP)

The following shows the functional block diagram of the SP. For details about step operation,
5 - 6 Step Operation (p. 5-43).
LSP system group RSP input type

(Setting: Setup C30) (Setting: Setup C 10)
One LSP group exists. Two or more LSP groups exist.
RSP high limit/low limit

DI Assignment of LSP group
LSP1 alarm
selection provided/not provided.
(Setting: SP SP 1) (Setting: DI Assignment di 1. 1 (RSP mode only)
to di 5. 1)
DI Assignment is DI Assignment is
not provided. provided.
RSP scaling
(Setting: Setup C 1 1 to C 12)
LSP group number Logical operation of DI
(Setting: LSP group
number in operation (Setting: General DI
display mode) Assignment)
RSP ratio
(Setting: Parameter rA2)
LSP 1 to 8
(Setting: SP SP 1 to SP8)
RSP bias
LSP value in use (Setting: Parameter bI 2)
SP ramp unit (Setting: Setup C32)

SP ramp-up/ramp-down (Setting: Parameter RSP high limit/low limit
SPU, SPd) (-10 to +110 % of scaling)
DI Assignment of SP ramp enabled/disabled.

(Setting: DI Assignment di 1. 1 to di 3. 1) RSP
LSP/RSP mode selection
SP high limit/low limit

(Setting: Setup C07, C08)
SP
Note
LSP is a local SP and shows that the data is retained inside this unit.
On the contrary, SP by the analog input from the outside is called RSP or remote SP.
5-32
SP setup in operation display mode

The set value for LSP in use of LSP1 to 8 can be set.
The LSP set value is different from the SP display value during SP ramp. However,
the set value is displayed while the key is being operated to change the setting.

SP (Operation display) PV is SP low limit to SP high limit U 0U Basic,
shown on Standard,
the upper High function
display.
• When [bit 1: SP display] of [C74: PV/SP display setup] is set at "1" (display is
provided), the display and setting can be made.
• The SP cannot be set in the RSP mode.
LSP system group

The LSP system group can be selected.

LSP system group 1 to 8 1 Basic,
High function
SP ramp type

Either the standard ramp or multi-ramp can be selected.
Additionally, for details about step operation,

SP ramp type 1: Multi-ramp 0 High function
(Setup bank) 2: Step operation The step operation is
stopped when the power is turned ON
again (READY).
3: Step operation The step operation is
recovered when the power is turned ON
again.
• When this setting is set at “0”, the ramp-up and ramp-down use only one setting
group (SP ramp-up and SP ramp-down of parameter bank) even though one LSP
group or multiple LSP groups are used.
• When this setting is set at “1”, the ramp setting (ramp 1 to 8 of SP bank) common
to the up/down to be set by LSP group is used.
RSP input range type

The RSP input signal type can be selected.

RSP input range type 0: 4 to 20 mA 0 Basic,
(Setup bank) 1: 0 to 20 mA Standard,
2: 0 to 5 V High function
3: 1 to 5 V
4: 0 to 10 V
• When the model provides the RSP input, the display and setting can be
performed.
5-33
RSP range low limit/high limit

The scaling of the RSP input can be set.

RSP range low limit -1999 to +9999 (No decimal point) 0 U Basic,
(Setup bank) -199.9 to +999.9 (1 digit after the decimal Standard,
point) High function
-19.99 to +99.99 (2 digits after the decimal
point)
RSP range high limit -1.999 to +9.999 (3 digits after the decimal 1000 U
(Setup bank) point)
The decimal point position is the same as
that of the PV.
performed.
• The following shows the relationship between the RSP input and RSP based on
the range low limit and high limit settings.
RSP RSP
Low limit Low limit

Input (%) Input (%)
–10 0 100 110 –10 0 100 110
RSP ratio and RSP bias

The RSP ratio and RSP bias can be set to correct the RSP.

RSP ratio 0.001 to 9.999 1.000 Standard,
RSP bias -1999 to +9999 U 0 U
(Parameter bank)
performed.
• Details of RSP ratio and RSP bias calculation

Assuming that the calculation input is RSPin, the calculation result is RSPout, the
RSP ratio is RA2, and the RSP bias is BI2, the following calculation formula is
obtained.
RSPout = (RSPin X RA2) + BI2
5-34
RSP filter

This RSP filter is a primary delay filter to be used if the RSP deflects finely due to effect
of the noise. As this set value is made larger, the RSP to be used for control of this unit
becomes difficult to change. Normally, the RSP filter is used with the initial value (0.0).

RSP filter 0.0 to 120.0 0.0 Standard,
• When the model provides the RSP input, the display and setting can be performed.
OUT = OUT-1 + (IN − OUT-1)/(T/ Ts +1)
IN: Input to the filter
OUT: Current filter calculation output
OUT-1: Previous filter calculation output
T: Filter set value (s)
Ts: Sampling cycle time (0.1 s)
RSP low limit/high limit and RSP low limit/high limit alarms

The RSP low limit and RSP high limit are provided for each RSP input type.
Basically, -10 %FS of each range is the RSP low limit and +110 %FS of each range is
the RSP high limit.
For details,
 Behavior in case of RSP input failure (p. 10-4).
The RSP is limited so that it is in a range from the RSP low limit to the RSP high
limit. If the RSP before the RSP ratio, RSP bias, and RSP filter are activated is larger
than the RSP high limit in the RSP mode, the RSP high limit alarm (AL05) occurs.
If this RSP is smaller than the RSP low limit, the RSP low limit alarm (AL06)
occurs. (Both the RSP high limit alarm and RSP low limit alarm do not occur in
the LSP mode.) When the RSP is used as SP in the RSP mode, the limiting with the
SP low limit and SP high limit also becomes valid.
RSP and LSP1 to 8

The RSP display and eight groups of LSP setup values can be set.

RSP RSP (Remote SP) — Basic,
(SP bank) Setting disabled. Standard,
LSP SP low limit to SP high limit 0 U High function
(SP bank)
0 U
0 U
0 U
0 U
0 U
0 U
0 U
• When the model provides the RSP input, the RSP can be displayed and set.
• The display and setting can be made for the LSP system group selected in [C30:
LSP system group].
5-35
PID group number

The PID group numbers to the RSP and eight groups of LSPs can be set.

PID group No. (RSP) 1 to 8 1 Standard,
(SP bank) High function
PID group No. (LSP) 1
(SP bank)
1
• When the model provides the RSP input, the PID group number (RSP) can be
displayed and set.
• The PID group numbers (LSP) for the LSP system groups selected in [C30: LSP
system group] can be displayed and set.
LSP group number

The LSP group number can be set.

LSP group No. Numeric value at the rightmost digit of the 1 Basic,
(Operation display) display. Standard,
1 to LSP system group High function
• When [C30: LSP system group] is set at “2” or more and [bit 2: LSP group
number display] of the PV/SP display setup (setup C74) is set at “1” (display is
provided), the display can be made.
• When the display is possible and the DI Assignment of the LSP group selection is
not performed, the setting can be made.
5-36
DI Assignment of LSP group selection

The LSP group selection can be set for internal contacts 1 to 5 using the DI
Assignment.

Internal contact 1 to 5 0: No function 0 Basic,
Operation type 1: LSP group selection (0/+1) Standard,
(DI Assignment bank) 2: LSP group selection (0/+2) 0 High function
3: LSP group selection (0/+4)
4 to 20: Other functions
0
• Details of LSP group selection with the internal contact function

The following shows the LSP group selection value according to the ON/OFF
status of each internal contact:
LSP group selection (0/+1) OFF: 0 ON: 1
The value, that "1" is added to the sum of the LSP group selection values
according to the ON/OFF status of each internal contact, becomes the LSP group
number.
For example, when the sum of LSP group selection values of internal contact 1 to
5 is "1", the LSP group number becomes "2". However, if this value exceeds the
value set in [C30: LSP system group], LSP groups, the number of which is the
same as the value set in [C30: LSP system group], are selected.
• Even though the LSP system group is "1", the display and setting can be made, but
the LSP group selection with the internal contact function becomes invalid.
5-37
SP ramp unit

The unit of the SP ramp-up/ramp-down can be set.

SP ramp unit 0: 0.1 U/s 1 High function
(Setup bank) 1: 0.1 U/min
2: 0.1 U/h
• "0.1 U" shows that the decimal point position is shifted one digit rightward as
compared with the PV.
Example: When the thermocouple input is in a range of -200 to +1200 °C, "0.1 U" is
"0.1 °C".
Example: When the DC voltage input is in a range of 0.0 to 100.0, "0.1 U" is "0.01".
For the relationship between the decimal point position and the type of PV input
range, refer to the next section, “ SP ramp-up / ramp-down.”
When using the DC voltage/DC current input with setting of 3 digits after
the decimal point, "0.1 U" is "0.0001".
However, the SP ramp-up/SP ramp-down setting cannot display 4 digits
together with the decimal point, so the value is displayed without the
decimal point.
SP ramp-up/ramp-down

The SP ramp-up and ramp-down can be set.

SP up ramp (U/min) 0.0 U: No ramp 0.0 U High function
(Parameter bank) 0.1 to 999.9 U
SP down ramp (U/min) (The unit of the ramp time is selected using 0.0 U
(Parameter bank) the SP ramp unit.)
• The SP ramp-up/ramp-down setting is valid when [C3 1: SP ramp type] is set at

“0: Standard”.
• When an initial value of “0.0 U” is set, the SP ramp function does not function.
Therefore, when the ramp-up setting is set to “0.1 U” or more and the ramp-
down is set to “0.0 U”, the SP ramp function is enabled only during the ramp-up
and disabled during the ramp-down. Additionally, the reverse operation can also
be set so that the SP ramp function is enabled only during the ramp-down and
disabled during the ramp-up.
• Regarding the setting for the number of digits after the decimal point (C04), the
SP ramp display shows one digit more than is shown for the PV. For linear input,
if C04 is set for 3 digits after the decimal point, no decimal point is displayed in
the SP ramp value, but all 4 displayed digits are after the decimal point.
The unit for the SP ramp can be selected from every second, every minute, and
every hour in C32 of the SETUP bank.
The table below shows how the decimal point position varies depending on the
PV input range.
5-38
C0 1 (PV input range type) C04 (Decimal point position) SPU (SP ramp up) SPD (SP ramp down)
2 (0 to 1200 °C) Setting disabled 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 to 999.9
3 (0.0 to 800.0 °C) 0 (No decimal point) 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 to 999.9
1 (1 digit after the decimal point) 0.00 to 99.99 0.00 to 99.99
88 (0 to 10 V) 0 (No decimal point) 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 to 999.9
1 (1 digit after the decimal point) 0.00 to 99.99 0.00 to 99.99
2 (2 digits after the decimal point) 0.000 to 9.999 0.000 to 9.999
3 (3 digits after the decimal point) 0.0000 to 0.9999 0.0000 to 0.9999
• The ramp is started assuming that the current PV value is used as start point
when the SP ramp-up or ramp-down is possible under the following conditions.
The power is turned ON.
READY+AUTO status is changed to RUN+AUTO status.
RUN+MANUAL status is changed to RUN+AUTO status.
The AT function is completed (both normal end and forced stop).
Example: (1) When READY is changed to RUN with SP=100 °C, PV=25 °C,
SPU=0.0, and SPd=1.0, the PV is not started.
(2) When READY is changed to RUN with SP=50 °C, PV=100 °C,
SPU=0.0, and SPd=1.0, the PV is started.
• The SP ramp does not function for remote SP.
Before changing the slope of the SP ramp, make sure that SP ramping is not
in progress.
If the setting is changed while SP ramping is in progress, the SP may change
suddenly.
5-39
SP multi-ramp

The SP multi-ramp set values can be set for eight groups of LSPs.

Ramp 0.0 U: No ramp. 0.0 U Standard,
(SP bank) 0.1 to 999.9 U High function
(The time unit of the ramp is selected using 0.0 U
the SP ramp unit.)
0.0 U
0.0 U
0.0 U
0.0 U
0.0 U
0.0 U
• When [C3 1: SP ramp type] is set at “1: Multi-ramp”, the display and setting can
be performed.
• In the standard ramp, the ramp-up and ramp-down are set individually.
However, in the multi-ramp, the ramp common to the up and down is set.
• When this setting is set at “0.0 U”, the SP ramp does not function.
• “rMp. 1” corresponds to LSP1 while “rMp.8” corresponds to LSP8.
• “0.1 U” shows that the decimal point position is shifted one digit right from the
decimal point position of the PV.
For example,
 SP ramp-up/ramp-down (p. 5-38).
• For details about conditions to start the ramp assuming that the current PV value
is used as start point,
 SP ramp-up/ramp-down (p. 5-38).
Before changing the slope of the SP ramp for the selected LSP No. when the
multi-ramp is selected, make sure that SP ramping is not in progress.
suddenly.
5-40
SP
SP achievement SP change
SP-2
SP change
Ramp 2
SP-1
Ramp 3
Ramp 1 SP achievement
SP-3
PV at start
LSP1 group LSP2 group LSP3 group
LSP change and multi-ramp
Note
The multi-ramp function is applicable to an application that changes the SP change
timing using the external switch or communication when performing the pattern
operation as shown above.
To set the SP value hold time,
5-41
SP low limit/high limit

The SP low limit and high limit can be set to limit the SP range.

SP low limit PV range low limit to PV range high limit PV range low limit Standard,
SP high limit PV range low limit to PV range high limit PV range high limit Standard,
• If the setting is made so that the SP low limit is greater than the SP high limit,
the operation is performed with the low limit swapped for the high limit
automatically.
When [C0 1: PV input range type] is set, the SP low limit and high limit are
initialized.
DI Assignment of SP ramp enabled/disabled

The SP ramp enabled/disabled can be set for the internal contact function using the
DI assignment.

Internal Contacts 1 to 5 0: No function 0 Basic,
Operation type 13: SP ramp enabled/disabled. Standard,
(DI Assignment bank) 1 to 12, 14 to 20: Other functions 0 High function
• Details of SP ramp enabled/disabled with internal contact function

The following shows the SP ramp enabled/disabled setting with the internal
contact ON/OFF:
OFF: SP ramp enabled. ON: SP ramp disabled.
The SP ramp enabled/disabled is set for only one internal contact.
• When the SP ramp is set disabled, the SP ramp operation is stopped and the SP
value becomes the final SP.
5-42
5 - 6 Step Operation

Use of up to eight SP groups makes it possible to perform the step operation, in which the SP is changed, as shown
in the Figure below.
The step operation is set according to the LSP, ramp, and time of each step.
Additionally, the PID group No. to be used for each step can also be set.
In the step, the portion where the SP has the ramp is called “RAMP” and the portion where the SP is the constant
value is called “SOAK”.
(The following Figure shows the RAMP and SOAK portions of step 5.)
SP
RAMP portion of step 5
SOAK portion of step 5
Time
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8
• The step operation functions in the RUN mode. In the READY mode, the
operation is stopped at the top of step 1.
LSP system group

The number of steps for the step operation can be determined using the LSP system
group.

LSP system group 1 to 8 1 Basic,
High function
5-43
SP ramp type

Whether or not the step operation is performed can be selected.
Additionally, the operation when the power is returned after a power cut
occurrence during step operation can also be selected.

SP ramp type 0: Standard 0 High function
(Setup bank) 1: Multi-ramp
2: Step operation The step operation
is stopped when the power restarts
(READY).
3: Step operation The step operation is
recovered when the power restarts.
• To make the step operation enabled, “2” or “3” is set.
• In case of set at “2”, the operation is stopped (READY mode) and returned to the
top of the step when the power is returned after the power cut occurs while the
step operation is running (RUN mode).
• In case of set at “3”, the operation is restarted from the step before a power cut
occurs when the power is returned after the power cut occurs while the step
operation is running (RUN mode). However, the SP and time before the power
cut cannot be returned completely and the step operation is restarted as described
in the following:
If the operation before the power cut is SOAK, the operation is restarted from
the beginning of the SOAK portion. If the operation before the power cut is
RAMP and the PV alarm (AL0 1/02) does not occur, the RAMP operation
is restarted from the SP same as PV. If the operation before the power cut
is RAMP and the PV alarm (AL0 1/02) occurs, the operation moved to the
SOAK portion next to the RAMP.
• The operation of this unit with the setting set at “3” (step operation,
operation is recovered when the power restarts) is different from that
of Azbil Corporatin’s digital programmable controller model DCP-series
(DCP31/32, DCP551/552). The DCP-series functions so that the SP, RAMP,
or SOAK elapse time immediately before the power cut continues even
after the power has been turned ON again. However, this unit functions
so that the operation is returned to the start point of the RAMP or SOAK
portions, which has been operated immediately before the power cut has
occurred.
• When the setting is set at “3” (step operation, operation is recovered when
the power restarts), it is also necessary to carefully check the number
of EEPROM (nonvolatile memory) writing cycles. When the operation
step proceeds in the RUN mode, the data is written into the EEPROM
(nonvolatile memory) every time the RAMP or SOAK is changed. If the
step operation is continued with a RAMP or SOAK operation time of
10 min or less, the erase/write cycles of EEPROM may exceed its service
life (approximately 100,000 cycles) within two years. Therefore, do not
attempt to operate the unit in such manner.
• When the SP ramp type is set at “standard” or “multi-ramp” (C3 1 =
0, 1) and the operation mode is the RUN mode, the operation mode
is automatically changed to the READY mode if the SP ramp type is
changed to “step operation” (C3 1 = 2, 3).
• When the step operation is set enabled, the LSP mode is fixed and the
LSP/RSP selection cannot be performed.
5-44
SP ramp unit

The ramp unit for the RAMP portion of the step operation can be set.

SP ramp unit 0: 0.1 U/s 1 High function
(Setup bank) 1: 0.1 U/min
2: 0.1 U/h
• “0.1 U” shows that the decimal point position is shifted one digit right from the
decimal point position of the PV.
Example: W hen the thermocouple input is in a range of −200 to +1200 °C,
“0.1 U” is equal to 0.1 °C.
Example: W hen the DC voltage input is in a range of 0.0 to 100.0, “0.1 U” is equal
to “0.01”.
When the DC voltage or DC current input is used with the setting, three
digits after the decimal point, “0.1 U” is equal to “0.0001”.
However, since the SP ramp-up or SP ramp-down setting cannot show four
digits after the decimal point, the setting is shown without the decimal
point.
STEP time unit

The time unit for the SOAK portion of the step operation can be set.

STEP time unit 0: 0.1 s 0 High function
(Setup bank) 1: 1 s (“min. s” on the operation display)
2: 1 min (“h. min” on the operation display)
• When this setting is set at “0”, the time setting unit of the SP bank becomes “0.1 s”.
• When this setting is set at “1”, the time setting unit of the SP bank becomes “s”.
The decimal point is shown between “min” (2 digits) and “s” (2 digits) of the step
remain time on the operation display.
• When this setting is set at “2”, the time setting unit of the SP bank becomes “min”.
The decimal point is shown between “h” (2 digits) and “min” (2 digits) of the step
remain time on the operation display.
• In the operation display mode, the step remaining time display follows
the step operation time unit setting regardless of the RAMP and SOAK
portions.
• If “1” is set, when the step remaining time is 99 minutes 59 seconds or
more, the opration display shows 99.99.
• If “2” is set, when the step remaining time is 99 hours 59 minutes or more,
the opration display shows 99.99.
5-45
STEP PV start

Whether or not the PV start exists and its type at start of the step operation can be
set.

STEP PV start 0: None 0 High function
(Setup bank) 1: Up start
2: Down start
• When this setting is set at “0”, the step operation is started from the SOAK
portion of step 1.
• When this setting is set at “1”, the step operation is started from the same SP as
PV in the up RAMP portion of step 1 if PV<SP-1. If PV≥SP-1, the step operation
is started from the SOAK portion of step 1.
• When this setting is set at “2”, the step operation is started from the same SP
as PV in the down RAMP portion of step 1 if PV>SP-1. If PV≤SP-1, the step
operation is started from the SOAK portion of step 1.
SP
SP-1
Time
READY Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
Operation start from SOAK of step 1
SP
SP-1
Ramp of step 1
PV at start
Time
Operation start from up RAMP of step 1

SP
PV at start
Ramp of step 1
SP-1
Time
Operation start from down RAMP of step 1
5-46
STEP loop

Whether or not the loop exists at the end of the step operation and the operation
end status can be set.

STEP loop 0: Stop (No loop) 0 High function
(Setup bank) 1: Loop
2: Final step continued. (No loop)
• When this setting is set at “0”, the operation is stopped (READY mode) if the
operation of the SOAK portion of the final step is completed.
• When this setting is set at “1”, the operation is returned to the RAMP portion
of step 1 if the operation of the SOAK portion of the final step is completed. At
this time, the RAMP operation is performed from SP to SP-1 of the final step
regardless of the setting of [C34: STEP PV start]. Since the number of loop cycles
is not limited, the loop operation is continued until the READY mode is selected.
• When this setting is set at “2”, the operation is continued with SP of the final step
kept remained until the READY mode is selected if the SOAK portion of the final
step is completed.
5-47
STEP operation LSP, PID group No., ramp, time

The SP change and PID group No. by step of the step operation can be set.

SP (for LSP1) SP low limit (C07 ) to SP high limit (C08 ) 0 Basic,
(SP bank) Standard,
High function
PID group No. (for LSP1) 1 to 8 1 Standard,
Ramp (for LSP1) 0.0 U: No ramp. 0.0
(SP bank) 0.1 to 999.9 U
(The time unit of the ramp is selected in
the SP ramp unit.)
Time (for LSP1) 0.0 to 999.9 s 0.0
(SP bank) ( The time unit of the step operation is set
at “0.1 s”.)
0 to 9999 s
( The time unit of the step operation is set
at “1 s”.)
0 to 9999 min
( The time unit of the step operation is set
at “1 min”.)
SP (for LSP2) Same as SP-1. 0 Basic,
(SP bank) Standard,
High function
PID group No. (for LSP2) 1 Standard,
Ramp (for LSP2) 0.0
(SP bank)
Time (for LSP2) 0.0
(SP bank)
(SP bank) Standard,
High function
Ramp (for LSP3) 0.0
(SP bank)
Time (for LSP3) 0.0
(SP bank)
(SP bank) Standard,
High function
Ramp (for LSP4) 0.0
(SP bank)
Time (for LSP4) 0.0
(SP bank)
5-48

(SP bank) Standard,
High function
Ramp (for LSP5) 0.0
(SP bank)
Time (for LSP5) 0.0
(SP bank)
(SP bank) Standard,
High function
SP (for LSP6) 1 Standard,
Ramp (for LSP6) 0.0
(SP bank)
Time (for LSP6) 0.0
(SP bank)
(SP bank) Standard,
High function
SP (for LSP7) 1 Standard,
Ramp (for LSP7) 0.0
(SP bank)
Time (for LSP7) 0.0
(SP bank)
(SP bank) Standard,
High function
Ramp (for LSP8) 0.0
(SP bank)
Time (for LSP8) 0.0
(SP bank)
• The display and setting for the number of steps set in [C30: LSP system group]
can be performed.
• The PID group No. cannot be displayed and set if the ON/OFF control is used, if
the PID group selection is set for the operation type of internal contact 1 to 5, or
if the zone PID function is used.
• “0.1 U” of the ramp shows that the decimal point position is shifted one digit
right from the decimal point position of the PV.
• When the ramp is set at “0.0 U”, the operation skips the RAMP and moves to the
next SOAK. Additionally, when the LSPs of two continuous steps are the same,
the operation skips the RAMP and moves to the next SOAK.
• When the time setting is set at “0.0” or “0”, the operation skips the SOAK and
moves to the next RAMP.
Before changing the slope of the step ramp during the step operation,
make sure that SP ramping is not in progress (in the SOAK portion).
suddenly.
Also, if the setting is changed during step hold status, the SP may change
suddenly.
5-49
Operation type of internal contact

The following shows the operation types related to the step operation.
Note
For details about internal contact function,
5 - 7 Digital Input (DI) and Internal Contact (p. 5-51).

Internal contact 1 0 to 20 0 Basic,
Operation type 0: No function. Standard,
(DI assignment bank) 7: RUN/READY mode selection High function
Internal contact 2 19: Advance operation 0
Operation type 20: Step hold
(DI assignment bank) (1 to 6 and 8 to 18 are functions, which do
Internal contact 3 not directly relate to the step operation.) 0
Operation type
(DI assignment bank)
Internal contact 4 0
Operation type
Internal contact 5 0
Operation type
• When this setting is set at “7”, the operation mode is changed to the READY
mode if the internal contact is changed from OFF to ON, and the operation mode
is changed to the RUN mode if the internal contact is changed from ON to OFF.
• When this setting is set at “19”, the SOAK is moved to the top of the next RAMP
or the RAMP is moved to the next RAMP if the internal contact is changed from
OFF to ON in the RUN mode. This operation is called “advance”.
When the advance operation is performed in the SOAK of the final step, the
operation mode is changed to the READY mode, the operation is moved to the
top of the RAMP of step 1 by loop, or the SOAK is continued according to the
setting of [C35: Step operation loop].
• When this setting is set at “20”, the progress of the step operation is stopped if the
internal contact becomes ON in the RUN mode. This operation status is called
“step hold status”. When the advance operation is performed in the step hold
status, the operation enters the step hold status at the top of the next RAMP or
SOAK.
SP RAMP SP
advance
Extended portion
SOAK Extended portion by RAMP hold
advance by SOAK hold
Time Time
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
DI: Advance DI: Step hold
5-50
5 - 7 Digital Input (DI) and Internal Contact

The following shows the functional block diagram of the digital input (DI) and internal contact:
Input bit function is not used. Input bit function is used.
Input bit function is not used. Input assignment

(Setting: [Input bit function (Setting: DI Assignment Input assignment A di 1.3
is not used.] to di 5.3,
must be set using DI Assignment DI Assignment Input assignment B di 1.4 to di 5.4,
di 1.2 to di 5.2.) DI Assignment Input assignment C di 1.5 to di 5.6,
DI Assignment Input assignment D di 1.6 to di 5.6)
Input assignment Polarity

DI status (ON/OFF)
(Setting: DI Assignment Polarity A to D di 1.7
to di 5.7)
Input bit function 1 to 4

(Setting: DI Assignment Input bit function di 1.2
to di 5.2)
Polarity Input bit function Polarity

(Setting: DI Assignment di 1.8 to di 5.8) (Setting: DI Assignment di 1.8 to di 5.8)
Internal Contact Input bit function result
Operation type (Setting: DI Assignment di 1. 1

to di 5. 1)
Event channel definitions

(Setting: DI Assignment di 1.9 to di 5.9)
Internal contact function
Even though five internal contacts 1 to 5 are provided, the number of digital
inputs determined by the optional model is 0 to 4 points.
With the default settings before shipment, the operations of digital input 1 to 4
have already been connected to internal contacts 1 to 4.
To utilize the operation of internal contact 5, it is absolutely necessary to set the
DI Assignment.
5-51
Operation type

The operation type by the internal contact function can be set.

Internal Contact 1 0 to 20 0 Basic,
Operation type For details about function by each set Standard,
(DI Assignment bank) value, refer to the Table shown on the next High function
Internal Contact 2 page. 0
Operation type
(DI Assignment bank)
Internal Contact 3 0
Operation type
Operation type
Operation type
• For [1 to 3: LSP group selection], the value that “1” is added to the sum
of weights (+ 1, + 2, +4), the internal contact of which is turned ON,
becomes the LSP group number. However, if this value exceeds the value
set in [C30: LSP system group], LSP groups, the number of which is the
same as the value set in [C30: LSP system group], are selected.
• For [4 to 6: PID group selection], a value made by adding “1” to the sum of
weights (+1, +2, +4), the internal contact of which is turned ON, becomes
the PID group number. However, if this value exceeds “8”, eight PID
groups are selected.
• Do not use [14: PV value hold], [15: PV Max. hold], and [16: PV Min. hold]
with they mixed.
• Do not set the same operation type other than [0: No function] and [1 to
3: LSP group selection] for multiple internal contacts.
• When using the Heat/Cool control, do not use [12: Control action direct/
reverse selection].
• For timer stop/start, set a target Event channel using [Internal contact 1
to 5 Internal event No. assignment].
5-52
The following Table shows the contents of the dI settings:
Set value Function Operation at OFF Operation at ON

0 No function None None
1 LSP group selection (0/+1) LSP No.: +0 LSP No.: +1
4 PID group selection (0/+1) PID group No.: +0 PID group No.: +1
7 RUN/READY mode selection (Note 1) RUN READY
8 AUTO/MANUAL mode selection AUTO MANUAL
9 LSP/RSP mode selection LSP RSP
10 AT (Auto tuning) Stop/Start (Note 2) AT Stop AT Start
11 ST (Self-tuning) disabled/enabled Invalid Invalid
12 Control action direct/reverse Set action Reverse action of setting
selection
13 SP ramp enabled/disabled SP ramp enabled SP ramp disabled
14 PV value hold No-hold Hold
15 PV Max. hold No-hold Hold
16 PV Min. hold No-hold Hold
17 Timer Stop/Start Timer stop Timer start
18 Release all DO latches Continue if latch exists. Latch release
19 Advance operation (Note 3) Step operation continued. Moves to next SOAK or RAMP.
20 Step hold Step operation continued. Hold
(Note 1) Signal edge from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF is valid during step operation.
(Note 2) Signal edge from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF is valid.
(Note 3) Signal edge from OFF to ON is valid.
Internal event No. assignment

When the operation type is the timer start/stop, a target Internal event number can
be set.

Internal Contact 1 Internal 0: Every internal event 0 High function
event No. assignment 1 to 8: Internal event number
Internal Contact 2 Internal 0
event No. assignment
• When the operation type of the same internal contact No. is set at “Timer stop/
start”, the display and setting can be made.
5-53
Input bit function

Four kinds of input bit functions are provided. The required functions can be
configured by the user.

Internal Contact 1 Input bit 0: Not used (Default input) 0 High function
operation 1: Function 1 ((A and B) or (C and D))
(DI Assignment bank) 2: Function 2 ((A or B) and (C or D))
Internal Contact 2 Input bit 3: Function 3 (A or B or C or D) 0
operation 4: Function 4 (A and B and C and D)
Internal Contact 3 Input bit 0
operation
operation
operation
• When the set value is “0”, the input bit function is not used and the default input
is used. The following shows the default input of each internal contact:
Internal Contact 1: digital input (DI) 1
Internal Contact 5: OFF status
• In the input bit function, the logical operations (AND, OR) of each of internal
contacts 1 to 5 are combined. In input bit functions 1 to 4, the combination of the
logical operations may vary. The following shows one logical operation:
Logical AND Logical OR
OFF and OFF = OFF OFF or OFF = OFF
ON and OFF = OFF ON or OFF = ON
ON and ON = ON ON or ON = ON
• “OFF” is “contact open (OPEN)” or “0” when expressed using the numerical
value.
• “ON” is “contact close (CLOSE)” or “1” when expressed using the numerical
value.
5-54
Input assignment

The assignment of four inputs (A, B, C, D) used for the input bit function can be
set.

Internal Contact 1 Input 0: Normally opened. (OFF, 0) 2 High function
assignment A 1: Normally closed. (ON, 1)
(DI Assignment bank) 2: DI1
Internal Contact 1 Input 3: DI2 0
assignment B 4: DI3
Internal Contact 1 Input 6 to 9: Undefined. 0
assignment C 10: Internal Event 1
(DI Assignment bank) 11: Internal Event 2
12: Internal Event 3
Internal Contact 1 Input 13: Internal Event 4 0
assignment D 14: Internal Event 5
assignment A 17: Internal Event 8
(DI Assignment bank) 18: Communication DI1
Internal Contact 2 Input 19: Communication DI2 0
assignment B 20: Communication DI3
(DI Assignment bank) 21: Communication DI4
Internal Contact 2 Input 22: MANUAL mode 0
assignment C 23: READY mode
(DI Assignment bank) 24: RSP mode
Internal Contact 2 Input 25: AT running 0
assignment D 26: During SP ramp
(DI Assignment bank) 27: Undefined.
28: Alarm occurs.
Internal Contact 3 Input 29: PV alarm occurs. 4
assignment A 30: Undefined.
(DI Assignment bank) 31: mode key pressing status
Internal Contact 3 Input 32: Event output 1 status 0
assignment B 33: Control output 1 status
Internal Contact 3 Input 0
assignment C
assignment D
assignment A
assignment B
assignment C
assignment D
5-55

Internal Contact 5 Input 0: Normally opened. (OFF, 0) 0 High function
Internal Contact 5 Input 3: DI2 0
assignment B 4: DI3
Internal Contact 5 Input 6 to 9: Undefined. 0
assignment D 14: Internal Event 5
18: Communication DI1
22: MANUAL mode
23: READY mode
24: RSP mode
25: AT running
26: During SP ramp
27: Undefined.
28: Alarm occurs.
29: PV alarm occurs.
30: Undefined.
31: mode key pressing status
32: Event output 1 status
33: Control output 1 status
• When the internal contact No. and its input bit functions 1 to 4 are set, the
Polarity of input assignment

The polarity of four input assignments (A, B, C, D) used for the input bit function
can be set.

Internal Contact 1, Polarity The digits are called 1st digit, 2nd digit, 3rd 0000 High function
A to D (DI Assignment bank) digit, and 4th digit from the right end digit.
Internal Contact 2, Polarity 1st digit: Input assignment A Polarity setting 0000
A to D (DI Assignment bank) 2nd digit: Input assignment B Polarity setting
Internal Contact 3, Polarity 3rd digit: Input assignment C Polarity setting 0000
A to D (DI Assignment bank) 4th digit: Input assignment D Polarity setting
Internal Contact 4, Polarity 0000
A to D (DI Assignment bank) 0: Direct
1: Reverse
Internal Contact 5, Polarity 0000
A to D (DI Assignment bank)
• When the internal contact No. and its input bit functions 1 to 4 are set, the
5-56
Polarity of input bit function

The polarity of the input bit function (functions 1 to 4) can be set.

Internal Contact 1 Polarity 0: Direct 0 High function
(DI Assignment bank) 1: Reverse
Internal Contact 2 Polarity 0
DI Assignment setting with the SLP-C35 Smart Loader Package

When setting [DI Assignment] with the SLP-C35 Smart Loader Package, select [Edit
(E)] → [Input port setup (O)] in that order from the [Input] menu. The input bit
function, input assignment, polarity of input assignment, and polarity of input bit
function can be easily set using visual images as shown below.
Select the input bit function. The image of the
ladder is changed according to the selected
input bit function. Select four input assignments A to D.
Select whether or not the polarity is set for Select whether or not the polarity of
assignments A to D. the bit function is made.
In addition to the selection through the menu, the Input port setup window
can also be opened using the following procedures:
Click the input/output port setup icon .
Right-click in the input bit function setting window.
Press the [Ctrl] and [P] keys at the same time.
5-57
5 - 8 Internal Event

The result of the internal event process can be output to the control output or event output through the digital
output (DO) process.
For details,
2 - 1 Input/Output Configuration (p. 2-1).
The following shows the functional block diagram of the internal event:
Operation type
(Setting: Event Configuration
Operation type E 1. C 1 to E8. C 1 )
Direct/reverse, Standby
(Setting: Event Configuration,
Direct/reverse, Standby E 1. C2 to E8. C2)
Main setting, sub setting,

hysteresis, special OFF setup
(Setting: Event E 1 to E8, E 1.SB to E8.SB,
E 1.HY to E8.HY, Event Configuration
E 1. C3 to E8. C3)
Controller alarm OR/AND

E 1. C3 to E8. C3)
ON delay, OFF delay, Delay time unit

(Setting: Event E 1.On to E8.On,
E 1.OF to E8.OF.
Event Configuration E 1.C3 to E8.C3)
EVENT state at READY

E 1.C2 to E8.C2)
Internal Event status
Even though eight internal events 1 to 8 are provided, the number of event
outputs determined by the optional model is 0 to 3 points. With the default
settings before shipment, the operations of internal events 1 to 3 can be output
to event outputs 1 to 3. To utilize the operations of internal events 4 to 8, it is
absolutely necessary to set the DO Assignment.
5-58
Operation

According to the operation type, direct/reverse, main setting, sub setting, hysteresis,
and other settings, the operation of the internal event becomes as follows:
[List of internal event operations]
Note
For details about unit (U), refer to the attached glossary.
Operation type Set value of Direct action Reverse action

operation  shows that the ON/OFF is changed at  shows that the ON/OFF is changed at
type this value. this value.
 shows that the ON/OFF is changed at a  shows that the ON/OFF is changed at a
point that "1 U" is added to this value. point that "1 U" is added to this value.
No event 0 Always OFF Always OFF
PV high limit 1
HYS ON ON HYS
Main setting Main setting

PV PV
PV low limit 2
ON HYS HYS ON
PV PV
PV high/low limit 3
Main setting (*) Sub-setting (*) Main setting (*) Sub-setting (*)
PV PV
Deviation high 4
HYS ON ON HYS
limit
SP + Main setting SP + Main setting
PV PV
Deviation low limit 5
ON HYS HYS ON
PV PV
Deviation high/ 6
low limit
Main setting Sub-setting Main setting Sub-setting
SP PV SP PV
Deviation high 7
HYS ON ON HYS
limit
(Final SP reference) SP + Main setting SP + Main setting
PV PV
Same as the direct action of the deviation Same as the reverse action of the deviation
high limit when the SP ramp is not used. high limit when the SP ramp is not used.
The difference is that the SP ramp does not The difference is that the SP ramp does not
use the current SP, but it uses the final SP. use the current SP, but it uses the final SP.
Deviation low limit 8
ON HYS HYS ON
(Final SP reference)
PV PV
low limit when the SP ramp is not used. The low limit when the SP ramp is not used. The
difference is that the SP ramp does not use difference is that the SP ramp does not use
the current SP, but it uses the final SP. the current SP, but it uses the final SP.
* If the setting is made so that the main setting is greater than the sub setting, the operation is performed with the main
setting swapped for the sub setting automatically.
5-59

operation  shows that the ON/OFF is changed at  shows that the ON/OFF is changed at
type this value. this value.
 shows that the ON/OFF is changed at a  shows that the ON/OFF is changed at a
point that "1 U" is added to this value. point that "1 U" is added to this value.
Deviation high/ 9
low limit ON HYS HYS ON HYS ON HYS
Main setting Sub-setting Main setting Sub-setting
SP PV SP PV
high/low limit when the SP ramp is not used. high/low limit when the SP ramp is not used.
The difference is that the SP ramp does not The difference is that the SP ramp does not
use the current SP, but it uses the final SP. use the current SP, but it uses the final SP.
SP high limit 10
HYS ON ON HYS
SP SP
SP low limit 11
ON HYS HYS ON
SP SP
SP high/low limit 12
Main setting (*1) Sub-setting (*1) Main setting (*1) Sub-setting (*1)
SP SP
MV high limit 13
HYS ON ON HYS
MV MV
MV low limit 14
ON HYS HYS ON
MV MV
MV high/low limit 15
MV MV
Heater 1 burnout/ 16
Over-current(*2)
CT1 at output ON. CT1 at output ON.
OFF before measuring the CT1 current value OFF before measuring the CT1 current value
Heater 1 17
HYS ON ON HYS
short-circuit(*2)
CT1 at output OFF. CT1 at output OFF.
Heater 2 burnout/ 18
Over-current(*2)
CT2 at output ON. CT2 at output ON.
Heater 2 19
HYS ON ON HYS
short-circuit(*2)
CT2 at output OFF. CT2 at output OFF.
5-60
*1 If the setting is made so that the main setting is greater than the sub setting, the operation is performed with the main
*2 When the event type is CT1/2 heater burnout/over-current or CT1/2 heater short-circuit, the status becomes that the
event judgment cannot be made from the time of power ON until that CT input current value is measured for the first
time. In this case, the internal event output is OFF for both of direct action and reverse action in the direct/reverse
setting. To avoid that the output becomes OFF at power ON when used in reverse action, set as follows:
(Setting example)
For direct/reverse setting of CT1/2 heater burnout/over-current or CT1/2 short-circuit event, select the direct action, and
set the reverse operation in DO assignment calculation of the event output terminal (event terminal or control output
terminal).
CT event(direct action)
[Reverse] (DO output)
Normally open(0)
Normally open(0)
Normally open(0)

operation
type
Loop diagnosis 1 20 The event is turned ON when any change in PV corresponding to increase/decrease in
Manipulated variable (MV) is not observed.
This event is used to detect any fault at the operation end.
 Setting items
• Main setting: Manipulated variable (MV)
• Sub-setting: PV
• ON delay time: Diagnosis time
 Operation specifications
The event is turned ON when the value does not reach the PV set in the sub-setting
within the diagnosis time (ON delay time) (conditions 1) even though the MV
exceeding the main setting is held (conditions 2).
 CAUTION
When setting the ON delay, it is necessary to put in "High function configuration".
The default setting of the ON delay before shipment is 0.0 s.
Heat control Cool control
PV PV Area satisfying conditions 1

Sub-setting HYS Sub-setting
Area satisfying
conditions 1
HYS
Time Time
Area satisfying MV Area satisfying

MV conditions 2 conditions 2
Time Time
Conditions 3 Conditions 3
ON delay ON delay
set time set time
ON ON
EV EV
Time Time
ON delay is started when conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied. ON delay is started when conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied.
5-61

operation
type
Manipulated variable (MV) is not observed.
This event is used to detect any fault at the operation end.
 Setting items
• Main setting: Manipulated variable (MV)
• Sub-setting: Change in PV from the point that the MV exceeds the main setting.
The event is turned ON when the MV exceeding the main setting is held (conditions 2)
and the PV does not reach the value that the sub-setting is added to (subtracted from)
the PV at the point that the MV exceeds the main setting within the diagnosis time
(ON delay time) (conditions 1).
 CAUTION
When setting the ON delay, it is necessary to put in "High function configuration".
The default setting of the ON delay before shipment is 0.0 s.
PV PV
HYS PV to be used
Area satisfying Sub-setting as reference Area satisfying Sub-setting
conditions 1 (0 or more) conditions 1 (0 or more)
PV to be used
as reference HYS
Time Time
MV Area satisfying MV Area satisfying

conditions 2 conditions 2
Time Time
Conditions 3 Conditions 3
ON delay ON delay
set time ON set time ON
EV EV
Time Time
5-62

operation
type
Manipulated variable (MV) is not observed. This event is used to detect any fault at the
operation end.
 Setting items
• Main setting: Change in PV from the point that the MV reaches the high limit (100 %)
or low limit (0 %).
• Sub-setting: R ange of absolute value of deviation (PV-SP) allowing the event to hold
OFF state.
• OFF delay time: A period of time from power ON allowing the event to hold OFF state.
The direct action is used for the heat control and is turned ON in the following cases:
• The increase in PV becomes smaller than the main setting after the diagnosis time
(ON delay time) has elapsed after the MV had reached the high limit.
• The decrease in PV becomes smaller than the main setting after the diagnosis time
(ON delay time) has elapsed after the MV had reached the low limit.
The reverse action is used for the cool control and is turned ON in the following cases:
• The decrease in PV becomes smaller than the main setting after the diagnosis time
(ON delay time) has elapsed after the MV had reached the high limit.
• The increase in PV becomes smaller than the main setting after the diagnosis time
(ON delay time) has elapsed after the MV had reached the low limit.
In the following cases, the event is turned OFF with the priority over the above
conditions:
• The absolute value of the deviation (PV-SP) becomes less than the sub-setting.
However, the event is turned OFF when the absolute value of the deviation is less
than the (sub setting – hysteresis) value after the absolute value of the deviation has
become the sub setting or more.
• A period of time after the operation has been started by power ON is less than the
OFF delay time.
 CAUTION
When setting the ON delay and OFF delay, it is necessary to put in "High function
configuration".
The default settings of the ON delay and OFF delay before shipment are 0.0 s.
PV to be used as reference
PV PV Main setting (0 or more )
HYS Area satisfying Main setting Area satisfying HYS
PV to be used conditions 1 (0 or more) conditions 1
as reference Main setting
Area satisfying PV to be used Area satisfying (0 or more)
conditions 1 HYS HYS conditions 1
as reference
Main setting (0 or more)
PV to be used
as reference
Time Time
MV MV
Area satisfying Area satisfying
Area satisfying Area satisfying
Low limit Low limit
Time Time
Conditions 3 Conditions 3 Conditions 3 Conditions 3
ON delay ON delay ON delay ON delay
set time set time set time set time
ON ON ON ON
EV EV
Time Time

5-63

operation
type
Alarm 23 ON if alarm occurs (alarm code AL0 1 to OFF if alarm occurs (alarm code AL0 1 to
(status) AL99 ). OFF in other cases. AL99 ).ON in other cases.
READY 24 ON in the READY mode. OFF in the READY mode.
(status) OFF in the RUN mode. ON in the RUN mode.
MANUAL 25 ON in the MANUAL mode. OFF in the MANUAL mode.
(status) OFF in the AUTO mode. ON in the AUTO mode.
RSP 26 ON in the RSP mode. OFF in the RSP mode.
(status) OFF in the LSP mode. ON in the LSP mode.
During AT 27 ON when AT is executed. OFF when AT is executed.
(Status) OFF when AT is stopped. ON when AT is stopped.
During SP ramp 28 ON during SP ramp. OFF during SP ramp.
OFF when SP ramp is not performed or is ON when SP ramp is not performed or is
completed. completed.
Control action 29 ON during direct action (cooling). OFF during direct action (cooling).
(status) OFF during reverse action (heating). ON during reverse action (heating).
ST setting standby 30 Invalid in this unit. Always OFF. Invalid in this unit. Always ON.
(status)
During estimated 31 ON during estimated position control. OFF during estimated position control.
position control OFF when not estimated. ON when not estimated.
(status)
Timer 32 The direct and reverse action settings are disabled for the timer event.
(status) When using the timer event, it is necessary to set the operation type of the DI assignment
to "Timer Start/Stop". Additionally, when setting the event channel designation of the DI
assignment, multiple timer events are controlled from individual internal contacts (DI).
 Setting items
• ON delay time: A period of time necessary for the event change from OFF to ON after
DI has been changed from OFF to ON.
• OFF delay time: A period of time necessary for the event change from ON to OFF after
DI has been changed from ON to OFF.
• The event is turned ON when DI ON continues for ON delay time or longer.
• The event is turned OFF when DI OFF continues for OFF delay time.
• In other cases, the current status is continued.
DI ON
ON delay OFF delay
ON
Internal event
Time
 CAUTION
When setting the ON delay and OFF delay, it is necessary to put in "High function
configuration".
The default settings of the ON delay and OFF delay before shipment are 0.0 s.
The default setting of the event channel designation of the DI assignment before
shipment is "0". In this case, the timer event start/stop can be set for all internal events
from one internal contact (DI).
Additionally, as one or more event channel designation is set, the timer event start/
stop can be set for one internal event specified by one internal contact (DI).
However, when setting the event channel of the DI assignment, it is necessary to put
in "High function configuration".
High and low 33
limits of MFB value ON HYS HYS ON HYS ON HYS
Main setting(*1) Sub setting(*1) Main setting(*1) Sub setting(*1)

MFB MFB
*1 If the setting is made so that the main setting is greater than the sub setting, the operation is performed with the main
5-64
Operation type

The operation type of the internal event can be set.

Internal Event 1 0: No event 0 Basic,
Configuration 1 1: PV high limit Standard,
(Event Configuration bank) 2: PV low limit High function
Internal Event 2 3: PV high/low limit 0
Configuration 1 4: Deviation high limit
(Event Configuration bank) 5: Deviation low limit
Internal Event 3 6: Deviation high/low limit 0
Configuration 1 7: Deviation high limit
(Event Configuration bank) (Final SP reference)
8: Deviation low limit
Internal Event 4 (Final SP reference) 0
Configuration 1 9: Deviation high/low limit
(Event Configuration bank) (Final SP reference)
Internal Event 5 10: SP high limit 0
Configuration 1 11: SP low limit
(Event Configuration bank) 12: SP high/low limit
Internal Event 6 13: MV high limit 0
Configuration 1 14: MV low limit
(Event Configuration bank) 15: MV high/low limit
Internal Event 7 16: CT1 heater burnout/over-current 0
Configuration 1 17: CT1 heater short-circuit
(Event Configuration bank) 18: CT2 heater burnout/over-current
Internal Event 8 19: CT2 heater short-circuit 0
Configuration 1 20: Loop diagnosis 1
(Event Configuration bank) 21: Loop diagnosis 2
22: Loop diagnosis 3
23: Alarm (status)
24: READY (status)
25: MANUAL (status)
26: RSP (status)
27: During AT execution (status)
28: During SP ramp (status)
29: Control direct action (status)
30: ST setting standby (status)
(Invalid in this unit.)
31: During estimated position control
(status)
32: Timer (status)
33: High and Low limits of MFB value
(Invalid in this unit)
• If ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank (I d02) is prior to
2.04, “33” cannot be set as [Internal Event configuration 1 operation type].
5-65
Direct/reverse, standby, and EVENT state at READY

Direct/reverse, standby, and EVENT state at READY accompanying with the
operation type can be set.

Internal Event 1 The digits are called 1st digit, 2nd digit, 3rd 0000 Basic,
Configuration 2 digit, and 4th digit from the right end. Standard,
(Event Configuration bank) 1st digit: Direct/reverse High function
Internal Event 2 0: Direct 0000
Configuration 2 1: Reverse
(Event Configuration bank) 2nd digit: Standby
Internal Event 3 0: None 0000
Configuration 2 1: Standby
(Event Configuration bank) 2: Standby + Standby at SP change
3rd digit: EVENT state at READY
Internal Event 4 0: Continued. 0000
Configuration 2 1: Forced OFF
(Event Configuration bank) 4th digit: Undefined.
Internal Event 5 0: Undefined. 0000
Configuration 2
(Event Configuration bank)
Internal Event 6 0000
Configuration 2
Configuration 2
Configuration 2
• When the internal event configuration 1 operation type is set at [0: No event],
the internal event configuration 2 (direct/reverse, standby, and EVENT state at
READY) is not displayed.
• For details about internal event operation with the direct/reverse setting,
[List of internal event operations] (p. 5-59).
• “Standby” is a function that does not turn ON the event even though the
event currently used satisfies the ON conditions (before polarity) when
the instrument power is turned ON or when the READY mode is changed
to the RUN mode. The event is turned ON when the ON conditions are
satisfied again once the OFF conditions have been satisfied.
• “Standby + Standby at SP change” means that the standby is set again
when the SP is changed (SP value and LSP group number) in addition to
the standby functions. However, when the same SP value is written or
when the SP value is not changed even though the LSP group number is
changed, the unit does not enter the standby mode.
READY READY → RUN change

EVENT state at 0:Continued 1: Forced OFF 0: Continued 1: Forced OFF
READY setup
Standby setup
0: None Usual operation OFF Usual operation Usual operation
1: Standby OFF OFF OFF(standby state) OFF(standby state)
2: Standby+ OFF OFF OFF(standby state) OFF(standby state)
Standby at SP change
5-66
Alarm OR, special OFF setup, and delay time unit

Alarm OR, special OFF setup, and delay time unit accompanying with the
operation type can be set.

Internal Event 1 The digits are called 1st digit, 2nd digit, 3rd 0000 High function
Configuration 3 digit, and 4th digit from the right end.
(Event Configuration bank) 1st digit: Alarm OR
Internal Event 2 0: None 0000
Configuration 3 1: Alarm direct + OR operation
(Event Configuration bank) 2: Alarm direct + AND operation
Internal Event 3 3: Alarm reverse + OR operation 0000
Configuration 3 4: Alarm reverse + AND operation
(Event Configuration bank) 2nd digit: Special OFF
0: As usual.
Internal Event 4 1: When EV main setting is “0”, the 0000
Configuration 3 event is set to “OFF”.
(Event Configuration bank) 3rd digit: Delay time unit
Internal Event 5 0: 0.1 s 0000
Configuration 3 1: 1 s
(Event Configuration bank) 2: 1 min.
Internal Event 6 4th digit: Undefined. 0000
Configuration 3 0: Undefined.
Configuration 3
Configuration 3
• When the internal event configuration 1 operation type is set at [0: No event], the internal
event configuration 3 (alarm OR, special OFF setup, and delay time unit) is not displayed.
The following shows the relationship among alarm OR setting, alarm occurred/not
occurred, and internal event ON/OFF:
Alarm OR setting Alarm (AL0 1 to Internal event ON/ Internal event ON/
AL99 ) occurred/not OFF status before OFF status after
occurred alarm OR process alarm OR process
None Not occurred OFF OFF
Not occurred ON ON
Occurred. OFF OFF
Occurred. ON ON
Alarm direct + Not occurred OFF OFF
OR operation Not occurred ON ON
Occurred. OFF ON
Occurred. ON ON
Alarm direct + Not occurred OFF OFF
AND operation Not occurred ON OFF
Occurred. OFF OFF
Occurred. ON ON
Alarm reverse + Not occurred OFF ON
OR operation Not occurred ON ON
Occurred. OFF OFF
Occurred. ON ON
Alarm reverse + Not occurred OFF OFF
AND operation Not occurred ON ON
Occurred. OFF OFF
Occurred. ON OFF
5-67
Main setting, sub setting, and hysteresis

Main setting, sub setting, and hysteresis accompanying with the operation type can
be set.

Internal Event 1 Main setting -1999 to +9999 0 Basic,
(Event bank) The decimal point position may vary so that Standard,
it meets the operation type. The above value High function
becomes 0 to 9999 in some operation types.
Internal Event 1 Sub-setting -1999 to +9999 0
(Event bank) The decimal point position may vary so that
it meets the operation type. The above value
becomes 0 to 9999 in some operation types.
Internal Event 1 Hysteresis 0 to 9999 5
(Event bank) The decimal point position may vary so
that it meets the operation type.
Internal Event 2 Main setting Same as Internal Event 1 Main setting. 0
(Event bank)
Internal Event 2 Sub-setting Same as Internal Event 1 Sub setting. 0
(Event bank)
Internal Event 2 Hysteresis Same as Internal Event 1 Hysteresis. 5
(Event bank)
(Event bank)
(Event bank)
(Event bank)
(Event bank)
(Event bank)
(Event bank)
(Event bank)
(Event bank)
(Event bank)
(Event bank)
(Event bank)
(Event bank)
(Event bank)
(Event bank)
(Event bank)
5-68
Internal Event 8 Main setting Same as Internal Event 1 Main setting. 0 Basic,
(Event bank) Standard,
High function
(Event bank)
(Event bank)
• When the internal event configuration 1 operation type is set at [0: No event], the
internal event main setting, sub-setting, and hysteresis are not displayed.
• For details about internal event operation with main setting, sub-setting, and
hysteresis,
ON delay and OFF delay

ON delay is a function that delays the timing, at which the internal event status is
changed from OFF to ON.
OFF delay is a function that delays the timing, at which the internal event status is
changed from ON to OFF.
However, when the operation type is set at [20: Loop diagnosis 1], [21: Loop
diagnosis 2], [22: Loop diagnosis 3], or [32: Timer], the ON delay and OFF delay
are operated as another function.
For details,
ON delay and OFF delay can be set.

Internal Event 1 ON delay 0.0 to 999.9 s (Delay time unit is “0.1 s”.) 0.0 s High function
time 0 to 9999 s (Delay time unit is “1 s”.) or 0 s
(Event bank) 0 to 9999 min (Delay time unit is “1 min”.) or 0 min
Internal Event 1 OFF delay Same as internal event 1 ON delay. 0.0 s or 0 s or 0 min
time
(Event bank)
Internal Event 2 ON delay Same as internal event 1 ON delay. 0.0 s or 0 s or 0 min
time
(Event bank)
time
(Event bank)
time
(Event bank)
time
(Event bank)
5-69

Internal Event 4 ON delay Same as internal event 1 ON delay. 0.0 s or 0 s or 0 min High function
time
(Event bank)
time
(Event bank)
time
(Event bank)
time
(Event bank)
time
(Event bank)
time
(Event bank)
time
(Event bank)
time
(Event bank)
time
(Event bank)
time
(Event bank)
• When the internal event configuration 1 operation type is set at [0: No event], the
internal event ON delay and OFF delay are not displayed.
5-70
5 - 9 Digital Output (DO)

The following shows the functional block diagram of the digital output (DO):
MV1 process: ON/OFF control output,

time proportional output, and
time proportional output (heat)
of Heat/Cool control.
MV2 process: Time proportional
output (cool) of Heat/Cool control
(Setting: Parameters
CyU, Cy, CyU2, Cy2, tp.ty)
MV1 and MV2

control output status
Default output is used. Control output is used. Output assignment is used.
Default output Control output Output assignment

(Setting: DO Assignment Ot 1. 1, (Setting: DO Assignment Ot 1. 1, (Setting: DO Assignment Ot 1. 1,
Ot2. 1, EV 1. 1 to EV3. 1 must be Ot2. 1, EV 1. 1 to EV3. 1 must be Ot2. 1, EV 1. 1 to EV3. 1 must be set
set at [Default output].) set at [MV1] or [MV2].) at [Output assignment result].)
MV1 and MV2 MV1 and MV2 MV1 and MV2

control output status control output status control output status
Internal Event status Internal Event status
Output process from each DO Output process from each DO Output assignment and polarity
(terminal) (terminal) (Setting: DO Assignment, Output
Control output: MV1 (Setting: DO Assignment Ot 1. 1, assignment A to D Ot 1.2 to Ot2.6,
Control output: MV2 Ot2. 1, EV 1. 1, EV2. 1, EV3. 1) Ev 1.2 to Ev3.6)
Event output 1: Internal Event 1
Output bit function, Function 1 to 4
(Setting: DO Assignment Operation
type Ot 1. 1 to Ot2. 1, Ev 1. 1 to Ev3. 1)
Polarity of output bit function

(Setting: DO Assignment Polarity
Ot 1.7 to Ot2.7, Ev 1.7 to Ev3.7)
Output latch
(Setting: DO Assignment Latch
Ot 1.8 to Ot2.8, Ev 1.8 to Ev3.8)
Control outputs 1 to 2
Event outputs 1 to 3
5-71
MV1/MV2 process

The time proportional cycle and time proportional cycle mode of MV1/MV2 can
be set.

Time proportional cycle 0: 1 s unit 0 High function
unit 1 1: Cycle fixed at 0.5 s.
(Parameter bank) 2: Cycle fixed at 0.25 s.
3: Cycle fixed at 0.1 s
If the set value is other than “0”, the time
proportional cycle 1 (Cy ) cannot be set.
Time proportional cycle 1 5 to 120 s (Output destination of MV1 10 or 2 s Basic,
(Parameter bank) includes the relay output.) Standard,
1 to 120 s (Output destination of MV1 does High function
not include the relay output.)
If the time proportional unit 1 (CyU ) ≠
0, this setting becomes invalid and the
setting becomes impossible.
Time proportional cycle 0: 1 s unit 0 High function
unit 2 1: Cycle fixed at 0.5 s.
(Parameter bank) 2: Cycle fixed at 0.25 s.
3: Cycle fixed at 0.1 s
proportional cycle 2 (Cy2 ) cannot be set.
Time proportional cycle 2 5 to 120 s (Output destination of MV2 10 or 2 s Basic,
(Parameter bank) includes the relay output.) Standard,
1 to 120 s (Output destination of MV2 does High function
not include the relay output.)
If the time proportional unit 2 (CyU2 ) ≠
0, this setting becomes invalid and the
setting becomes impossible.
Time proportional cycle 0: Controllability aiming type 0 or 1 High function
mode 1: Operation service life aiming type (ON/
(Parameter bank) OFF operation is performed only once
within the time proportional cycle.
• MV1 is the general term for the ON/OFF control output, time proportional
output, and time proportional output for heat side of the Heat/Cool control.
MV2 is the time proportional output for cool side of the Heat/Cool control.
• When MV1 is connected only to the voltage pulse output in the DO Assignment,
the display and setting of the time proportional cycle unit 1 (CyU) can be
performed.
• When MV1 is connected to any of the relay control output, voltage pulse
control output, and event output in the DO Assignment, the display and setting
of the time proportional cycle 1 (Cy) can be made. However, when the time
proportional cycle unit 1 (CyU) is other than “0”, the display and setting of the
time proportional cycle 1 (Cy) cannot be performed.
• When the Heat/Cool control is used and MV2 is connected only to the voltage
pulse output in the DO Assignment, the display and setting of the time
proportional cycle unit 2 (CyU2) can be performed.
• When the Heat/Cool control is used and MV2 is connected to any of the
relay control output, voltage pulse control output, and event output in the DO
Assignment, the display and setting of the time proportional cycle 2 (Cy2) can
be made. However, when the time proportional cycle unit 2 (CyU2) is other
than “0”, the display and setting of the time proportional cycle 2 (Cy2) cannot be
performed.
5-72
• The initial value of the time proportional cycle 1 (Cy) is “10” when the control
output 1 is the relay output and it is “2” in other cases.
• The initial value of the time proportional cycle 2 (Cy2) is “10” when a model
with one control output point is used and it is “2” when other models are used.
• The setting of the time proportional cycle mode (tP.ty) is valid to the time
proportional outputs of both MV1 and MV2.
• When MV1 is connected to the relay control output or event output in the DO
Assignment and the time proportional cycle 1 (Cy) is set at less than “5 s”, the
operation is performed at intervals of 5 s.
• When MV2 is connected to the relay control output or event output in the DO
Assignment and the time proportional cycle 2 (Cy2) is set at less than “5 s”, the
operation is performed at intervals of 5 s.
• The following shows the resolution of the time proportional output by
the setting of the time proportional cycle unit 1 and 2 (CyU/CyU2):
When this setting is set at “0” (1 s unit), the resolution becomes
“1/1000” (seconds of the time proportional cycle × 1/1000).
When this setting is set at “1” (Cycle fixed at “0.5 s”), the resolution
becomes “1/500 (1 ms)”.
becomes “1/250 (1 ms)”.
becomes “1/100 (1 ms)”.
• The time proportional cycle is operated for a period of time
approximately 2.4 % longer than the setting. Care should be taken when
using the timer function with the time proportional output. Use the ON
delay/ OFF delay and DI timer stop/start functions with the timer function
of the internal event, if the ON/OFF output having more precise time is
needed.
5-73
Operation type

The outputs of the control outputs 1 to 2 and event outputs 1 to 3 can be set using
the operation type of the DO Assignment.

Control output 1 0: Default output 0 High function
Operation type (DO bank) 1: MV1
Control output 2 2: MV2 0
Operation type (DO bank) 3: Function 1 ((A and B) or (C and D))
Event output 1 Operation 4: Function 2 ((A or B) and (C or D)) 0
type (DO bank) 5: Function 3 (A or B or C or D)
6: Function 4 (A and B and C and D)
Event output 2 Operation 0
type (DO bank)
Event output 3 Operation 0
type (DO bank)
• When the control output is the relay output or voltage pulse output, the display
and setting can be made.
• When the event output is provided, the display and setting can be made.
• MV1 is the ON/OFF control output, time proportional output, and time
proportional output (heat) of the Heat/Cool control.
MV2 is the time proportional output (cool) of the Heat/Cool control.
• When the set value is “0” (default output), the operation becomes as follows
according to the output:
Control output 1: Control output status of MV1 is output.
Control output 2: Control output status of MV2 is output.
Event output 1: Result of Internal Event 1 is output.
• In the output bit function, the logical operations (AND, OR) of each control
output and each event output are combined. In output bit functions 1 to 4, the
combination of the logical operations may vary. The following shows one logical
operation:
Logical AND Logical OR
OFF and OFF = OFF OFF or OFF = OFF
OFF and ON = OFF OFF or ON = ON
ON and OFF = OFF ON or OFF = ON
ON and ON = ON ON or ON = ON
5-74
Output assignment

The assignments of four inputs (A, B, C, D) used for the output bit function can be
set.

Control output 1 Output 0: Normally opened. (OFF, 0) 14 High function
(DO Assignment bank) 2: Internal Event 1
Control output 1 Output 3: Internal Event 2 0
assignment B 4: Internal Event 3
Control output 1 Output 6: Internal Event 5 0
9: Internal Event 8
Control output 1 Output 10 to 13: Undefined. 0
assignment D 14: MV1
(DO Assignment bank) 15: MV2
Control output 2 Output 16 to 17: Undefined. 15
assignment A 18: DI1
(DO Assignment bank) 19: DI2
Control output 2 Output 20: DI3 0
assignment B 21: DI4
(DO Assignment bank) 22 to 25: Undefined.
Control output 2 Output 26: Internal Contact 1 0
assignment C 27: Internal Contact 2
(DO Assignment bank) 28: Internal Contact 3
Control output 2 Output 29: Internal Contact 4 0
assignment D 30: Internal Contact 5
(DO Assignment bank) 31 to 33: Undefined.
Event output 1 Output 35: Communication DI2 2
assignment A 36: Communication DI3
(DO Assignment bank) 37: Communication DI4
Event output 1 Output 38: MANUAL mode 0
assignment B 39: READY mode
(DO Assignment bank) 40: RSP mode
Event output 1 Output 41: AT running 0
assignment C 42: During SP ramp
(DO Assignment bank) 43: Undefined.
Event output 1 Output 44: Alarm occurred.(AL0 1 to AL99 ) 0
assignment D 45: PV alarm occurred.(AL0 1 to AL03 )
(DO Assignment bank) 46: Undefined.
Event output 2 Output 3
assignment A
(DO Assignment bank)
assignment B
assignment C
5-75

Event output 2 Output Same as those on the previous page. 0 Same as
assignment D that on the
(DO Assignment bank) previous
Event output 3 Output 4 page.
assignment A
assignment B
assignment C
assignment D
• When the object control output is the relay output or voltage pulse output, and
the operation type of the DO Assignment is set for output bit functions 1 to 4, the
• When the object event output is provided and the operation type of the DO
Assignment is set for output bit functions 1 to 4, the display and setting can be
made.
5-76
Polarity of output assignment

The polarity of four output assignments (A, B, C, D) used for the output bit
function can be set.

Control output 1 Polarity A The digits are called 1st digit, 2nd digit, 3rd 0000 High function
to D (DO Assignment bank) digit, and 4th digit from the right end.
Control output 2 Polarity A 1st digit: Output assignment A Polarity setting 0000
to D (DO Assignment bank) 2nd digit: Output assignment B Polarity setting
Event output 1 Polarity A 3rd digit: O utput assignment C Polarity setting 0000
to D (DO Assignment bank) 4th digit: Output assignment D Polarity setting
Event output 2 Polarity A 0: Direct 0000
to D (DO Assignment bank) 1: Reverse
Event output 3 Polarity A 0000
to D (DO Assignment bank)
made.
The output relay may be turned ON and OFF repeatedly at a high-speed
depending on the conditions.
To avoid such faulty operation, always strictly observe the following
cautions:
Control output 1: When any of [Output assignment A, B, C, D] (Ot 1.2 to
Ot 1.5) is set at [49: Control output 1 status], do not set [1: Reverse] for
the same symbol of [Output assignment A, B, C, D Polarity].
Event output 1: When any of [Output assignment A, B, C, D] (Ev 1.2 to
Ev 1.5) is set at [48: Event output 1 status], do not set [1: Reverse] for
the same symbol of [Output assignment A, B, C, D Polarity].
5-77
Polarity of output bit function

The polarity after the output bit function (functions 1 to 4) can be set.

Control output 1 Polarity 0: Direct 0 High function
(DO Assignment bank) 1: Reverse
Control output 2 Polarity 0
Event output 1 Polarity 0
made.
Latch

The latch of the output ON status or output OFF status can be set.

Control output 1 Latch 0: None 0 High function
(DO Assignment bank) 1: Latched (Latched when turned ON.)
Control output 2 Latch 2: Latched (Latched when turned OFF 0
(DO Assignment bank) except for initialization at power ON.)
Event output 1 Latch 0
made.
• To release the latch status, it is necessary to turn OFF the power, and turn it ON
again, to release all DO latches (key operation or communication), or to change
the latch setting of the DO Assignment to “0” (none).
5-78
DO Assignment setting with SLP-C35 Smart Loader Package

When setting [DO Assignment] with the SLP-C35 Smart Loader Package, select
[Edit (E)] → [Input/Output port setup (O)] in that order from the menu. The
output bit function, output assignment, polarity of output assignment, and polarity
of output bit function can be easily set using visual images as shown below.
Select the output bit function. The image of Select four output Select whether or not the polarity of
the ladder is changed according to the selected assignments A to D. the bit function is made.
output bit function.
Select whether or not the polarity is set for Select the latch of the output status.
assignments A to D.
In addition to the selection through the menu, the Input port setup window
can also be opened using the following procedures:
• Click the input/output port setup icon .
• Right-click in the input bit function setting window.
• Push the [P] key while pressing the [Ctrl] key.
5-79
5 - 10 Application Examples

This section describes examples of applications using the assignment functions of this unit.
Examples of applications using assignment functions

The following shows setting examples with the SLP-C35 Smart Loader Package.
To use assignment functions, it is absolutely necessary to set the user level to “High
function configuration”.
Example 1 Logical OR of the heater burnout and PV high limit alarm is output.
zz
Conditions: P
V high limit is set to Internal Event 1.
Heater burnout is set to Internal Event 2.
Logical OR of the above events is output to the EV1 relay.
(1) Select [Standard] → [Event] and set [Internal Event 1] to [1: PV high limit].
(2) Similarly, set [Internal Event 2] to [16: Heater 1 break/Heater over current].
(3) Select [Option] → [DO Assignment] and right-click on the operation type of
[Event output 1] to select [Input/Output port setup].
5-80
(4) In the Input/Output port setup window, set the following items:
(a) In this example, since the logical OR of two functions needs to be output,
select [Function 1].
(b) Select [PV high limit] of Internal Event 1 for output assignment A.
(c) Similarly, select [Heater break] of Internal Event 2 for output assignment C.
(d) Select [Normally closed] for output assignment B and D.

(a)
(d)
(b)
(c)
5-81
Example 2 The operation is started by the external switch, and then it is stopped automatically
zz
30 min after the temperature has reached the set value.
Temperature
Set value
30 min
Time
Control ON Control OFF
 Explanation
The timer start-up conditions are set to logical AND of DI1 and PV status EVs.
The ON delay timer setting decides the time period after which the operation is
stopped automatically when the temperature has reached the set value.
The mode (RUN/READY) is changed based on a combination of DI1 and timer
ON-OFF.
Timer counting after Operation stop by

Status Control OFF status
starting of operation time-up
DI1 OFF ON ON
Timer (Internal EV2) OFF OFF ON
Status of Internal ON OFF ON
Contact 2
Mode READY RUN READY
 Setting example
• Event
Event Display Internal Event 1 Internal Event 2

Operation type E _ .C1 32: Timer 4: Deviation high limit
Direct/reverse E _ .C2 ---- 0: Direct
Standby E _ .C2 ---- 0: No standby
EVENT state at E _ .C2 0: E VENT state at READY is 0: EVENT state at READY is
READY continued. continued.
Alarm OR E _ .C3 0: None 0: None
Special OFF setup E _ .C3 ---- 0: As usual.
Delay time unit E _ .C3 2.1 min 0: 0.1 s
Event main setting E_ ---- 0
(low limit)
Event sub-setting E _ .SB ---- ----
(high limit)
Hysteresis E _ .HY ---- 5
ON delay E _ .ON 30 0
OFF delay E _ .OF 0 0
Note. The internal event No. is indicated at the mark of "_" shown in the display
column.
5-82
• DI Assignment
DI Assignment Display Internal Contact 1 Internal Contact 2

Operation type DI _ .1 17: Timer stop/start 7: RUN/READY
Input bit function DI _ .2 1: F unction 1 (A and B) or 1: Function 1 (A and B) or
(C and D) (C and D)
Input assignment A DI _ .3 2: DI1 2: DI1
Input assignment B DI _ .4 11: I nternal Event 2 10: I nternal Event 1
(Setting = 4: Deviation (Setting = 32: Timer
high limit) (Status))
Input assignment C DI _ .5 0: N
ormally opened. 0: Normally opened.
(Normally Off = 0) (Normally Off = 0)
Input assignment D DI _ .6 0: N
ormally opened. 0: N
ormally opened.
(Normally Off = 0) (Normally Off = 0)
Polarity A DI _ .7 0: Direct 0: Direct
Polarity B DI _ .7 0: Direct 1: Reverse
Polarity C DI _ .7 0: Direct 0: Direct
Polarity D DI _ .7 0: Direct 0: Direct
Polarity DI _ .8 0: Direct 1: Reverse
Event channel DI _ .9 1 ----
definitions
Note. The internal DI No. is indicated at the mark of "_" shown in the display
column.
 Setting points
The timer startup conditions are set to logical AND of DI1 and temperature
attainment (Internal Event 2: Deviation high limit).
The mode (RUN/READY) selection is used as conditions for logical AND of the
A contact of DI1 and the B contact of the timer. However, since the mode is the
READY mode when the contact is ON, it is reversed in the final stage of internal
contact 2.
DI Assignment (Internal Contact 1): Input/Output port setup
Logical AND of DI1 and deviation high limit event Timer start-up contact
5-83
Logical AND of DI1 (A-contact) Reversed at this point since the Mode (RUN/READY)
and timer (B-contact) mode is the READY mode when selection contact
turned ON.
Example 3 Simple pattern

zz
SP
T2
T1
[mode] key
 Explanation
When the [mode] key is pressed, the mode is changed to the RUN mode and the
PV is started.
The SP value moves up (or down) along with the ramp-up (or ramp-down) set
value.
When the SP value reaches the final SP value and the PV value enters the constant
range, the counting is started. After the T2 time has elapsed, the mode is changed
to the READY mode.
5-84
 Setting example
• Event
Event Display Internal Event 1 Internal Event 2

Operation type E _ .C1 9: Deviation high/low 32: Timer (Status)
limit (Final SP reference)
Direct/reverse E _ .C2 1: Reversed. ----
Standby E _ .C2 0: No standby ----
EVENT state at READY E _ .C2 1: E VENT state at READY is 0: E VENT state at READY is
forcibly turned OFF. continued.
Alarm OR E _ .C3 0: None 0: None
Special OFF setup E _ .C3 0: As usual. ----
Delay time unit E _ .C3 0: 0.1 s 0: 0.1 s
Event main setting E_ 3 ----
(low limit)
Event sub setting E _ .SB 3 ----
(high limit)
Hysteresis E _ .HY 9999 ----
ON delay E _ .ON 2 15
OFF delay E _ .OF 0 0
Note. The internal event No. is indicated at the mark of "_" shown in the display
column.
• DI Assignment
DI Assignment Display Internal Contact 1 Internal Contact 2

Operation type DI _ .1 7: RUN/READY 17: Timer stop/start
Input bit function DI _ .2 1: F unction 1 (A and B) or 1: Function 1 (A and B) or
(C and D) (C and D)
Input assignment A DI _ .3 18: COM DI 1 10: I nternal Event 1
(Setting = 9: Deviation
high/low limit (Final
SP reference)
Input assignment B DI _ .4 11: Internal 26: During SP ramp
Event 2 (Setting = 32:
Timer (Status))
Input assignment C DI _ .5 0: N
ormally opened. 18: COM DI 1
(Normally Off = 0)
Input assignment D DI _ .6 0: N
ormally opened. 11: I nternal Event 2
(Normally Off = 0) (Setting = 32:
Timer (Status))
Polarity A DI _ .7 0: Direct 0: Direct
Polarity B DI _ .7 1: Reverse 1: Reverse
Polarity C DI _ .7 0: Direct 0: Direct
Polarity D DI _ .7 0: Direct 0: Direct
Polarity DI _ .8 1: Reverse 0: Direct
Event channel DI _ .9 ---- 2
definitions
Note. The internal DI No. is indicated at the mark of "_" shown in the display
column.
5-85
 Others
C72 [mode key function]: 7 (COM DI1 selection)
SP ramp-up/ramp-down: Desired value
 Setting points
The internal EV1 is substituted for the guarantee soak.
Therefore, “9999” is set to the hysteresis of Event 1 so that Event 1 is not turned
OFF after it has been turned ON even though the PV fluctuates.
Logical AND of COM DI1 (A-contact) Reversed at this point since the Mode (RUN/READY) selection
and timer (B-contact) mode is the READY mode when contact
turned ON.

Conditions for guarantee soak (ramp is completed and operation enters
within the deviation of the final SP.)
The timer start is self-retained at time-up so that Timer start-up contact

the timer is not restarted due to change in PV.
5-86
5 - 11 Continuous Output

The following shows the functional block diagram of the continuous output:
Output range type

(Setting: Setup C42, C47, C52)
Output type
(Setting: Setup C43, C48, C53)
Output scaling high limit/low limit

(Setting: C44, C45, C49, C50,
C54, C55)
Continuous output (current output/

continuous voltage output)
Output range

The output range of the current output and continuous voltage output can be set.

Control output 1 range Current output 1 Basic,
(Setup bank) 1: 4 to 20 mA Standard,
Control output 2 range 2: 0 to 20 mA 1 High function
(Setup bank)
Auxiliary output range Continuous voltage output 1
(Setup bank) 1: 1 to 5 V
2: 0 to 5 V
3: 0 to 10 V
• When the object control output is the current output or continuous voltage
output, the display and setting can be configured.
Output type

The output type of the current output and continuous voltage output can be set.

Control output 1 type 0: Manipulated variable (MV) 0 Basic,
(Setup bank) 1: Heat MV (for heat/cool control) Standard,
Control output 2 type 2: Cool MV (for heat/cool control) 3 High function
3: PV
(Setup bank)
4: PV before ratio, bias, and filter
Auxiliary output type 5: SP 3
(Setup bank) 6: Deviation (PV-SP)
7: CT1 current value
8: CT2 current value
9: MFB (including estimated MFB)
10: SP+MV
11: PV+MV
• MV scalable bandwidth is used to calculate SP+PV and PV+MV. For details, refer
to MV scaling range (on page 5-89).
• If ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank is prior to 2.04, SP+MV
and PV+MV cannot be selected.
5-87
Output scaling low limit/high limit

The output scaling low limit and high limit of the current output and continuous
voltage output can be set.

Control output 1 scaling -1999 to +9999 0.0 Basic,
low limit (Setup bank) The decimal point position may vary so Standard,
Control output 1 scaling that it meets the output type. 100.0 High function
high limit (Setup bank) The unit depend on the output type are as
Control output 2 scaling follows: 0
low limit (Setup bank) • When the output type is 0 to 2, % of
manipulated variable
Control output 2 scaling • When the output type is 3 to 6, same as 1000
high limit (Setup bank) PV(˚C etc.)
Auxiliary output scaling • When the output type is 7 and 8, 0
low limit (Setup bank) ampere(current value)
Auxiliary output scaling • When the output type is 9, % of MFB 1000
high limit (Setup bank)
• The following figures show the relationship between the numeric value and
output of the output type using the output scaling low limit/high limit settings:
Output (%) Output (%)

110 110
100 100
0 0
-10 Input (%) -10 Input (%)
Low limit High limit High limit Low limit
Low limit < High limit Low limit > High limit
However, the output is 0 to 110 % in a range of 0 to 20 mA.
5-88
MV scalable bandwidth

When the control output type is set to either SP+MV or PV+MV, the control output
is a continuous output in which the amount of change in the MV is added to the SP
or PV.

Control output 1 MV 0 to 9999 200 Simple,
scalable bandwidth The decimal point position and unit are Standard,
(Setup bank) same as those of the PV input range type. High function
Control output 2 MV 200
scalable bandwidth
(Setup bank)
Auxiliary output MV 200
scalable bandwidth
(Setup bank)
• When the output type of control output 1, control output 2 or the auxiliary output
is SP+MV or PV+MV, this item is displayed and can be set.
• The value calculated by the following formula is output according to the output
scaling low/high limit settings:
In case of SP+MV,(MV-50.0)/100.0 × MV scalable bandwidth + SP
In case of PV+MV,(MV-50.0)/100.0 × MV scalable bandwidth + PV
SP
output(%)
110
100
A change of output
depend on MV
MV
scalable bandwidth
0
-10 Input
Scaling low limit 0% 50 % 100 % Scaling high limit
A change of MV
An example of the output type is SP+MV
• This function is used for cascade control when the continuous output of
this controller is connected to the RSP (remote SP) of another controller,
with this controller as master and the other controller as slave. Set the
RSP range to MV scaling range, which changes in proportion to a change
in the MV (0–100 %) of this controller.
version 2.04, neither SP+MV nor PV+MV can be selected as an output
type. The MV scaling range is not displayed and cannot be set.
5-89
5 - 12 Current Transformer (CT) Input

For CT input, two kinds of current values are provided.
• Current value at output ON: This current value is used for the heater burnout/over-current event. This current
value is displayed as CT current value.
• Current value at output OFF: This current value is used for the heater short-circuit event. This current value
cannot be displayed.
When [CT type] is set at “heater burnout detection” (C36 = 0 or C39 = 0), the following operation is performed:
The current value at output ON becomes the CT current value measured when the output specified in [CT output] is
turned ON.
The current value at output OFF becomes the CT current value measured when the output specified in [CT output]
is turned OFF.
When [CT type] is set at “current value measurement” (C36 = 1 or C39 = 1), the following operation is performed:
The current value at output ON becomes the measured CT current value regardless of the output ON/OFF status.
The current value at output OFF is fixed at “0.0A”.
The following shows the functional block diagram of the current transformer (CT) input:
CT type
Operation: Heater burnout detection Operation: Current value measurement
Monitoring of output status

(ON/OFF)
Wait before measurement

(Setting: Setup C38, C4 1)
Output is ON. Output is OFF. Current value at output ON.

Current value at
output OFF = 0A
Current value at output ON Current value at output OFF
• The current value at output ON is used when the operation type of the Internal
Event is set at [heater burnout/over-current].
The current value at output OFF is used when the operation type of the
Internal Event is set at [heater short-circuit].
• If a change in current value is 2.5 A or less, the CT input suppresses this change
through the filter process.
This prevents the heater burnout event from malfunctioning due to
fluctuation of the current value by variations in heater power voltage.
If the heater current is 2.5 A or less, the filter process is activated when this unit
is powered ON or the heater is powered ON. Therefore, it takes 3 to 5 s that
the heater current becomes equivalent to the actual current value.
When setting the heater burnout event is set at such low current level, an ON
delay of 3 to 5 s is set so that the event is not turned ON accidentally.
5-90
CT type

A desired operation type can be set for each of CT input 1 or CT input 2.

CT1 operation type 0: Heater burnout detection 0 Basic,
(Setup bank) 1: Current value measurement Standard,
CT2 operation type 0 High function
(Setup bank)
• When the optional model has two CT input points, the display and setting can be
made.
• When the CT type is set at “current value measurement”, the current value at
output ON is updated regardless of the output ON/OFF status and the current
value at output OFF is fixed at “0.0 A”.
CT output

When the CT type is set at “heater burnout detection”, the output of the output ON/
OFF monitor object can be set.

CT1 output 0: Control output 1 0 Basic,
(Setup bank) 1: Control output 2 Standard,
CT2 output 2: Event output 1 0 High function
(Setup bank) 3: Event output 2
4: Event output 3
• When the optional model has two CT input points and the CT type is set at
“heater burnout detection”, the display and setting can be made.
CT measurement wait time

When the CT type is set at “heater burnout detection”, a period of time between
changing of the output ON/OFF and starting of the current value measurement can
be set.

CT1 measurement wait time 30 to 300 ms 30 ms Basic,
CT2 measurement wait time 30 ms High function
(Setup bank)
• When the optional model has two CT input points and the CT type is set at
“heater burnout detection”, the display and setting can be made.
• When the measurement wait time has elapsed after the ON/OFF status of the
output to be monitored has been changed, the measurement of the current value
is started. When 100 ms have elapsed after that, the measurement of the current
value is completed.
5-91
Number of CT turns and number of CT power wire loops

Each CT of CT inputs 1 and 2 can be set.

Number of CT1 turns 0: 800 turns 8 High function
(Setup bank) 1 to 40: CT turns devided by 100
Number of CT1 power wire 0: 1 times 1
loops (Setup bank) 1 to 6: Number of times
Number of CT2 turns 0: 800 turns 8
(Setup bank) 1 to 40: CT turns devided by 100
Number of CT2 power wire 0: 1 time 1
loops (Setup bank) 1 to 6: Number of times
• If the controller has two CT inputs, this item is displayed and can be set.
• For the number of turns, use the number of CT turns divided by 100. For
example, if the number of CT turns is 400, set at 4. (However, a setting of 0 has
the same meaning as 8, namely 800 CT turns.) If using the optional QN206A or
QN212A, which have 800 turns, set at 8.
• For the number of power wire loops, use the number of times the power wire
passes through the CT hole. For example, if the power wire passes through the
CT hole 2 times, set at 2. (However, a setting of 0 has the same meaning as 1,
namely that there is 1 power wire loop).
Relay and power supply etc.
Power wire
Heater etc.
CT
CT input
This device
5-92
• Do not allow the current to exceed the upper limit of the CT input display
range. Doing so might cause a malfunction.
• If a current exceeding the upper limit of the CT input display range is detected,
the CT input failure alarm (AL 1 1) is displayed. However, if the excessive
current is very large, the CT input failure alarm is not displayed.
• The CT input display range and measurement current range change according
to the number of CT turns and the number of CT power wire loops. Set for
the number of CT turns and the number of CT power wire loops suitable for
the conditions of the CT connected. The display range and the measurement
current range are calculated by the formulas shown below. (The internal
calculations of this device have an error of less than 0.1 A.)
Display range lower limit (A) = 0.0

Display range upper limit (A) = Number of turns ÷ (16 × number of power
wire loops) × 1.4
Measurement current range lower limit (A) = Number of turns ÷ (2000 ×
number of power wire loops)
Measurement current range upper limit (A) = Number of turns ÷ (16 ×
number of power wire loops)
The table below shows examples of how display range and measurement
current range change according to the number of CT turns and the number of
CT power wire loops. Measurement current range is shown in parentheses.
Number of 100 turns 400 turns 800 turns 1600 turns 4000 turns
turns
Number
of power
wire loops
1 time 0.0 to 8.7 A 0.0 to 35.0 A 0.0 to 70.0 A 0.0 to 140.0 A 0.0 to 350.0 A
(0.1 to 6.2 A) (0.2 to 25.0 A) (0.4 to 50.0 A) (0.8 to (2.0 to
100.0 A) 250.0 A)
2 times 0.0 to 4.3 A 0.0 to 17.5 A 0.0 to 35.0 A 0.0 to 70.0 A 0.0 to 175.0 A
(0.1 to 3.1 A) (0.1 to 12.5 A) (0.2 to 25.0 A) (0.4 to 50.0 A) (1.0 to
125.0 A)
6 times 0.0 to 1.4 A 0.0 to 5.8 A 0.0 to 11.6 A 0.0 to 23.3 A 0.0 to 58.3 A
(0.1 to 1.0 A) (0.1 to 4.1 A) (0.1 to 8.3 A) (0.2 to 16.6 A) (0.4 to 41.6 A)
• If ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank (I d02) is prior to version

2.04, the operation is always performed on the basis of 800 CT turns and one
CT power wire loop. The number of CT 1/CT2 turns and power wire loops is
not displayed and cannot be set.
• If ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank (I d02) is prior to version
2.04, the CT input failure alarm (AL 1 1) is not displayed.
5-93
5 - 13 Console Display and Key Operation

It is possible to make the setting so that the console display and key operation are customized.
Key operation type

Two kinds of general key operation flows are provided, standard key operation type
and special key operation type. A desired key operation type can be selected.
(For details about two kinds of key operation types,
2 - 2 Key Operation (p. 2-2).

Key operation mode/type 0: Standard type 0 High function
(Setup bank) 1: Special type
[mode] key function

The selection operation when the [mode] key is kept pressed for 1 s or longer in the
operation display mode can be set.

[mode] key function 0: Invalid 0 Basic,
(Setup bank) 1: AUTO/MANUAL selection Standard,
2: RUN/READY selection High function
3: AT Stop/Start
4: LSP group selection
5: Release all DO latches
6: LSP/RSP selection
7: Communication DI1 selection
8: Invalid
• When [CtrL: Control method] is set at “0” (ON/OFF control), the AUTO/
MANUAL selection becomes invalid.
• When [CtrL: Control method] is set at “0” (ON/OFF control) or if the PV
high limit/low limit alarm occurs, the AT stop/start selection becomes
invalid.
• When [C30: LSP system group] is set at “1”, the LSP group selection
becomes invalid.
5-94
MODE display setup

The mode related setup items of the parameter setting and mode bank to be
displayed can be set.

MODE display setup Whether or not the mode bank setup is 255 Standard,
(Setup bank) displayed is determined by the sum of the High function
following weights:
Bit 0: AUTO/MANUAL display
Disabled: 0, Enabled: +1
Bit 1: RUN/READY display
Bit 2: LSP/RSP display
Bit 3: AT stop/start display
Bit 4: Release all DO latches display
Bit 5: Communication DI1 ON/OFF display
Other invalid settings, 0, +64, +128
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
AUTO/MANUAL display
RUN/READY display
LSP/RSP display
AT stop/start display
Release all DO latches display
Communication DI1 ON/OFF display
Undefined.
Undefined.
• When using the SLP-C35 Smart Loader Package, not only the numeric value, but
also the bit input can be used to set [C73: MODE display setup].
• Even though the AUTO/MANUAL display is set at [Displayed], the AUTO/
MANUAL is not displayed when [CtrL: Control method] is set at “0” (ON/
OFF control).
• Even though the AT stop/start display is set at [Displayed], the AT stop/
start is not displayed when [CtrL: Control method] is set at “0” (ON/OFF
control).
• Even though the LSP/RSP display is set at [Enabled], the LSP/RSP is not
displayed if the model does not provide the RSP input.
5-95
PV/SP display setup

The PV/SP value related items to be displayed in the operation display mode can be
set.

PV/SP display setup Whether or not the PV/SP value related 15 Standard,
(Setup bank) items are displayed in the operation display High function
mode is determined by the sum of the
following weights:
Bit 0: PV display
Bit 1: SP display
Bit 2: LSP group number display
Other invalid settings, 0, +8
23 22 21 20
PV display
SP display
LSP group number display
Undefined.
also the bit input can be used to set [C74: PV/SP display setup].
• Even though the LSP group number display is set at [Enabled], the LSP
group number is not displayed when [C30: LSP system group] is set at “1”.
5-96
MV display setup

The MV related items to be displayed in the operation display mode can be set.

MV display setup Whether or not the MV value related items 15 Standard,
(Setup bank) are displayed in the operation display High function
mode is determined by the sum of the
following weights:
Bit 0: MV display
Bit 1: Heat MV/cool MV display
Bit 2: MFB display
Bit 3: AT progress display
23 22 21 20
MV display
Heat MV/Cool MV display
MFB display
AT progress display
also the bit input can be used to set [C75: MV display setup].
• Even though the heat MV/cool MV display is set at [Enabled], the heat
MV/cool MV is not displayed when [C26: Heat/Cool control] is set at “0”
(Disabled).
• Even though the AT progress display is set at [Enabled], the AT progress is
not displayed while the AT is stopping.
• Even though the MFB display is set at [Enabled], the MFB is not displayed
if the model does not provide the position proportional output.
5-97
Event setting value display setup

The main setting and sub-setting of Internal Events 1 to 3 to be displayed in the
operation display mode can be set.

Event setting value display 0: Internal Event set value is not displayed 0 Standard,
setup in the operation display mode. High function
(Setup bank) 1: Set value of Internal Event 1 is displayed
in the operation display mode.
2: Set values of Internal Events 1 to 2 are
displayed in the operation display mode.
3: Set values of Internal Events 1 to 3 are
• Even though the Internal Event set value is set at [Enabled], the Internal
Event set values are not displayed when the main setting and sub-setting
are not necessary according to the operation type of Internal Event.
• The main setting and sub-setting of Internal Events 4 to 8 cannot be
Event remaining time display setup

The ON delay/OFF delay remaining time of Internal Events 1 to 3 to be displayed in
the operation display mode can be set.

Event remaining time 0: ON/OFF delay remaining time of Internal 0 Standard,
display setup Event is not displayed in the operation High function
(Setup bank) display mode.
1: ON/OFF delay remaining time of Internal
Event 1 is displayed in the operation
display mode.
Events 1 to 2 are displayed in the
operation display mode.
Events 1 to 3 are displayed in the
• Even though the Internal Event remaining time is set at [Enabled], the
remaining time is not displayed when the remaining time display is not
necessary according to the operation type of Internal Event.
• The remaining time of Internal Events 4 to 8 cannot be displayed in the
5-98
CT input current value display setup

The CT current value to be displayed in the operation display mode can be set.

CT input current value 0: CT current value is not displayed in the 0 Standard,
display setup operation display mode. High function
(Setup bank) 1: CT1 current value is displayed in the
2: CT1 to 2 current values are displayed in
the operation display mode.
• When the optional model has two CT input points, the display and setting can be
made.
User level

The user level of the console display can be set.
As a larger value is set, the number of possible displays/settings is increased.

User level 0: Basic configuration 1 Basic,
(Setup bank) 1: Standard configuration Standard,
2: High function configuration High function
LED monitor

The function of the decimal point LED at the right end digit of the lower display
(lower 4-digit display) can be set.

LED monitor 0: Disabled 0 High function
(Setup bank) 1: Flashing while data is being sent through
RS-485 communication.
2: Flashing while data is being received
through RS-485 communication.
3: Logical OR of all DI statuses
4: Flashing in READY mode
5-99
MS indicating lamp

The lighting conditions for the Multi Status (MS) display located at the center of the
console and three groups of the lighting statuses can be set with the priority put.

MS indicating lamp ON 0: Normally open (Normally OFF=0) 39 High function
condition (1st priority) 1: Normally close (Normally ON=1)
(Setup bank) 2 to 9: Internal event 1 to 8
10 to 13: Undefined.
14: MV1 (ON/OFF, Time proportional 1,
Heat-side, OPEN-side output)
15: MV2 (Time proportional 2, Cool-side,
CLOSE-side output)
18 to 21: DI1 to DI4
26 to 30: Internal contact 1 to 5
34 to 37: Communication DI1 to DI4
38: MANUAL
39: READY
40: RSP
41: AT
42: During ramp
43: Undefined.
44: Alarm
45: PV alarm
46: Undefined.
47: [mode] key pressing status
48: Event output 1 terminal status
49: Control output 1 terminal status
MS indicating lamp ON 0: Lit. 1 High function
status (1st priority) 1: Slow flashing
(Setup bank) 2: Flashing twice
3: Fast flashing
4: Left to right
5: Right to left
6: Reciprocating between left and right
7: Deviation OK
8: Deviation graph
9: MV graph
10: Heat-side MV graph (For heat/cool control)
11: Cool-side MV graph (For heat/cool control)
12: MFB graph (including MFB being
estimated)
13: DI monitor
14: Internal contact monitor
15: Internal event monitor
MS indicating lamp ON Same as MS indicating lamp ON condition 44 High function
condition (2nd priority) (1st priority).
(Setup bank)
MS indicating lamp ON Same as MS indicating lamp ON status 6
status (2nd priority) (1st priority).
(Setup bank)
MS indicating lamp ON Same as MS indicating lamp ON condition 1 High function
condition (3rd priority) (1st priority).
(Setup bank)
MS indicating lamp ON Same as MS indicating lamp ON status 9
status (3rd priority) (1st priority).
(Setup bank)
MS indicating lamp 0 to 9999 U 5 U High function
deviation range
(Setup bank)
5-100
• The lighting conditions are satisfied when the status set as conditions is ON
(example: Internal event 1) or the status set as conditions is met (example:
MANUAL). Therefore, if the lighting conditions are set at “0”, the conditions are
always not satisfied. If the lighting conditions are set at “1”, the conditions are
always satisfied.
• When the lighting conditions having the top priority are satisfied, the operation
enters the lighting status having the top priority.
• When the lighting conditions having the top priority are not satisfied and the
lighting conditions having the second priority are satisfied, the operation enters
the lighting status having the second priority.
• When the lighting conditions having the top and second priorities are not
satisfied and the lighting conditions having the third priority are satisfied, the
operation enters the lighting status having the third priority.
• When the lighting conditions having the top to third priorities are not satisfied,
the Multi Status (MS) display becomes off.
• When the lighting status is set at “7” (deviation OK), the Multi Status (MS)
display is lit or off as shown in the following Figure:
If the deviation range of the Multi Status (MS) display is set at “0 U”, the Multi
Status (MS) display is lit only when the PV display value equals SP (PV=SP).
Lit
Off Off
PV
Deviation range of Deviation range of
Multi Status (MS) Multi Status (MS)
display display
SP
Deviation OK lit/off
• When the lighting status is set at “8” (deviation graph), the Multi Status (MS)
display is lit as shown in the following Figure:
The deviation range of the Multi Status (MS) display is set to “1 U” or more. If
this range is set at “0 U”, the Multi Status (MS) display becomes off.
-100.0 % or less +100.1 % or more
-99.9 to -80.0 % +80.1 to +100.0 %
-79.9 to -60.0 % +60.1 to +80.0 %
-59.9 to -40.0 % +40.1 to +60.0 %
-39.9 to -20.0 % +20.1 to +40.0 %
-19.9 to 0.0 % +0.1 to +20.0 %
Lighting range of deviation graph (Ratio of deviation (PV-SP) to Multi Status (MS) display deviation range)
5-101
• When the lighting status is set at “9” (MV graph), “10” (Heat-side MV graph),
“11” (Cool-side MV graph), or “12” (MFB graph), the Multi Status (MS) display
is lit as shown in the following Figure:
Off at 0.0 % or less

0.1 to 10.0 %
10.1 to 20.0 %
20.1 to 30.0 %
30.1 to 40.0 %
40.1 to 50.0 %
50.1 to 60.0 %
60.1 to 70.0 %
70.1 to 80.0 %
80.1 to 90.0 %
90.1 to 100.0 %
100.1 % or more
Lighting range of MV graph (This explanation also applies to the heat MV, cool MV, and MFB.)
• When the lighting status is set at “13” (DI monitor), “14” (Internal contact
monitor), or “15” (Internal event monitor), the Multi Status (MS) display is lit as
shown in the following Figure:
Internal event 8
Internal event 7
Internal event 6
Internal contact 5, internal event 5

DI 4, internal contact 4, internal event 4
Lighting of DI, internal contact, and internal event
5-102
User Function

Up to eight settings selected from various settings can be added to the operation
display.

User Function 1 Each setting is set on the upper display. ---- Standard,
(User Function bank) The following shows the setting High function
exceptions:
User Function 2 ---- : Not registered. ----
(User Function bank) P- _ : P roportional band of currently
used PID group
User Function 3 I - _ : I ntegral time of currently used ----
(User Function bank) PID group
d- _ : D erivative time of currently
User Function 4 used PID group ----
(User Function bank) rE- _ : Manual reset of currently used
PID group
User Function 5 OL- _ : Output low limit of currently ----
(User Function bank) used PID
OH- _ : Output high limit of currently
used PID group
User Function 6 ----
P- _ C : Proportional band for cool side
(User Function bank)
of currently used PID group
I - _ C : Integration time for cool side
User Function 7 ----
(User Function bank)
d- _ C : D erivative time for cool side of
currently used PID group
User Function 8 Ol. _ C : O utput low limit for cool side ----
(User Function bank) of currently used PID group
OH. _ C : Output high limit for cool side
• Only settings which can be displayed can be registered. (For example, manual
reset of the PID constant can be registered only if integral time (I) is set at 0.)
• Setting cannot be made from the console by using a parameter number displayed
on the setup screen of the SLP-C35 Smart Loader Package.
• The following keys can be used to select a parameter to be set:

[<] key: Moves to the top parameter of the next parameter bank.
[ ] key: Displays the next parameter.
<
[ ] key: Displays the previous parameter.

<
[enter] key: Executes the start and confirmation of a setting change.
• When using the SLP-C35 Smart Loader Package, [User Function] can be
registered even though the conditions for instrument status are set as display
disabled.
Settings registered as user functions are displayed as if the user level is High
function, in spite of the actual user level setting in setup C79. Otherwise
the display is according to the C79 setting.
5-103
User Function setting procedures

zz
This section describes an example of setting with the Smart Loader Package
SLP-C35.
When registering the user function, up to eight parameters can be registered to the
[para] key.
When frequently used functions are registered, this ensures convenient operation.
In this example, the main setting of event 1 is registered into UF1.
1. To register a user function from the user function item:
When using this function, first set the user level to “Standard configuration” or
“High function configuration”.
5-104
(1) Select [Option] → [User Function].
(2) Select [1: Event] in [Group select].
(3) Select [801: Event value (main)] in [Item select].
(2)
(1)
(3)
5-105
2. To register currently setting item into the user function:

If there are any parameters you wish to register into the user function during
setting, follow the steps below to register such parameters.
(1) Keep the cursor placed in an item you wish to register and set, and then left-
click the [UF] icon.
>> The user function register box will appear.
(2) Check on Nos. you wish to register and click [Register].
>> Items you have checked on are then registered.

(1)
(1)
(2)
Note
The registered contents can also be checked by selecting [Option] → [User
Function].
5-106
Key lock, communications lock, and loader lock

The setting (changing) or display can be set disabled using the key lock.

Key lock 0: All settings are possible. 0 Basic,
(Lock bank) 1: M ode, event, operation display, SP, UF, Standard,
lock, manual MV, and mode key can be set. High function
2: Operation display, SP, UF, lock, manual
MV, and mode key can be set.
3: UF, lock, manual MV, and mode key can
be set.
Communications lock 0: RS-485 communications read/write enabled. 0 High function
(Lock bank) 1: RS-485 communications read/write disabled. *
Loader lock 0: Loader communications read/write enabled. 0 High function
(Lock bank) 1: Loader communications read/write disabled. *
* Communications can be disabled by using the communications lock and loader lock.
• When using only the key lock setting, key lock objects can be displayed, but the
setting (changing) cannot be configured.
• When locked with the password, the display and setting of key lock objects
cannot be configured.
Even with a communications lock or loader lock, read/write of the parameters

below is possible.
Bank Item Bank Item

Setup Decimal point position Operation Current transformer (CT) current value 1
SP RSP display Current transformer (CT) current value 2
Mode AUTO/MANUAL Timer remaining time 1
RUN/READY Timer remaining time 2
LSP/RSP Timer remaining time 3
AT stop/start Timer remaining time 4
Release all DO latches Timer remaining time 5
Operation PV Timer remaining time 6
display SP (Target value) Timer remaining time 7
LSP group selection Timer remaining time 8
PID group being selected. STEP operation No.
Manipulated Variable (MV) STEP operation remaining time
Heat Manipulated Variable (Heat MV) STEP operation remaining time (s)
Cool Manipulated Variable (Cool MV) LSP value in use
Motor opening feedback value (MFB) PV before ratio, bias, and filter
AT progress RSP before ratio, bias, and filter
Status Input alarm status
5-107
Password

The setting (changing) of the key lock, communication lock, and loader lock can be
set disabled using the password.

Password display 0 to 15 0 Basic,
(Lock bank) 5: Password 1A to 2B display (The initial value Standard,
becomes “0” when the High function
Password 1A 0000 to FFFF (Hexadecimal value) 0000 Basic,
(Lock bank) Standard,
Password 2A 0000 to FFFF (Hexadecimal value) 0000 High function
(Lock bank)
Password 1B 0000 to FFFF (Hexadecimal value) 0000
(Lock bank)
Password 2B 0000 to FFFF (Hexadecimal value) 0000
(Lock bank)
• When using only the key lock setting, the display can be made, but the setting
(changing) cannot be made.
• When locked with the password, the display and setting cannot be made.
• The display and setting of [Password 1A: PS1A] and [Password 2A: PS2A] can
be made only when [Password display: PASS] is “5” and the passwords of two
groups (1A and 1B, 2A and 2B) are matched.
• The display and setting of [Password1B: PS1b] and [Password 2B: PS2b] can be
made only when [Password display: PASS] is “5”.
• The value set in [Password1A: PS 1A] is automatically set to [Password1B: PS 1b].
• The value set in [Password2A: PS2A] is automatically set to [Password2B: PS2b].
• Before setting the passwords 1A to 2B, determine two hexadecimal values
to be used as passwords and make a note of them for future reference.
• [PASS] is used to prevent incorrect password setting by limiting the
display conditions of passwords 1A to 2B.
• When other values are set for passwords 1B and 2B after the values to be
used as passwords have been set for passwords 1A and 2A, the passwords
1A and 2A cannot be displayed and the key lock, communication lock
and loader lock cannot be changed.
This status is called “password lock status”.
• The settings, which cannot be changed by the key lock, cannot be
displayed in the password lock mode.
• If the password lock cannot be unlocked, contact the azbil Group or its
dealer. At Azbil Corporation's factory, the password lock can be unlocked
by returning the setting to the initial setting. In this case, note that the
data, which has been set by the customer, cannot be saved (retained).
5-108
5 - 14 Position Proportional Control

When the control output type of the model is R1 (motor drive relay output), the position proportional control is
performed. In the position proportional control, the ON/OFF control of the relays on the open and close sides is
performed so that the MV (manipulated variable) by the PID control, MANUAL operation, and output at READY
meets the opening (MFB) of the motor.
Position proportional type

Position proportional type 0: MFB control and Estimated position control 0 Basic,
(Setup bank) 1: MFB control Standard,
2: Estimated position control (MFB disabled) High function
3: E stimated position control (MFB disabled)
+ Position adjustment at power ON.
• On position proportional control models (with code R1 in the control output

segment of the model No.), the factory setting for At-d (AT derivative time
adjustment coefficient) in the Extended tuning bank is 0.00, and therefore the
derivative time is 0 seconds when AT is complete. To have the AT result affect
control, change the At-d setting to 1.00 and re-execute AT. For details,
 Auto tuning (AT) (p. 5-26).
• When the control output type is R1 (motor drive relay output), the Heat/Cool
• When the control output type is R1 (motor drive relay output), the display and
setting can be performed.
• In case of the position proportional control model, the Heat/Cool control is not
enabled.
• When [C57: Position proportional type] is set to [0: MFB control +
Estimated position control] or [1: MFB control], set [C60: Motor adjust] to
[1: Start] and execute the motor auto adjust. For details,
 Motor adjust (p. 5-111).
When [C57: Position proportional type] is set to [2: Estimated position
control (MFB disabled)] or [3: Estimated position control (MFB disabled) +
Position adjustment at power ON], set the precise value to [C63: Motor
full close-full open time].
Setting 0 (MFB control + Estimated position control)

zz
When the Motor Feed Back (MFB) input is correct, the motor position is controlled
by actually measured MFB.
When using this setting, the setup (C60) is set at “1” to perform the motor adjust.
• If the MFB input is faulty, the motor position is controlled by the estimated MFB
value. This status is called “estimated position control status”.
For example, if the motor is rotated to the position where the feedback
potentiometer deteriorates, the MFB input is changed rapidly.
This rapid change is detected as error to estimate the correct MFB position.
Additionally, if the MFB burnout alarm occurs, the motor position is also
controlled by the estimated MFB value.
5-109
• In the estimated position control status, an error occurs between the actual motor
opening and estimated MFB value.
Therefore, if the output (MV) ≤ 0.0 %, the relay on the close side is always turned
ON. If the output (MV) ≥ 100.0 %, the relay on the open side is always turned
ON.
According to the above control, the motor is put in the fully closed status or fully
opened status to correct the error.
However, the error is not corrected if the MV value is limited to a range of 0.1 to
99.9 % by the output limiter or if the MV value does not become 0.0 % or less or
100 % or more according to the control status.
• The following may be the cause if the estimated position control is activated
easily.
• The motor opening is adjusted incorrectly.

• The feedback potentiometer deteriorates or the resolution is insufficient.
• The MFB wiring is faulty.
Setting 1 (MFB control)

zz
The motor is controlled by actually measured MFB. If the MFB burnout alarm
(AL07) occurs, the MFB is changed to “150 %” so that the relay on the close side
is always turned ON. When using this setting, the setup (C60) is set at “1” to
perform the motor auto adjust.
Setting 2 (Estimated position control)

zz
• The motor is always controlled in the estimated position control status.
Regardless of the presence of the MFB wiring, the motor position is controlled by
the estimated MFB value.
• When using this setting, [C63: Motor full close-full open time] must be input
correctly.
• The MFB burnout alarm does not occur.
• The error between the actual motor opening and estimated MFB value is
corrected by forcibly moving the motor continuously in the close or open
direction when the MV is 0.0 % or 100 %.
Setting 3 (Estimated position control + Position adjustment at power ON)

zz
When the power is turned ON, the relay on the close side is kept turned ON for a
period of time set in [C63: Motor full close-full open time] to make “0 %” of the
estimated MFB matched with the motor opening. Subsequent operation is the
same as that described for setting 2 (Estimated position control).
When using Setting 3, set the precise value to [C63: Motor full close–full open
time].
5-110
Position proportional dead zone

Position proportional dead 0.5 to 25.0 % 10.0 % Basic,
zone Standard,
• When the control output type is R1 (motor drive relay output), the display and setting
can be performed. However, if [C59: Motor long life mode] is set at “1” (aiming at
the service life of the potentiometer), the display and setting cannot be performed.
The dead zone between the motor open and motor close in the position
proportional control is set.
For setting reference, this dead zone is changed when the manual output is output
at a constant rate. The value, which is obtained when the hunting of the motor is
stopped, is the minimum value of the dead zone.
If the exactly minimum value is set, the motor is always moved, causing the
service life of the motor to be shortened extremely.
The default setting before shipment is “10.0 %”. With this default value used as
reference value, the setting is made correctly by taking the control results and
service life of the motor into consideration.
Dead zone
Relay on close Relay on open

side ON side ON
Control output (%)
* *
* 1/4 of dead zone set value
MFB (%)
Motor long life mode

Motor long life mode 0: Aiming at controllability 1 Basic,
(Setup bank) 1: Aiming at service life of potentiometer Standard,
High function
• When this setting is set at “1” (aiming at service life of potentiometer), the values
set in [OUtL: Output variation limit] and [C58: Position proportional dead
zone] become invalid and the value suitable for aiming at the service life of the
potentiometer is calculated automatically.
Motor adjust

Motor adjust 0: Stop 0 Basic,
(Setup bank) 1: Start Standard,
High function
When [C57: Position proportional type] is set at “0” or “1,” be sure to perform
[C60: Motor adjust].
5-111
setting can be performed. However, when [C57: Position proportional type]
is set at “2” (Estimated position control) or “3” (Estimated position control +
Position adjustment at power ON), the display and setting cannot be performed.
• When using the motor auto adjust function of the position proportional control,
[C6 1: Input with motor fully closed], [C62: Input with motor fully open], and
[C63: Motor full close-full open time] are set automatically.
• Motor auto adjusting procedures
1. Set “0” or “1” to [C57: Position proportional type].
2. S et “1” to [C60: Motor auto adjust] and press the [enter] key.
When this setup (C60) is already set at “1”, press the [enter] key twice.
3. The motor auto adjust is then started.
• The upper display shows and the relay on the close side is turned ON.
• The motor is moved toward the close side and the MFB count value is shown
on the lower display. When the counting becomes stable, the fully closed
adjustment is completed. This count value is then written into [C6 1: Input
with motor fully closed].
• The upper display shows and the relay on the open side is turned ON.
• The motor is moved toward the open side and the MFB count value is shown on
the lower display. When the counting becomes stable, the fully open adjustment
is completed. This count value is then written into [C62: Input with motor fully
open]. Additionally, a period of time, which has elapsed from the fully closed
position to the fully open position, is written into [C63: Motor full close-full
open time].
• When the motor auto adjust has been completed, the basic display screen will appear.
4. T
o cancel the adjustment, press the [display] key.
When the motor auto adjust is started, keys other than the [display] key used to
cancel the adjustment cannot be operated.
If any of the following arises, each value is returned to its default setting before
shipment and “AL 10” is shown as the troubleshooting process.
“AL 10” is cleared only when the motor auto adjust is restarted and completed
correctly or when the power is reset.
• The count value between the fully closed position and fully open position is
less than “260”.
• The fully closed count is greater than the fully open count.
• The period of time from the fully closed position to the fully open position is
less than 5 s or 240.0 s or more.
• The MFB burnout alarm (AL07) is continued or occurs frequently.
• The period of time that the MFB count value becomes stable exceeds 5min.
• The MFB or open/close relay has faulty wiring.
(However, all of faulty wiring cannot be detected as error.)
• As the data is written into the motor auto adjust (decimal address: 5260) through
the CPL or Modbus communication, the starting of the motor auto adjust can
be cancelled. To start the motor auto adjust, “1” is written. On the contrary, to
cancel the motor auto adjust, “0” is written.
• If the power to the measuring instrument is turned OFF during motor
auto adjust of the position proportional control, the motor auto adjust is
cancelled when the power is turned ON again.
• Even though the AUTO/MANUAL mode, RUN/READY mode, or LSP/RSP is
changed during motor auto adjust, the motor auto adjust is continued.
5-112
Motor wiring and motor auto adjust operation

For wiring method between the motor and controller, two kinds of wiring methods,
direct wiring and reverse wiring, are provided as described below.
The direct wiring means that the motor is rotated clockwise (CW, ) as the output
of the controller increases.
If it is required to rotate the motor counterclockwise according to the control
contents, such as cooling control, two kinds of methods are provided as described
below.
• The wiring is not changed and the control action direction is changed on the
controller side.
• The wiring is changed to construct the reverse wiring.
In this unit, the control action (Direct/Reverse) can be changed.
If the direct wiring is used for the wiring to the motor, the thinking way of each
control is simplified and the trouble can be solved easily.
Therefore, it is recommended to perform the direct wiring where possible.
Direct wiring Reverse wiring
This unit This unit
13 14 15 7 8 9 13 14 15 7 8 9
AC 24 V AC 24 V
2 3 1 Y T G 2 3 1 Y T G
CW CCW CW CCW
CW CCW CW CCW
Open Close Open Close
Motor Motor
CW: Clock Wise (Clockwise, )

CCW: Counter Clock Wise (Counterclockwise, )
This unit has functions (AL07, AL 10) that detect incorrect wiring with the motor
and the MFB burnout or short-circuit.
In the same manner as described for the direct wiring, the unit judges the reverse
wiring as correct and does not give any alarm.
Additionally, when [C57: Position proportional type] is set at [0: MFB control
+ estimated position control], the operation continues even though the MFB
burnout is detected.
The following Tables summarize symptoms of each wiring method during motor
auto adjust ([C60: Motor adjust] is set at [1: Start]).
At this time, note that the motor is started from the fully closed position (position
where the motor rotated counterclockwise fully). Numeric values shown in the
lower display column of the Tables show examples. The lit LED column in the
Tables shows examples with initial values of the DO Assignment, that is, control
output 1 uses the open side and control output 2 uses the close side. Additionally,
the alarm is shown after the motor has been closed or opened fully.
5-113
Correct direct wiring

zz
Upper display Lit LED Lower display Motor motion Notes
ot2 Decreases like 2000 CCW When the motor is moved CCW with
→ 1500 and becomes “ot2” lit, the motor terminals 1 and 2
↓ stable. are the direct wiring.
ot1 Increases like 1500 → CW
3500 and becomes
stable.
Correct reverse wiring

zz
Upper display Lit LED Lower display Motor motion Notes
ot2 Decreases like 3500 CW When the motor is moved CW with
→ 1500 and becomes 1 and 2 connected reversely, G and
↓ stable. Y connected reversely, and “ot2” lit,
ot1 Increases like 1500 → CCW the motor terminals 1 and 2 are the
3500 and becomes reverse wiring.
stable.
Alarm indications and causes due to incorrect wiring

zz
Upper display Lit LED Lower display Motor motion Alarm indication Cause
ot2 Increases and becomes CCW G and Y are
stable. connected
↓ reversely.
ot1 Decreases and CW
becomes stable.
ot2 Decreases and CCW None. T and G are
becomes stable. However, the MFB connected
↓ value does not reversely.
ot1 Increases and becomes CW meet the motor
stable. opening.
ot2 Decrease or increase is CCW or none. T and Y are
unclear. connected
↓ reversely.
(Motor motion is
ot1 changed before fully CW
closed or opened.)
ot2 Increases and becomes CW 1 and 2 are
stable. connected
↓ reversely.
ot1 Decreases and CCW
becomes stable.
ot2 Increases and becomes CW 1 and 2 are
stable. connected
↓ reversely;
ot1 Decreases and CCW T and G are
becomes stable. connected
reversely.
ot2 Decrease or increase is CW or none. 1 and 2 are
unclear. connected
↓ reversely;
(Motor motion is
ot1 changed before fully CCW T and Y are
closed or opened.) connected
reversely.
5-114
Input with motor fully closed and input with motor fully open

Input with motor fully 0 to 9999 1000 Basic,
closed Standard,
Input with motor fully 0 to 9999 3000
open
(Setup bank)
setting can be performed. However, if [C57: Position proportional type] is set
at “2” (Estimated position control) or “3” (Estimated position control + Position
adjustment at power ON), the display and setting cannot be performed.
• If you use the motor auto adjust function of the position proportional control,
these parameters can be set automatically. Additionally, they can also be set
manually in the same manner as described for normal set values.
• The difference in the settings for [C6 1: Input with motor fully closed] and [C62:
Input with motor fully open ] must be 260 or more, and C6 1 (fully closed) must
be less than C62 (fully open). Otherwise, AL 10 will occur. Please set a value
from 144 to 5782 for [C6 1: Input with motor fully closed] and [C62: Input with
motor fully open]. A value outside this range will cause AL07.
• If AL 10 is generated and automatic motor adjustment (C60) cannot be started,
set values that meet the above conditions. After AL 10 disappears, start the
adjustment. (Sample settings: C6 1 = 1000, C62 = 3000, C63 = 30.0 s)
Note
For details about motor auto adjust,
Motor full close–full open time

Motor full close–full open 5.0 to 240.0 s 30.0 s Basic,
time Standard,
• When using the motor auto adjust function of the position proportional control
with [C57: Position proportional type] set at “0” (MFB control + Estimated
position control) or “1” (MFB control), the motor full close–full open time can
be set automatically. Additionally, this time can also be set manually in the same
manner as described for normal set values.
Note
For details about motor auto adjust,
• When [C57: Position proportional type] is set at “2” (Estimated position

control) or “3” (Estimated position control + Position adjustment at power ON),
the actually measured motor full open time is set.
5-115
6 - 1 List of Operation Displays
The following shows the meanings of the values stated in the “User Level” column:
0: Basic, Standard, and High function configuration
1: Standard and High function configuration
Operation displays

Initial User
Display Item Contents Notes
value level
Upper display: PV SP (Target value) SP low limit (C07 ) to SP high limit 0 0 Whether or not this item is
(C08 ) displayed is selected by the
Lower display: SP PV/SP display setup (C74 ).
LSP No. 1 to LSP system group (C30 , Max. 8) 1 0 Displayed when LSP system
(1st digit: Value at group (C30 ) is “2” or more.
(Display the right end digit) The lower display shows the
example) LSP set value corresponding
Lower display: to the LSP group number.
LSP Whether or not this item is
displayed is selected by the
PV/SP display setup (C74 ).
Step operation Setting is disabled. 1 0 Regardless of the soak or ramp
remaining time Upper display shows the step No. (1 operation, the remain time
(Display to 8), and distinction among the soak, is displayed in step time unit
example) up ramp, and down ramp on the (setup C33 ). When the unit is
Lower display: right of “St. ”. Lower display shows 1s, “min.s” is displayed. When
Step remain time the soak remain time or ramp remain the unit is 1min, “h.min” is
time. displayed.
Upper display: MV (Manipulated -10.0 to +110.0 % — 0 In the ON/OFF control (CtrL
PV Variable) Setting is disabled in AUTO mode. = 0), "100.0" is displayed at
Lower display: (Numeric value does not flash.) ON and "0.0" is displayed at
MV Setting is enabled in MANUAL OFF. Whether or not this item
mode. (Numeric value flashes.) is displayed is selected by the
MV display setup (C75).
Heat MV Setting is disabled. — 0 This item is displayed when
(Manipulated -10.0 to +110.0 % using the Heat/Cool control
Variable) (C26 = 1).
Cool MV — 0 Whether or not this item is
(Manipulated displayed is selected by the
Variable) MV display setup (C75).
MFB (Motor opening Setting is disabled. — 0 Displayed during execution of
feedback value) -10.0 to +110.0 % AT. (The display is continued
Flashing when the value is 0.0 to even after completion of AT.)
100.0% during estimate. Whether or not this item is
MV display setup (C75).
Upper display: AT progress display Setting is disabled. — 0 Displayed during execution of
PV (1st digit = Numeric Lower display shows the AT AT. (The display is continued
value at right end progress value on the right of “At ”. even after completion of AT.)
digit) 1 - : During execution of AT (Value is Whether or not this item is
(Display decreased.) displayed is selected by the
example) 0: Completion of AT MV display setup (C75).
CT (Current trans- Setting is disabled. — 0 Displayed when the optional
former) current model has two current
value 1 transformer points.
CT (Current trans- Setting is disabled. — 0 Whether or not this item is
former) current value 2 displayed is selected by the
CT input current value display
setup (C78).
Internal Event 1 The allowable setting range may 0 0 Setting required by the
main setting vary depending on the operation operation type of the internal
Internal Event 1 type of the internal event. 0 0 event is displayed.
sub-setting -1999 to +9999 U: Set value is other Whether or not this item is
than the following values: displayed is selected by the
0 to 9999 U: Set value is an absolute Event setting value display
value. setup (C76).
-199.9 to +999.9 %: Set value is MV.
6-1
Initial User
value level
Timer remaining Setting is disabled. — 0 Whether or not this item is
time 1 Upper display: Displays the displayed is selected by the
distinction between ON delay and event remain time display
OFF delay next to “t1. ”. setup
L (C77 ).
Lower display: Displays in the unit “ ” is displayed at the right
(any of 0.1 s, s, and min), which is end digit when using the ON
determined according to the delay delay time.
time unit of internal event 1 (3rd “L ” is displayed at the right
digit of E1.C3 ). end digit when using the OFF
delay time.
than the following values: displayed is selected by the
value. setup (C76 ).
-199.9 to +999.9 %: Set value is MV.
L (C77 ).
delay time.
than the following values. displayed is selected by the
value. setup (C76 ).
-199.9 to +999.9 %: Set value is MV.
L (C77 ).
delay time.
6-2
6 - 2 List of Parameter Setting Displays

The initial value may vary depending on the model No.
Mode bank

Bank selection:
Initial User
value level
AUTO/MANUAL AUtO : AUTO mode AUTO 0 Displayed when the control
mode selection MAn : MANUAL mode method is other than the ON/
OFF control (CtrL ≠0).
Whether or not this item is
display mode setup (C73 ).
RUN/READY mode rUn : RUN mode RUN 0 Whether or not this item is
selection rdy : READY mode displayed is selected by the
LSP/RSP mode LSP: LSP mode LSP 0 When the model provides
selection rSP: RSP mode the RSP input, the display is
possible.
display mode setup (C73).
AT stop/start At.OF : AT stop AT 0 Displayed when the control
selection At.On : AT start stop method is other than the ON/
OFF control (CtrL ≠0).
Release all DO Lt.On : Latch continue Latch 0 All DO latches such as control
latches Lt.OF : Latch release con- outputs (relay and voltage
tinue pulse) and event outputs can
be released.
Communication DI1 dI.OF : OFF OFF 0 Whether or not this item is
dI.On : ON displayed is selected by the
6-3
SP bank

Bank selection:
Initial User
value level
RSP Setting is disabled. — 0 Displayed when the optional
model provides the RSP input.
PID group No. (RSP) 1 to 8 1 1 Displayed when the optional
model provides the RSP input,
the control is other than ON/
OFF control (CtrL ≠0), and the
zone PID is not used (C24 =0).
SP (for LSP1) SP low limit (C07 ) to SP high limit (C08 ) 0 0
PID group No. (for 1 to 8 1 1 Displayed when the control
LSP1) is other than ON/OFF control
(CtrL ≠0) and the zone PID is
not used (C24 =0).
Ramp (for LSP1) 0 to 9999 (The decimal point position 0 1 Displayed when the SP ramp
is determined by the decimal point type (C31 ) is “1” or more.
position of PV and the SP ramp unit.)
Time (for LSP1) 0.0 to 999.9 (The time unit of the 0 1 Displayed when the SP ramp
step operation is “0.1 s”.) type (C31 ) is “2” or more.
0 to 9999 (The time unit of the step
operation is “1 s” or “1 min”.)
SP (for LSP2) Same as LSP1 group. 0 0 Displayed when the LSP
system group (C30 ) is
PID group No. (for LSP2) 1 1 “2” or more and the same
Ramp (for LSP2) 0 1 conditions as those for the
LSP1 group are satisfied.
Time (for LSP2) 0 1
Time (for LSP3) 0 1
Time (for LSP4) 0 1
Time (for LSP5) 0 1
Time (for LSP6) 0 1
Time (for LSP7) 0 1
Time (for LSP8) 0 1
6-4
Event bank

Bank selection:
Initial User
value level
Internal Event 1 -1999 to +9999 0 0 Necessary settings are
main setting The decimal point position may vary displayed according to
Internal Event 1 so that it meets the operation type 0 0 Internal Event 1 Configuration
sub-setting of the internal event. (E1.C1 ).
The above value becomes 0 to 9999
in some operation types.
Internal Event 1 0 to 9999 5 0
Hysteresis The decimal point position may vary
so that it meets the operation type of
the internal event.
Internal Event 1 0.0 to 999.9 0 2
ON delay time (Delay unit is 0.1 s.)
Internal Event 1 0 to 9999 0 2
OFF delay time (Delay unit is other than 0.1 s.)
Internal Event 2 Same as Internal Event 1. 0 0 Necessary settings are
main setting displayed according to
Internal Event 2 0 0 Internal Event 2 Configuration
sub-setting (E2.C1 ).
Internal Event 2 5 0
Hysteresis
ON delay time
OFF delay time
Hysteresis
ON delay time
OFF delay time
Hysteresis
ON delay time
OFF delay time
Hysteresis
ON delay time
OFF delay time
6-5
Initial User
value level
Hysteresis
ON delay time
OFF delay time
Hysteresis
ON delay time
OFF delay time
Hysteresis
ON delay time
OFF delay time
6-6
PID bank

Bank selection:
Initial User
value level
Proportional band 0.1 to 999.9 % 5.0 0 Displayed when the control
(PID 1) method is other than the ON/
Integration time 0 to 9999 s or 0.0 to 999.9 s (Note) 120 0 OFF control (CtrL ≠0).
(PID 1) (No integration control action when
set at "0".)
Derivative time 0 to 9999 s or 0.0 to 999.9 s (Note) 30 0
(PID 1) (No derivative control action when
set at "0".)
Manual reset (PID 1) -10.0 to +110.0 % 50.0 0 Displayed when the control
method is other than the ON/
OFF control (CtrL ≠0) and
the I (Integration time) in the
same PID group is “0”.
MV low limit (PID 1) -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 1 Displayed when the control
MV high limit (PID 1) -10.0 to +110.0 % 100.0 1 OFF control (CtrL ≠0).
Cool-side proportional 0.1 to 999.9 % 5.0 0 Displayed when the control
band (PID 1) method is other than the ON/
Cool-side integration 0 to 9999 s or 0.0 to 999.9 s (Note) 120 0 OFF control (CtrL ≠0) and
time (PID 1) (No integration control action when the Heat/Cool control is used
set at "0".) (C26 = 1).
Cool-side derivative 0 to 9999 s or 0.0 to 999.9 s (Note) 30 0
time (PID 1) (No derivative control action when
set at "0".)
Cool-side MV low -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 1
limit (PID 1)
Cool-side MV high -10.0 to +110.0 % 100.0 1
limit (PID 1)
Proportional band Same as PID 1 5.0 0 Same as PID 1
(PID 2)
Integration time 120 0
(PID 2)
Derivative time (PID 2) 30 0
Manual reset (PID 2) 50.0 0
MV low limit (PID 2) 0.0 1
MV high limit (PID 2) 100.0 1
Cool-side proportional 5.0 0
band (PID 2)
Cool-side integration 120 0
time (PID 2)
Cool-side derivative 30 0
time (PID 2)
Cool-side MV low 0.0 1
limit (PID 2)
Cool-side MV high 100.0 1
limit (PID 2)
(Note) F or presence of the decimal point, when [C23: PID Decimal point position] is set at “0”, the decimal
point does not exist. When this setting is set at “1”, the decimal point exists.
6-7
Initial User
value level
(PID 3)
(PID 3)
band (PID 3)
time (PID 3)
time (PID 3)
limit (PID 3)
limit (PID 3)
(PID 4)
(PID 4)
band (PID 4)
time (PID 4)
time (PID 4)
limit (PID 4)
limit (PID 4)
(PID 5)
(PID 5)
band (PID 5)
time (PID 5)
time (PID 5)
limit (PID 5)
limit (PID 5)
6-8
Initial User
value level
(PID 6)
(PID 6)
band (PID 6)
time (PID 6)
time (PID 6)
limit (PID 6)
limit (PID 6)
(PID 7)
(PID 7)
band (PID 7)
time (PID 7)
time (PID 7)
limit (PID 7)
limit (PID 7)
(PID 8)
(PID 8)
band (PID 8)
time (PID 8)
time (PID 8)
limit (PID 8)
limit (PID 8)
6-9
Parameter bank

Bank selection:
Initial User
value level
Control method 0: ON/OFF control 0 0 The initial value is “0” when
1: Fixed PID or the control output uses only
1 one point and is the relay
output. The initial value is “1”
in other cases.
MV low limit at AT -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 0 Displayed when the control
MV high limit at AT -10.0 to +110.0 % 100.0 0 OFF control (CtrL ≠0).
ON/OFF control 0 to 9999 U 5 0 Displayed when the control
differential method is the ON/OFF control
ON/OFF control -1999 to +9999 U 0 2 (CtrL =0).
operating point offset
PV filter 0 to 120.0 s 0.0 0
PV ratio 0.001 to 9.999 1.000 1
PV bias -1999 to +9999 U 0 0
RSP filter 0.0 to 120.0 s 0.0 1 Displayed when the model
provides the RSP input.
RSP ratio 0.001 to 9.999 1.000 1
RSP bias -1999 to +9999 U 0 1
Time proportional 0: 1 s unit 0 2 Displayed under the same
cycle unit 1 1: Cycle fixed at 0.5 s. conditions as CY except that
2: Cycle fixed at 0.25 s. a relay is not included in the
3: Cycle fixed at 0.1 s output.
If the set value is other than “0”,
the time proportional cycle 1 (Cy )
cannot be set.
Time proportional 5 to 120 s (Output destination of 10 0 Displayed when MV1 (time
cycle 1 MV1 includes the relay output.) or proportional output (heat)
1 to 120 s (Output destination of 2 of Heat/Cool control) is
MV1 does not include the relay connected to the relay control
output.) output, voltage pulse output,
If the time proportional cycle unit or event output in the DO
1 (CyU ) ≠ 0, this setting becomes Assignment.
invalid and the setting becomes The initial value of time
impossible. proportional cycle 1 is “10”
when the control output is
the relay output. The initial
value is “2” in other cases.
Time proportional 0: 1 s unit 0 2 Displayed under the same
cycle unit 2 1: Cycle fixed at 0.5 s. conditions as CY2 except that
2: Cycle fixed at 0.25 s. a relay is not included in the
3: Cycle fixed at 0.1 s output.
proportional cycle 2 (Cy2 ) cannot be set.
Time proportional 5 to 120 s (Output destination of 10 0 Displayed when the Heat/
cycle 2 MV2 includes the relay output.) or Cool control is used (C26 =1)
1 to 120 s (Output destination of 2 and MV2 (time proportional
MV2 does not include the relay output (cool) of Heat/Cool
output.) control) is connected to the
If the time proportional cycle unit relay control output, voltage
2 (CyU2 ) ≠ 0, this setting becomes pulse control output, or event
invalid and the setting becomes output.
impossible. The initial value of time
proportional cycle 2 is “10”
when the model has one
control output point. The
initial value is “2” in other
cases.
6-10
Initial User
value level
Time proportional 0: Controllability aiming type 0 2 The initial value is “1” when
cycle mode 1: Actuator service life aiming type control output 1 is the relay
(Only one ON/OFF operation or output. The initial value is “0”
within time proportional cycle) 1 in other cases.
MV variation limit 0.0: No limit. 0.0 2 Not displayed when the
model provides the motor
0.1 to 999.9 %/s drive relay output and
[aiming at service life of
potentiometer] is set (C59 =1).
SP up ramp (U/min) 0.0 to 999.9 U 0.0 2 Time unit of the ramp is selected
(No ramp when set at “0.0 U”) by the SP ramp unit (C32 ).
SP down ramp 0.0 2 Displayed when the SP ramp
(U/min) type is set at “standard” (C31 =0).

Extended tuning bank
Bank selection
Initial User
value level
AT type 0: Normal (Standard control 0 0 Displayed when the control
characteristics) method is other than the ON/
1: Immediate response (Control OFF control (CtrL ≠0).
characteristics that respond The initial value of “At-d ”
immediately to external disturbance.) is “0.00” when the control
2: S table (Control characteristics having output type is R1.
less up/down fluctuation of PV) The initial value of “At-d ”
Just-FiTTER settling 0.00 to 10.00 0.30 2 is “1.00” when the control
band output type is other than R1.
SP lag constant 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 2
AT Proportional 0.00 to 99.99 1.00 2

band adjust
AT Integral time adjust 0.00 to 99.99 1.00 2
AT Derivative time 0.00 to 99.99 1.00 2

adjust or
0.00
Control algorithm 0: PID (Conventional PID) 0 1
1: RationaLOOP
(High-performance PID)
Just-FiTTER 0 to 100 0 1
assistance coefficient

Zone bank
Bank selection:
Initial User
value level
Zone 1 -1999 to +9999 U 9999 U 2 Displayed when the zone PID
operation is used (C24 ≠0).
Zone 2 9999 U 2
Zone 3 9999 U 2
Zone 4 9999 U 2
Zone 5 9999 U 2
Zone 6 9999 U 2
Zone 7 9999 U 2
Zone hysteresis 0 to 9999 5U 2
6-11
6 - 3 List of Setup Setting Displays

Initial value may differ depending on model No.
Setup bank

Bank selection:
Initial User
value level
PV input range type Range of thermocouple: 1 to 26 88 0 For details, refer to the PV
Range of RTD: 41 to 68 Input Range Table (on page
Range of DC voltage and DC 5-2).
current: 81 to 84, 86 to 90
Temperature unit 0: Celsius (°C) 0 0 Displayed when the PV input range
1: Fahrenheit (°F) type is thermocouple or RTD.
Cold junction 0: Cold junction compensation (T/C) 0 2 Displayed when the PV input
compensation (T/C) is performed (internal). range type is thermocouple.
1: Cold junction compensation (T/C)
is not performed (external).
Decimal point 0: No decimal point 0 0 Displayed when the PV input
position 1: 1 digit after decimal point type is DC voltage/DC current
2: 2 digits after decimal point or thermocouple/RTD having
3: 3 digits after decimal point the range with the decimal
(Range with decimal point of point.
thermocouple/RTD: 0 to 1)
PV range low limit When the PV input range type is 0 0
thermocouple or RTD, the input
range low limit selected with the PV
input range type (C0 1 ) is displayed,
but the setting is disabled.
When the PV input range type is DC
voltage/DC current, a value ranging
from –1999 to +9999 is set.
PV range high limit When the PV input range type is 1000 0
thermocouple or RTD, the input
range high limit selected with the PV
input range type (C0 1 ) is displayed,
but the setting is disabled.
When the PV input type is DC
voltage/DC current, a value ranging
from –1999 to +9999 is set.
SP low limit PV range low limit to PV range high 0 1
limit
SP high limit 1000 1
PV square root 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 2 Displayed when the PV input
extraction dropout (PV square root extraction is not range type is DC voltage/DC
performed when set at “0.0”.) current.
RSP input range type 0: 4 to 20 mA 0 0 Displayed when the model
1: 0 to 20 mA provides the RSP input.
2: 0 to 5 V
3: 1 to 5 V
4: 0 to 10 V
RSP range low limit -1999 to +9999 U 0 0
RSP range high limit -1999 to +9999 U 1000 0
PID calculation 0: Enabled 0 2 Normally, the PV filter is used
adjustment function 1: Disabled with an initial value.
If ROM version 1 in the
instrument information bank
(i d02 ) is 2.26 or earlier, this
item cannot be displayed.
Control action 0: Reverse action (Heat) 0 0 Displayed when the heat/cool
(Direct/Reverse) 1: Direct action (Cool) control is not used (C26 =0).
6-12

Initial User
value level
Output operation at 0: Control calculation is continued. 0 2
PV alarm 1: Output at PV alarm is output.
Output at PV alarm -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 2
Output at READY -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 1
(Heat)
Output at READY -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 1 Displayed when the control
(Cool) method is other than the ON/OFF
control (CtrL ≠0) and the heat/
cool control (C26 = 1) is used.
Output operation 0: Bumpless transfer 0 1 Displayed when the control
at changing Auto/ 1: Preset method is other than the ON/
Manual OFF control (CtrL≠0).
Preset MANUAL -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 or 1 When the operation mode is
value (Used when the operation mode is 50.0 the MANUAL mode at power
the MANUAL mode at power ON.) ON, the preset MANUAL
value (C20) becomes the
Initial output type 0: Auto 0 2 Manipulated Variable (MV).
(mode) of PID 1: Not initialized
control 2: Initialized (If SP value different
from the current value is input.)
Initial output of PID -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 or 2
control 50.0
PID Decimal point 0: No decimal point 0 2 Displayed when the control
position 1: 1 digit after decimal point method is other than the ON/
(Decimal point of integral time and OFF control (CtrL≠0).
derivative time)
Zone PID operation 0: Disabled 0 2
1: Changed by SP
2: Changed by PV
Heat/Cool control 0: Not used 0 0 Displayed when the control output
1: Used type is other than R1 (motor
drive relay output), and when the
control method is other than the
ON/OFF control (CtrL ≠0).
When set at “1”, the control action
is set to the reverse action (C 14
= 0), the preset MANUAL value
(C20) is set to “50.0”, and the
initial output of the PID control
(C22) is changed to “50.0”.
Heat/Cool 0: Normal 0 1 Displayed when the Heat/
1: Energy saving Cool control is used (C26 = 1).
Heat/Cool control -100.0 to +100.0 % 0.0 0
dead zone
Heat/Cool control -10.0 to +110.0 % 50.0 2
change point
LSP system group 1 to 8 1 0
SP ramp type 0: Standard 0 2
1: Multi-ramp
2: S tep operation
When the power is turned ON again,
the step operation is stopped (READY).
3: Step operation
When the power is turned ON
again, the step operation is reset.
SP ramp unit 0: 0.1 U/s 1 2 "0.1 U" shows that the decimal
1: 0.1 U/min point position of the PV is
2: 0.1 U/h shifted one digit rightward.
STEP time unit 0: 0.1 s 0 2 Displayed when the SP ramp
1: 1 s (“min. s” is displayed on the type is the step operation
console.) (C3 1 ≥2).
2: 1 min (“h. min” is displayed on the
console.)
6-13
Initial User
value level
STEP PV start 0: None 0 2 Displayed when the SP ramp
1: Up start type is the step operation
2: Down start (C3 1 ≥2).
STEP loop 0: Stop (No loop) 0 2
1: Loop
2: Final step continued. (No loop)
CT1 operation type 0: Heater burnout detection 0 0 Displayed when the optional
1: Current value measurement model has two current
transformer input points.
CT1 output 0: Control output 1 0 0 Displayed when the optional
1: Control output 2 model has two current transformer
2: Event output 1 input points and the CT1
3: Event output 2 operation type is set to "heater
4: Event output 3 burnout detection" (C36 = 0).
CT1 measurement 30 to 300 ms 30 0
wait time
CT2 operation type Same as CT1 operation type 0 0 Displayed when the optional
model has two current
transformer input points.
CT2 output Same as CT1 output 0 0 Displayed when the optional
model has two current transformer
CT2 measurement Same as CT1 measurement wait 30 0 input points and the CT2
wait time time operation type is set to "heater
burnout detection" (C39 = 0).
Control output 1 Current output 1 0 Displayed when control
range 1: 4 to 20 mA output 1 of the model is the
2: 0 to 20 mA current output or continuous
Continuous voltage output voltage output.
1: 1 to 5 V The decimal point position
2: 0 to 5 V of the scaling low limit/high
3: 0 to 10 V limit becomes 1 digit after
Control output 1 0: MV 0 0 the decimal point when
type 1: Heat MV (for heat/cool control) the control output 1 type
2: Cool MV (for heat/cool control) is related to the MV and CT.
3: PV When the control output 1
4: PV before ratio, bias, and filter type is related to the PV and
5: SP SP, the decimal point position
6: Deviation becomes the same as that of
7: CT1 current value the PV.
8: CT2 current value The unit of scaling low limit/
9: MFB (including estimated MFB) high limit depends on the
10: SP+MV output type of control output 1.
11: PV+MV When the output type relative
to MV and MFB; %.
Control output 1 -1999 to +9999 0 0 When the ouput type relative
scaling low limit The decimal point position and unit to PV and SP; same as PV.
Control output 1 may vary depending on control 100.0 0 When the output type relative
scaling high limit output 1 type. CT; ampere (current value).
Control output 1 MV 0 to 9999 200 0 If the controller model uses
scalable bandwidth The decimal point position and unit current output for control
are same as for PV. output 1 and if the control
output 1 type is SP+MV or
PV+MV, this setting is displayed.
Control output 2 range Same as control output 1. 1 0 Displayed when control
output 2 of the model is the
Control output 2 type 3 0 current output or continuous
voltage output.
Control output 2 -1999 to +9999 0 0 The decimal point position
scaling low limit The decimal point position and unit and unit is same as that of
Control output 2 may vary depending on control 1000 0 control output 1.
scaling high limit output 2 type.
Control output 2 MV 0 to 9999 200 0 If the controller model uses current
scalable bandwidth The decimal point position and unit output for control output 2 and if
are same as for PV. the control output 2 type is SP+MV
or PV+MV, this setting is displayed.
6-14
Initial User
value level
Auxiliary output Same as control output 1. 1 0 Displayed when the auxiliary
range output of the model is the
Auxiliary output type 3 0 current output or continuous
voltage output.
Auxiliary output -1999 to +9999 (The decimal 0 0 The decimal point position
scaling low limit point position and unit may vary and unit is the same as that of
depending on the AUX type.) the control output 1.
Auxiliary output 1000 0
scaling high limitt
Auxiliary output MV 0 to 9999 200 0 If the controller model uses
scalable bandwidth The decimal point position and unit current output for the auxiliary
are same as for PV. output and if the auxiliary
output type is SP+MV or
PV+MV, this setting is displayed.
Position proportional 0: MFB control + Estimated position control 0 0 Displayed when the model
type 1: MFB control provides the position
2: Estimated position control (MFB disabled) proportional output.
3: Estimated position control (MFB disabled)
+ Position adjustment at power ON.
Position proportional 0.5 to 25.0 % 10.0 0
dead zone
Motor long life mode 0: Aiming at controllability 1 0
1: Aiming at service life of
potentiometer
Motor adjust 0: Stop 0 0 Displayed when the model
1: Start provides the position
proportional output.
The motor adjust is stopped
using the [disp] or [mode] key
through the control operation.
It is impossible to write data
through the loader.
Input with motor 0 to 9999 1000 0 Displayed when the model
fully closed provides the position
Input with motor 0 to 9999 3000 0 proportional output.
fully open It is impossible to write data
through the loader.
Motor full close-full 5.0 to 240.0 s 30.0 0
open time
Communication type 0: CPL 0 0 Displayed when the optional
1: Modbus (ASCII format) model has RS-485.
2: Modbus (RTU format)
Station address 0 to 127 (Communication is 0 0
disabled when set at "0".)
Transmission speed 0: 4800 bps 2 0
1: 9600 bps
2: 19200 bps
3: 38400 bps
Data format 0: 7 bits 1 0
(Data length) 1: 8 bits
Data format (Parity) 0: Even parity 0 0
1: Odd parity
2: No parity
• If ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank(I d02) is prior
to 2.04, SP+MV and PV+MV cannot be set in [Control output 1 type],
[Control output 2 type], and [Auxiliary output type ].
• If ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank(I d02) is prior to 2.04,
SP+MV and PV+MV cannot be set in [Control output 1 MV scaling range],
[Control output 2 MV scaling range], and [Auxiliary output MV scaling range].
6-15
Initial User
value level
Data format (Stop 0: 1 bit 0 0 Displayed when the optional
bit) 1: 2 bits model has RS-485.
Response time-out 1 to 250 ms 3 2
Key operation type 0: Standard type 0 2

1: Special type
[mode] key function 0: Invalid 1 0
1: AUTO/MANUAL selection
2: RUN/READY selection
3: AT Stop/Start
4: LSP group selection
5: Release all DO latches
7: Communication DI1 selection
8: Invalid
MODE display setup Whether or not the mode bank 255 1
setup is displayed is determined by
the sum of the following weights:
Bit 0: AUTO/MANUAL display
Bit 1: RUN/READY display
Bit 2: LSP/RSP display
Bit 3: AT stop/start displayDisabled:
0, Enabled: +8
Bit 4: Release all DO latches display
Bit 5: C ommunication DI1 ON/OFF display
Other invalid settings, 0, +64, +128
PV/SP display setup Whether or not the PV/SP value 15 1
related items are displayed in the
basic display mode is determined
by the sum of the following weights:
Bit 0: PV display
Bit 1: SP display
Bit 2: LSP group number display
Other invalid settings, 0, +8
MV display setup Whether or not the PV/SP value 15 1
related items are displayed in the
basic display mode is determined
by the sum of the following weights:
Bit 0: MV display
Bit 1: Heat MV/cool MV display
Bit 2: MFB display
Bit 3: AT progress display
Event setting value 0: Internal Event set value is not 0 1
display setup displayed in the operation display
mode.
1: S et value of Internal Event 1 is
displayed in the operation display
mode.
2: Set values of Internal Events 1 to
2 are displayed in the operation
display mode.
3: Set values of Internal Events 1 to
3 are displayed in the operation
display mode.
6-16
Initial User
value level
Event remaining 0: ON/OFF delay remaining time of 0 1
time display setup Internal Event is not displayed in
1: ON/OFF delay remaining time of
Internal Event 1 is displayed in the
2: ON/OFF delay remaining time
of Internal Events 1 to 2 are
mode.
3: ON/OFF delay remaining time
of Internal Events 1 to 3 are
mode.
CT input current 0: CT current value is not displayed 0 1
value display setup in the operation display mode.
1: CT1 current value is displayed in
2: CT1 to 2 current values are
mode.
User level 0: Basic configuration 0 1
1: Standard configuration
LED monitor 0: Not used. 0 2
1: Flashing while data is being sent
through RS-485 communication.
2: Flashing while data is being
received through RS-485
communication.
3: Logical OR of all DI statuses
4: Flashing in READY mode
MS indicating lamp 0: Normally open (Normally OFF=0) 39 2
ON condition 1: Normally close (Normally ON=1)
(1st priority) 2 to 9: Internal event 1 to 8
14: MV1 (ON/OFF, Time proportional
1, Heat-side, OPEN-side output)
15: MV2 (Time proportional 2, Cool-
side, CLOSE-side output)
18 to 21: DI1 to DI4
26 to 30: Internal contact 1 to 5
34 to 37: Communication DI1 to DI4
38: MANUAL
39: READY
40: RSP
41: AT
42: During ramp
43: Undefined.
44: Alarm
45: PV alarm
46: Undefined.
47: [mode] key pressing status
48: Event output 1 terminal status
49: Control output 1 terminal status
6-17
Initial User
value level
MS indicating lamp 0: Lit. 1 2
ON status 1: Slow flashing
(1st priority) 2: Flashing twice
3: Fast flashing
4: Left to right
5: Right to left
6: Reciprocating between left and right
7: Deviation OK
8: Deviation graph
9: MV graph
10: Heat-side MV graph (For heat/
cool control)
11: Cool-side MV graph (For heat/
cool control)
12: MFB graph (including MFB being
estimated)
13: DI monitor
14: Internal contact monitor
15: Internal event monitor
MS indicating lamp Same as Multi Status (MS) display, 44 2
ON condition Condition (top priority)
(2nd priority)
ON status Status (top priority)
(2nd priority)
ON condition Condition (top priority)
(3rd priority)
ON status Status (top priority)
(3rd priority)
MS indicating lamp 0 to 9999 U 5 2
deviation range
Special function 0 to 15 0 2
(This value becomes “0” when the
Zener barrier The value can be changed with the 0.00 2 Displayed when the PV range
adjustment adjustment. type is RTD and the special
The numeric value cannot be directly function (C88) is set at “5”.
input with the manual operation.
Number of CT1 turns 0: 800 turns 8 2 If the controller model has 2
1 to 40: CT turns devided by 100. current transformer inputs,
Number of CT1 0: 1 time 1 2 this setting is displayed.
power wire loops 1 to 6: Number of times
Number of CT2 turns 0: 800 turns 8 2
1 to 40: CT turns devided by 100.
Number of CT2 0: 1 time 1 2
power wire loops 1 to 6: Number of times
PV input failure 0: –10 %FS 0 0 If ROM version 1 in the
(under range) type 1: –5 mV (This setting is applicable if instrument information bank
C0 1 (PV input range type) is set for (i d02 ) is 2.26 or earlier,
sensor type B (No. 17) or PR40-20 (No. this item cannot be selected.
23).)
• If ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank(I d02) is prior to
2.04, the setting options for [Number of CT1 turns], [Number of CT1
power wire loops], [Number of CT2 turns] and [Number of CT2 power
wire loops] are not displayed.
6-18
Event configuration bank

Bank selection:
Initial User
value level
Internal Event 1 0: No event 0 0
Configuration 1 1: PV high limit
Operation type 2: PV low limit
3: PV high/low limit
4: Deviation high limit
6: Deviation high/low limit
7: Deviation high limit
9: Deviation high/low limit
10: SP high limit
11: SP low limit
12: SP high/low limit
13: MV high limit
14: MV low limit
15: MV high/low limit
16: CT1 heater burnout/over-current
17: CT1 heater short-circuit
18: CT2 heater burnout/over-current
19: CT2 heater short-circuit
23: Alarm (status)
24: READY (status)
25: MANUAL (status)
26: RSP (status)
27: During AT execution (status)
28: During SP ramp (status)
29: Control direct action (status)
30: ST setting standby (status)
(Invalid in this unit.)
31: During estimate of motor
opening (status)
32: Timer (status)
33: High and low limits of MFB value
Internal Event 1 Digits are assigned from right to left 0000 0
Configuration 2 in the order 1, 2, 3, 4.
1st digit: Direct/ 0: Direct
Reverse 1: Reverse
2nd digit: Standby 0: None
1: Standby
2: Standby + Standby at SP change
3rd digit: EVENT state 0: Continue
at READY 1: Forced OFF
4th digit: Undefined 0
2.04, “33” cannot be set as [Internal Event configuration 1 operation type].
6-19
Initial User
value level
Internal Event Digits are assigned from right to left 0000 2
Configuration 3 in the order 1, 2, 3, 4.
1st digit: Controller 0: None
alarm OR 1: Alarm direct + OR operation
2: Alarm direct + AND operation
3: Alarm reverse + OR operation
4: Alarm reverse + AND operation
2nd digit: Special 0: As usual.
OFF setup 1: When the event set value (main
setting) is “0”, the event is “OFF”.
3rd digit: Delay unit 0: 0.1 s
1: 1 s
2: 1 min
4th digit: Undefined. 0
Internal Event 2 Same as Internal Event 1 0 0
Configuration 1 Configuration 1.
Operation type
1st digit: D irect/ Reverse
2nd digit: Standby
3rd digit: EVENT state
at READY
4th digit: Undefined.
1st digit: Controller alarm OR
2nd digit: Special OFF setup
3rd digit: Delay unit
Operation type
2nd digit: Standby
3rd digit: E VENT state
at READY
1st digit: C ontroller
alarm OR
Operation type
2nd digit: Standby
3rd digit: E VENT state
at READY
alarm OR
Operation type
6-20
Initial User
value level
2nd digit: Standby
3rd digit: E VENT state at
READY
1st digit: Controller
alarm OR
2nd digit: Special
OFF setup
Operation type
2nd digit: Standby
READY
alarm OR
Operation type
2nd digit: Standby
READY
1st digit: Controller
alarm OR
2nd digit: Special
OFF setup
Operation type
2nd digit: Standby
READY
alarm OR
6-21
DI Assignment bank

Bank selection:
Initial User
value level
Internal Contact 1 0: No function 0 0
Operation type 1: LSP group selection (0/+1)
4: PID group selection (0/+1)
7: RUN/READY selection
8: AUTO/MANUAL selection
10: AT Stop/Start
11: Invalid
12: Control action direct/reverse
selection (As setting/opposite
operation of setting)
13: SP RAMP enabled/disabled
14: PV Hold (No-hold/Hold)
15: PV maximum value hold (No-
hold/Hold)
16: PV minimum value hold (No-
hold/Hold)
17: Timer Stop/Start
18: Release all DO latches (Continue/
Release)
19: Advance (No-advance/Advance)
20: Step hold (No-hold/Hold)
Internal Contact 1 0: Not used (Default input) 0 2 When using internal contact
Input bit function 1: Function 1 ((A and B) or (C and D)) 1, the default input is digital
2: Function 2 ((A or B) and (C or D)) input (DI) 1.
3: Function 3 (A or B or C or D)
6-22
Initial User
value level
Internal Contact 1 0: Normally opened. (OFF, 0) 2 2 Displayed when internal
Input assignment A 1: Normally closed. (ON, 1) contact 1 Input bit function is
Internal Contact 1 2: DI1 0 2 set 1 to 4 (DI 1.2 ≠0).
Input assignment B 3: DI2
Internal Contact 1 4: DI3 0 2
Input assignment C 5: DI4
Internal Contact 1 6 to 9: Undefined. 0 2
Input assignment D 10: Internal Event 1
22: MANUAL mode
23: READY mode
24: RSP mode
25: AT running
26: During SP ramp
27: Undefined.
28: Alarm occurs.
30: Undefined.
Internal Contact 1 Digits are assigned from right to left 0000 2 Displayed when internal
Polarity A to D in the order 1, 2, 3, 4. contact 1 Input bit function is
1st digit: Polarity A 0: Direct set 1 to 4 (DI 1.2 ≠0).
(Polarity of Input 1: Reverse
assignment A)
2nd digit: Polarity
B (Polarity of Input
assignment B)
3rd digit: Polarity
C (Polarity of Input
assignment C)
4th digit: Polarity
D (Polarity of Input
assignment D)
Internal Contact 1 0: Direct 0 2
Polarity 1: Reverse
Internal Contact 1 0: Every Internal Event 0 2 Displayed when the
Event channel def. 1 to 8: Internal Event No. operation type of internal
contact 1 is timer stop/start
(DI 1. 1 = 17).
Internal Contact 2 Same as Internal Contact 1 0 0
Operation type Operation type.
Internal Contact 2 Same as Internal Contact 1 Input bit 0 2 When using internal contact
Input bit function function. 2, the default input is digital
0: Not used. (Default input) input (DI) 2.
1 to 4: Function 1 to 4
6-23
Initial User
value level
Internal Contact 2 Same as Internal Contact 1 Input 3 2 Displayed when internal
Input assignment A assignment A to D. contact 2 Input bit function is
Internal Contact 2 0 2 set 1 to 4 (DI 2.2 ≠0).
Input assignment B
Internal Contact 2 0 2
Input assignment C
Input assignment D
Internal Contact 2 Same as Internal Contact 1 Polarity 0000 2
Polarity A to D A to D
1st digit: Polarity A The following setting applies to
2nd digit: Polarity B each digit:
3rd digit: Polarity C 0: Direct
4th digit: Polarity D 1: Reverse
Polarity 1: Reverse
(DI 2. 1 = 17).
Input assignment A assignment A to D. contact 3 Input bit function is
Input assignment B
Input assignment C
Input assignment D
Polarity 1: Reverse
(DI 3. 1 = 17).
6-24
Initial User
value level
Input assignment A assignment A to D. contact 4 input bit function is
Input assignment B
Input assignment C
Input assignment D
Polarity 1: Reverse
(DI 4. 1 = 17).
Input bit function function. 4, the default input is invalid.
0: Not used. (Default input)
Input assignment A assignment A to D. contact 5 input bit function is
Input assignment B
Input assignment C
Input assignment D
Polarity 1: Reverse
(DI 5. 1 = 17).
6-25
DO Assignment bank

Bank selection:
Initial User
value level
Control output 1 0: Default output 0 2 Displayed when control
Operation type 1: MV 1 (ON/OFF control output, output 1 of the model is
time proportional output, and relay output or voltage pulse
time proportional output (heat) of output.
Heat/Cool control.) When using control output 1,
2: MV2 (Time proportional output the default output is MV1.
(cool) of Heat/Cool control)
3: Function 1 ((A and B) or (C and D))
4: Function 2 ((A or B) and (C or D))
5: Function 3 (A or B or C or D)
Control output 1 0: Normally opened. (OFF, 0) 14 2 Displayed when control
Output assignment A 1: Normally closed. (ON, 1) output 1 of the model is
2: Internal Event 1 relay output or voltage pulse
3: Internal Event 2 output, and the operation
4: Internal Event 3 type of control output 1 is set
5: Internal Event 4 1 to 4 (Ot 1. 1 > 2).
6: Internal Event 5
7: Internal Event 6
Control output 1 8: Internal Event 7 0 2
Output assignment B 9: Internal Event 8
14: MV1
15: MV2
18: DI1
19: DI2
20: DI3
Control output 1 21: DI4 0 2
Output assignment C 22 to 25: Undefined.
26: Internal Contact 1
Control output 1 34: Communication DI1 0 2
Output assignment D 35: Communication DI2
38: MANUAL mode
39: READY mode
40: RSP mode
41: AT running
42: During SP ramp
43: Undefined.
44: Alarm occurs.
46: Undefined.
Control output 2 Digits are assigned from right to left 0000 2
Polarity A to D in the order 1, 2, 3, 4.
1st digit: Polarity A 0: Direct
2nd digit: Polarity B 1: Reverse
3rd digit: Polarity C
4th digit: Polarity D
Control output 1 0: Direct 0 2
Polarity 1: Reverse
Control output 1 0: None 0 2
Latch 1: Latch (Latch at ON)
2: Latch (Latch at OFF except for
initialization at power ON)
6-26
Initial User
value level
Control output 2 Same as Control output 1 Operation 0 2 Displayed when the control
Operation type type. output of the model is set
0: Default output to the position proportional
1: MV1 output or the control output
2: MV2 2 of the model is voltage
3 to 6: Function 1 to 4 pulse output.
When using control output 2,
the default output is MV2.
Control output 2 Same as Control output 1 Output 15 2 Displayed when control
Output assignment A assignment A to D. output 2 of the model is set
Control output 2 0 2 to the voltage pulse output
Output assignment B and the operation type of
Control output 2 0 2 control output 2 is set 1 to 4
Output assignment C (Ot2. 1 > 2).
Control output 2 0 2
Output assignment D
Control output 2 Same as Control output 1 Polarity 0000 2
Polarity A to D A to D.
Control output 2 0: Direct 0 2
Polarity 1: Reverse
Control output 2 0: None 0 2
Event output 1 Same as Control output 1 Operation 0 2 Displayed when the optional
Operation type type. model has Event output 1.
0: Default output When using Event output 1,
1: MV1 the default output is Internal
2: MV2 Event 1.
Event output 1 Same as Control output 1 Output 2 2 Displayed when the optional
Output assignment A assignment A to D. model has Event output 1
Event output 1 0 2 and the operation type of
Output assignment B Event output 1 is set 1 to 4
Event output 1 0 2 (Ev 1. 1 > 2).
Output assignment C
Event output 1 0 2
Output assignment D
Event output 1 Same as Control output 1 Polarity 0000 2
Event output 1 0: Direct 0 2
Polarity 1: Reverse
Event output 1 0: None 0 2
6-27
Initial User
value level
2: MV2 Event 2.
Event output 2 0 2 (Ev2. 1 > 2).
Output assignment C
Event output 2 0 2
Output assignment D
Polarity 1: Reverse
2: MV2 Event 3.
Event output 3 0 2 (Ev3. 1 > 2).
Output assignment C
Event output 3 0 2
Output assignment D
Polarity 1: Reverse
6-28
User Function bank

Bank selection:
Initial User
value level
User Function 1 Each setting is set on the upper ---- 1 It is possible to register only
display. the settings, which can be
User Function 2 The following shows the setting ---- 1
displayed.
User Function 3 exceptions: ---- 1 (Example: Manual reset
---- : Not registered. of the PID constant can
User Function 4 P- _ : Proportional band of ---- 1
currently used PID group be registered when the I
User Function 5 I - - : Integral time of currently ---- 1 (Integral time) is set at “0”.)
used PID group The registered setting is
User Function 6 d- - : Derivative time of currently ---- 1
added to the end of the
User Function 7 used PID group ---- 1 display order of the basic
rE- - : Manual reset of currently display.
User Function 8 used PID group ---- 1
OL- - : Output low limit of
currently used PID
OH- - : Output high limit of
currently used PID group
P- - C : Proportional band for cool
side of currently used PID
group
I - - C : Integration time for cool
group
d- - C : Derivative time for cool side
OL. - C : Output low limit for cool side
OH. - C : Output high limit for cool
group
6-29
Lock bank

Bank selection:
Initial User
value level
Key lock 0: All settings are possible. 0 0 When two sets of passwords
1: Mode, event, operation display, (1A and 1B, 2A and 2B) are
SP, UF, lock, and manual MV can matched, the setting is
be set. possible.
2: Operation display, SP, UF, lock,
[mode] key operation, MV
and manual MV can be set.
setting in MANUAL mode, key
3: UF, lock, and manual MV can be set.
lock, password display, and
Communication lock 0: RS-485 communication read/ 0 2
password 1A to 2B can be set
write enabled.
when the key lock (LOC ) is a
1: RS-485 communication read/
value of 0 to 3.
write disabled.
Loader lock 0: Loader communication read/ 0 2
write enabled.
1: Loader communication read/
write disabled.
Password display 0 to 15 0 0
5: Password 1A to 2B display
Password 1A 0000 to FFFF (Hexadecimal value) 0000 0 Displayed when the password
display (PASS ) is “5” and two
Password 2A 0000 to FFFF (Hexadecimal value) 0000 0
sets of passwords (1A and 1B,
2A and 2B) are matched.
Password 1B 0000 to FFFF (Hexadecimal value) 0000 0 Displayed when the password
display (PASS ) is “5”.
Password 2B 0000 to FFFF (Hexadecimal value) 0000 0

Bank selection:
Initial User
value level
ROM ID 2 fixed ---- 2 Identification of ROM
firmware setting is disabled.
ROM Version 1 XX.XX (2 digits after decimal point) ---- 2
ROM Version 2 XX.XX (2 digits after decimal point) ---- 2
LOADER Information ---- 2
EST Information ---- 2
Manufacturing date Year - 2000 ---- 2 Manufacturing date and unit
code (year) Example: "3" means the year 2003. identification No. setting is
Manufacturing date Month + Day ÷ 100. ---- 2 disabled.
code (month, day) Example: "12.01" means the 1st day
of December.
Serial No. ---- 2
6-30
7 - 1 Outline of Communication
If the optional model is provided with the RS-485 communication function, communication with a PC, PLC or
other host devices are available using a user-configured program.
The communication protocol can be selected from the Controller Peripheral Link (CPL) communication (Azbil
Corporation's host communication protocol) and the Modbus communication. This chapter describes the CPL
communications.
Features

The features of the SDC35/36's communication function are as follows:
• Up to 31 units can be connected to a single master station as a host device.
• When the communication specifications of the host device conform to the
RS-232C interface, the communication converter CMC10L (sold separately) is
required. The CMC10L allows the conversion between RS-232C and RS-485.
• Almost all of the device parameters can be communicated.
For details on communication parameters,
Chapter 9. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA.
• Random access commands are available.
Two or more number of parameters at separated addresses can be read or written
by a single command.
Setup

The following setups are required for performing the CPL communications:
The items on the table below can be displayed and set up only when the optional
model number is provided with the RS-485 communication function.
Item Display Contents Initial User

(Setting display/bank) value level
Communication type 0: CPL 0 Basic,
(Setup setting/Setup 1: Modbus ASCII format Standard,
bank) 2: Modbus RTU format High function
Station address 0: Does not communicate 0
(Same as above) 1 to 127
Transmission speed 0: 4800 bps 2
(Same as above) 1: 9600 bps
2: 19200 bps
3: 38400 bps
Data format (Data length) 0: 7 bits 1
(Same as above) 1: 8 bits
Data format (Parity) 0: Even parity 0
(Same as above) 1: Odd parity
2: No parity
Data format (Stop bit) 0: 1 stop bit 0
(Same as above) 1: 2 stop bits
Response time-out 1 to 250 ms 3 High function
• Setups can be performed through key operation on the console or the
SLP-C35 Smart Loader Package. However, they cannot be performed via
RS-485 communications.
• If you use the Azbil Corporation CMC10L as an RS-232C/RS-485 converter,
set the response time-out (C70) to 3ms or longer.
7-1

The communication procedure is as follows:
(1) The instruction message is sent from the host device (master station) to one
unit (slave station) to communicate with.
(2) The slave station receives the instruction message, and performs read or write
processing according to the content of the message.
(3) The slave station sends a message corresponding to the processing content as a
response message.
(4) The master station receives the response message.
It is not allowed to use two or more number of protocols together on a
single RS-485 transmission line such as CPL, Modbus ASCII format, and
Modbus RTU format.
7-2
7 - 2 Message Structure

Message structure

The following shows the message structure:
Messages are broadly classified into two layers; the data link layer and the
application layer.
• Data link layer
This layer contains the basic information required for the communication such
as the destination of the communication message and the check information of
the message.
• Application layer
Data is read and written in this layer. The content of the layer varies according
to the purpose of the message.
Messages comprise parts (1) to (8) as shown in the figure below.
The command (details sent from the master station) and the response (details
returned from the slave station) are stored in the application layer.
02H 58H 03H 0DH 0AH
STX X ETX CR LF
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
Data link layer Application layer Data link layer
1 frame
(1) STX (start of message) (6) ETX (end of command/response)
(2) Station address (7) Checksum
(3) Sub-address (8) Delimiter (end of message)
(4) Device code
(5) Send message = command,
response message = response
Data link layer

Outline
zz
The data link layer is of a fixed length. The position of each data item and the
number of its characters are already decided. Note, however, that the data positions
of the data link layer from ETX onwards shift according to the number of characters
in the application layer. The character length, however, remains unchanged.
Response start conditions

zz
• The device sends the response message only when (1) message structure, station
address, sub-address, checksum and message length of a single frame in the data
link layer are all correct. If even one of these is incorrect, no response messages
are sent, and the device waits for new message.
• Number of word addresses accessible by a single frame
Type Description of command RAM area EEPROM area

RS Decimal format read command 16 16
WS Decimal format write command 16 16
RD Hexadecimal format read command 28 28
WD Hexadecimal format write command 27 16
RU Hexadecimal format random read command 28 28
WU Hexadecimal format random write command 14 14
7-3
List of data link layer data definitions

zz
The following list shows the definitions for data in the data link layer:
Data name Character code Number of Meaning of data

characters
STX 02H 1 Start of message
Station 0 to 7FH are expressed as 2 Identification of device
address hexadecimal character codes. to communicate with
Sub-address "00" (30H, 30H) 2 No function
Device code "X" (58H) or "x" (78H) 1 Device type
ETX ETX (03H) 1 End position of the
application layer
Checksum 00H to FFH are expressed as two- 2 Checksum of message
digit hexadecimal character codes.
Delimiter CR (0DH), LF (0AH) 2 End of message
Description of data items

zz
• STX (02H)
When STX is received, the device judges this to be the start of the send message.
For this reason, the device returns to the initial state whatever reception state
it was in, and processing is started on the assumption that the STX, the first
character, has been received. The purpose of this is to enable recovery of the
device's response at the next correct message (e.g. RETRY message) from the
master station in the event that noise, for example, causes an error in the sent
message.
• Station address
Of the messages sent by the master station, the device creates response messages
only when station addresses are the same. Station addresses in the messages are
expressed as two-digit hexadecimal characters.
The station address is set up by the station address setup (setup setting C65).
However, when the station address is set to 0 (30H 30H), the device creates no
response even if station addresses match.
The device returns the same station address as that of the received message.
• Sub-address
The device does not use the sub-address. For this reason, set "00" (30H 30H).
The device returns the same sub-address as that of the received message.
• Device code
The device sets X (58H) or x (78H) as the device code. This code is determined
for each device series, and other codes cannot be selected. The device returns the
same device code as that of the received message. X (58H) is used as the default,
and x (78H) is used for judging the message as the resend message.
• ETX
ETX indicates the end of the application layer.
• Checksum
This value is for checking whether or not some abnormality (e.g. noise) causes
the message content to change during communications.
The checksum is expressed as two hexadecimal characters.
7-4
• How to calculate a checksum
(1) Add the character codes in the message from STX through ETX in single
byte units.
(2) Take two's complement of the low-order one byte of the addition result.
(3) Convert the obtained two's complement to a two-byte ASCII code.
The following is a sample checksum calculation:

[Sample message]
STX: 02H
'0': 30H (1st byte of the station address)
'1': 31H (2nd byte of the station address)
'0': 30H (1st byte of the sub-address)
'0': 30H (2nd byte of the sub-address)
'X': 58H (device code)
'R': 52H (1st byte of the command)
'S': 53H (2nd byte of the command)
',': 2CH (3rd byte of the command)
'1': 31H (4th byte of the command)
'W': 57H (8th byte of the command)
',': 2CH (9th byte of the command)
(omitted)
ETX: 03H
(1) Add the character codes in the message from STX through ETX in single
byte units.
The add operation in single byte units is as follows:
02H + 30H + 31H + 30H + 30H + 58H + 52H + 53H + • • • + 03H.
Assume that the result is 376H.
(2) The low-order one byte of the addition result 376H is 76H. The two's
complement of 76H is 8AH.
(3) Convert the obtained 8AH to a two-byte ASCII code.

The result is:
'8': 38H
'A': 41H,
and the two bytes, '8'(38H) and 'A'(41H), are the checksum.
• Delimiter (CR/LF)
This indicates the end of the message. Immediately after LF is received, the
device enters a state allowed to process the received message
7-5
Application layer

The table below shows the configuration of the application layer.
Item Description
Command "RS" (decimal number format continuous address data read command)
"WS" (decimal number format continuous address data write command)
"RD" (hexadecimal number format continuous address data read command)
"WD" (hexadecimal number format continuous address data write command)
"RU" (hexadecimal number format random address data read command)
"WU" (hexadecimal number format random address data write command)
Data delimiter RS, WS: "," (comma)
Other commands: None
Word address RS, WS: "501W", etc.
Other commands: "01F5", etc.
Read count RS, WS: Numerical value of characters expressed as "1" for example
Other commands: Numerical value of characters expressed in
hexadecimal as "0001" for example
Numerical RS, WS: Numerical value of characters expressed as "100" for example
value to be Other commands: Numerical value of characters expressed in
written hexadecimal as "0064" for example
7-6
7 - 3 Description of Commands

Continuous data read command (RS command)

This command reads data of continuous addresses by a single command.
Send message
zz
This command enables the content of continuous data addresses starting with the
specified read start address to be read as a single message. The figure below shows
the structure of the application layer of the send message when the data is read.
R S , 1 5 0 1 W , 1
(1) (2) (3) (2) (4)
Application layer
(1) Continuous read command

(2) Data delimiter
(3) Data address
(4) Number of read data
Response message
zz
If the message is correctly received, a response message corresponding to the
command content is returned.
The figure below shows the structure of the application layer of the response
message when the data is read.
• Normal termination (reading of single data item)

0 0 ,
(1) (2) (3)
• Normal termination (reading of multiple data items)

0 0 , , ,
(1) (2) (3) (2) (4) (2) (5)
• Abnormal termination
X X The abnormal termination code is entered at XX.
For details of codes,
(1)
7 - 6 List of Termination Codes (p. 7-15).
(1) Termination code
(2) Data delimiter
(3) Data
(4) Data 2 to (n-1)
(5) Data n
Maximum number of read data per message

zz
Up to 16 words for both RAM and EEPROM areas
7-7
Continuous data write command (WS command)

This command writes data to continuous addresses.
Send message
zz
The figure below shows the structure of the application layer of the send message
for the data write command.
W S , 1 5 0 1 W , 1 , 6 5
(1) (2) (3) (2) (4) (2) (5)
(1) Write command

(2) Data delimiter
(3) Start write data address
(4) Write data (first word)
(5) Write data (second word)
Response message
zz
The figure below shows the structure of the application layer of the response
message for the data write command.
• Normal termination
0 0
(1)
• Abnormal termination or warning

(1)
Maximum number of write data per message

zz
7-8
Fixed length continuous data read command (RD command)

This command reads continuous data in two-byte units. This command is suitable
for handling data in ladder programs sent by PLC communications as the data is of
a fixed length.
The start data address is expressed as four hexadecimal digits. The number of read
data is expressed as four digits, and data is expressed as four X n (n is a positive
integer) hexadecimal digits.
Send message
zz
The read start data address (four hexadecimal digits) and the number of read data
(four hexadecimal digits) are sent.
R D
(1) (2) (3)
(1) Fixed length continuous data read command

(2) Start data address
Response message
zz
If the message is sent successfully, the termination code is taken to be normal
(two decimal digits) and returned appended with the number of read data (four
hexadecimal digits X number of read data) specified by the command. If message
transmission ends in error, the termination code is taken to be in error (two
decimal digits) and returned without the read data.
• Normal termination (reading of single data item)
0 0
(1) (2)
• Normal termination (reading of multiple data items)

0 0
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(1)
(2) Data
(3) Data 2 to data (n-1)
(4) Data n

zz
7-9
Fixed length continuous data write command (WD command)

This command writes continuous data in two-byte units. This command is suitable
for handling data in ladder programs sent by PLC communications as the data is of
a fixed length.
The start data address is expressed as four hexadecimal digits. Data is expressed as
four X n (n is a positive integer) hexadecimal digits.
Send message
zz
The write start data address (four hexadecimal digits) and the number of write data
(four X n hexadecimal digits) are sent.
• Writing of single data item

W D
(1) (2) (3)
• Writing of multiple data items

W D
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(1) Fixed length continuous data write command

(3) Data 1
(5) Data n
Response message
zz
If writing is successful, the normal termination code (two decimal digits) is
returned. If only part of the data is written, and the remaining data is not written,
the warning termination code (two decimal digits) is returned. If none of the data
is written, the abnormal termination code (two decimal digits) is returned.
0 0
(1)

(1)

zz
RAM area: Up to 27 words
EEPROM area: Up to 16 words
7-10
Fixed length random data read command (RU command)

This command reads random data in two-byte units.
Send message
zz
The data address (four hexadecimal digits) of the data to be read is sent in the
specified order.
R U 0 0
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(1) Fixed length random data write command

(2) Sub-command: fixed to "00".
(3) Data address 1
(4) Data address 2 to (n-1)
(5) Data address n
Response message
zz
If the message is sent successfully, the termination code is taken to be normal
(two decimal digits) and returned appended with the number of read data (four
hexadecimal digits X number of read data) specified by the command. If message
transmission ends in error, the termination code is taken to be in error (two
decimal digits) and returned without the read data.
0 0
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(1)
(2) Data 1
(4) Data n

zz
7-11
Fixed length random data write command (WU command)

This command writes data to random addresses in two-byte units. Data is expressed
in four hexadecimal digits.
Send message
zz
Data is sent for the specified number of write data with the data address (four
hexadecimal digits) of the data to be written and the data (four hexadecimal digits)
as a pair.
W U 0 0
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(1) Fixed length random data write command

(2) Sub-command: fixed to "00".
(3) Data address 1
(4) Write data 1
(5) Data address n
(6) Write data n
Response message
zz
If writing is successful, the normal termination code (two decimal digits) is
returned. If only part of the data is written, and the remaining data is not written,
the warning termination code (two decimal digits) is returned. If none of the data
is written, the abnormal termination code (two decimal digits) is returned.
0 0
(1)

(1)

zz
7-12
7 - 4 Definition of Data Addresses

RAM and EEPROM areas of data addresses
zz
Data addresses are categorized as follows:
Data address Name Notes

(hexadecimal notation)
273W to 14859W RAM access data address Reading and writing of these addresses are both
(0111 to 3A0B) performed on RAM.
Since writing is not performed to EEPROM, the value
returns to that stored in EEPROM after restarted.
16657W to 31243W EEPROM access data Writing is performed to both RAM and EEPROM;
(4111 to 7A0B) address reading is performed only on RAM. Since writing is also
performed to EEPROM, the value does not change even
after restarted.
EEPROM’s erase/write cycles are limited to about 100,000. Accordingly, it is
recommended that very frequently written parameters be written to
RAM, which does not have a limitation on cycles.
Note, with regard to writing to RAM, that data in EEPROM is transferred to RAM
when the power is turned ON again.
Write data range

zz
If the write value exceeds the range determined by parameters, writing is not
performed and an abnormal termination code is returned.
Write conditions
zz
An abnormal termination code is also returned when the writing is not possible due
to the conditions.
7-13
7 - 5 Numeric Representation in the Application Layer

The specifications of numeric representation are decimal variable-length (zero suppress) for RS and WS commands
and hexadecimal fixed-length for RD, WD, RU and WU commands. Details are as follows:
RS and WS commands
zz
Item Specifications Remedies
Unwanted space Cannot be appended. The message processing is
Unwanted zero Cannot be appended. aborted and an abnormal
Numerical value = zero Cannot be omitted. termination code is
Be sure to use "0". returned as a response
message.
Other unwanted Numerical values may be prefixed
characters with a "-" expressing a negative
number. Any other character
cannot be appended. The "+" sign
must not be appended to indicate
positive numerical values.
Range of available -32768 to +32767
numerical values Values out of this range are not
allowed.
RD, WD, RU and WU commands

zz
Item Specifications Remedies
Unwanted space Cannot be appended. The message processing is
Unwanted zero Cannot be appended. aborted and an abnormal
Numerical value = zero Cannot be omitted. termination code is
Be sure to use "0000". returned as a response
message.
Other unwanted Cannot be appended.
characters
Range of available 0000H to FFFFH
numerical values
7-14
7 - 6 List of Termination Codes

When an error occurred in the application layer, an abnormal termination code is returned as a response message.
Termination Description Remedies Example

code
00 Normal termination All the processing has normally
completed.
99 Undefined command Only the termination code is returned AA,1001W,1
Other error but the message processing is not RX03E80001
performed.
10 Conversion error of a numerical value Processing is aborted just when a RS,1001W,100000
• A numerical value of 7 digits or more conversion error or a range error has RS,01001W,1
• A figure other than 0 of which the occurred. RS,+1001W,1
leading digit is 0 (Processing is performed just before an WS,10?1W,1
• The conversion result is 65535 or error has occurred.) RD03E9000>
greater, or -65536 or smaller. RU0103E9
• Other obvious illegal representation
of an integer
22 The value of written data is out of the Processing is continued excluding the (Example: Specified
specified range. data address with abnormal data. range for 5001W is
0 to 1)
(Processing
aborted)
WS,5001W,3000
WD13890BB8
WU0013890BB8
23 Writing disabled due to instrument set Processing is continued excluding the
value conditions, instrument external data address with abnormal data.
conditions, etc.
Writing/reading disabled because Only the termination code is returned
communications/loader locked but the message processing is not
performed.
40 Read/write word count error Only the termination code is returned RS,1001W,100
but the message processing is not RD03E90064
performed.
41 Data address is out of the range. Only the termination code is returned RS,100000W,1
• Out of the range between 256 and but the message processing is not RD03G90001
65534 performed. RU00$3E903EA
WS,03E9W,1
WD0XXX0001
WU00o3E9001
42 Value of data is out of the specified Processing is performed up to the WS,2101W,100,XXX
range. data address with abnormal data; WS,2101W,100000
• -32769 or smaller, or 32768 or greater the succeeding processing is not WD03E900010XXX
performed.
7-15
7 - 7 Reception and Transmission Timing

Timing specifications for instruction and response message

The cautions below are required with regard to the timing to transmit a instruction
message from the master station and a response message from the slave station.
Response monitor time

zz
The maximum response time from the end of the instruction message transmission
by the master station until when the master station receives a response message
from the slave station is two seconds ((1) in the figure below). So, the response
monitor time should be set to two seconds.
Generally, when a response time-out occurs, the instruction message is resent.
Transmission start time

zz
A wait time of 10ms is required before the master station starts to transmit the next
instruction message (to the same slave station or a different slave station) after the
end of receiving response message ((2) in the figure below).
• RS-485 3-wire system (1) (2)
Transmis- Instruction Response Instruction Response

sion line message message message message
(1) End of master station transmission -

Transmission start time of slave station = Max. 2000 ms
(2) End of slave station transmission -
Transmission start time of master station = Min. 10 ms
RS-485 driver control timing specifications

When the transmission/reception on the RS-485 3-wire system is directly
controlled by the master station, care should be paid to the following timing:
(1) (4)
Master station
driver control (enable) (disable)
Transmission Effective Effective

line data data
(instruction (response
Slave station message) message)
driver control (disable) (enable)
(2) (3)
End of master End of slave

station transmission station transmission
(1) End of master station transmission - Driver disable time = Max. 500 μs
(2) End of slave station reception - Driver enable time = Response time-out
setup setting (C70) or greater
(3) End of slave station transmission - Driver disable time = Max. 10 ms
(4) End of master station reception - Driver enable time = Min. 10 ms
7-16
7 - 8 Cautions when Making Communication Programs for the

Master Station
Pay attention to the following points when making communication programs:
• The longest response time on the device is two seconds. For this reason, set the response monitor time to two
seconds.
• Resend the same message if there is no response within two seconds. Set a communication error to occur if
there is no response even after two retries.
• Be sure to make the above resends to guard against the case when the message cannot be send correctly due to
the influence of noise, for example, during communications.
Note
When the master station resends the message, alternatively use the device ID codes
"X" and "x." This is convenient as you can tell whether or not the received message
is the previously received message.
Example of communications program

A sample program is installed in the folder in which the SLP-C35 Smart Loader
Package has been installed.
In the default setting, the directory is "c:¥program files¥slp¥slpc35¥cpl.cpp".
This program is written in C++. Microsoft’s Visual C++ 2008 can be used to
compile it.
The program is supplied for purposes of reference to assist the user in making a
program, and its operation is not 100 % guaranteed.
You can download Visual C++ 2008 Express Edition from the Microsoft website at
http://www.microsoft.com/express/.
Azbil Corporation assumes no responsibility with regard to any trouble caused
by using this program.
Prior to running the sample program

zz
Make sure to check the settings for communications type, station address,
transmission speed and data format of the instrument.
Compiling
zz
At the Visual Studio 2008 command prompt, enter “cl” to begin compiling.
Example of compilation result
C:\sample>cl cpl.cpp
Microsoft(R) 32-bit C/C++ Optimizing Compiler Version 15.00.30729.01 for 80x86
Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
cpl.cpp
Microsoft (R) Incremental Linker Version 9.00.30729.01
Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
/out:cpl.exe
cpl.obj
7-17
Running the sample program

zz
This program is used for reading and writing data. When the program is
executed, the application layers of the instruction message and response message
communicated are indicated.
command:RS,14356W,2
result:00,0,0
command:WS,14357W,2
result:00
Sample indication of execution results
Processing of the sample program

zz
• Communication settings
Call open() and initialize the RS-232C serial port.
• Command execution
Set a desired character string in 'command' and call AppCPL().
7-18
8 - 1 Outline of Communication
If the optional model is provided with the RS-485 communications function, communication with a PC, PLC or
other host devices are available using a user-configured program.
The communication protocol can be selected from the Controller Peripheral Link (CPL) communication (Azbil
Corporation's host communication protocol) and the Modbus communication. This chapter describes the Modbus
communications.
Features

The features of the C35/36's communication function are as follows:
• Up to 31 units can be connected to a single master station as a host device.
• Almost all of the device parameters can be communicated.
For details on communication parameters,
Chapter 9. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA.
Setup

The following setups are required for performing the Modbus communication:
Item Display Contents Initial User

(Setting display/bank) value level
Communication type 0: CPL 0 Basic,
(Setup setting/Setup 1: Modbus ASCII format Standard,
bank) 2: Modbus RTU format High
Station address 0: Does not communicate 0 function
(Same as above) 1 to 127
Transmission speed 0: 4800 bps 2
(Same as above) 1: 9600 bps
2: 19200 bps
3: 38400 bps
Data format (Data length) 0: 7 bits 1
(Same as above) 1: 8 bits
Data format (Parity) 0: Even parity 0
(Same as above) 1: Odd parity
2: No parity
Data format (Stop bit) 0: 1 stop bit 0
(Same as above) 1: 2 stop bits
Response time-out 1 to 250 ms 3 High function
• If the optional model number is provided with the RS-485 communications

function, display and setup are available.
• If the communications type is set to Modbus RTU format, data format (data
length) cannot be displayed nor set up, and the action is fixed to 8-bit data.
• Setups can be performed through key operation on the console or the
SLP-C35 Smart Loader Package. However, they cannot be performed via
RS-485 communications.
8-1

The communication procedure is as follows:
(1) The instruction message is sent from the host device (master station) to one
unit (slave station) to communicate with.
(2) The slave station receives the instruction message, and performs read or write
processing according to the content of the message.
(3) The slave station sends a message corresponding to the processing content as a
response message.
(4) The master station receives the response message.
It is not allowed to use two or more number of protocols together on a
single RS-485 transmission line such as CPL, Modbus ASCII format, and
Modbus RTU format.
8-2
8 - 2 Message Structure

Message structure

This section describes the message structure.
All messages are expressed in hexadecimal.
Modbus ASCII
zz
All messages other than delimiters are written in hexadecimal ASCII codes.
A message of Modbus ASCII consists of (1) to (6) below.
The part of (3) stores commands, which are transmission contents from the master
station and responses, which are transmission contents from the slave station.
All messages use ASCII codes. (Each slot below corresponds to one character.)
3AH 0DH 0AH
: CR LF
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
1 frame
(1) Start of message (colon, expressed with ASCII code 3AH)

(2) Station address (2 bytes)
(3) Send message, response message
(4) Checksum (two-byte LRC)
(5) Delimiter (end of message)
• Colon (3AH)
When a colon (3AH) is received, the device judges this to be the start of the send
message. For this reason, the device returns to the initial state whatever reception
state it was in, and processing is started on the assumption that the colon (3AH),
the first character, has been received. The purpose of this is to enable recovery
of the device's response at the next correct message (e.g. RETRY message) from
the master station in the event that noise, for example, causes an error in the sent
message.
• Station address
expressed as two hexadecimal characters. The station address is set up by the
station address setup (setup setting C65). However, when the station address
is set to 0 (30H 30H), the device creates no response even if station addresses
match. The device returns the same station address as that of the received
message.
• Checksum (LRC)
the message content to change during communications. The checksum is
expressed as two hexadecimal characters. The method to calculate a checksum is
as follows:
(1) Add the data from the top up to just before the checksum. Note that the
values to be added are not the ASCII character values in the send message
but the one-byte binary data converted from two ASCII characters.
8-3
(2) Take two's complement of the addition result.

(3) Convert the low-order one byte of the addition result to a character code.
The following is a sample checksum calculation:

[Sample message]
: : 3AH (start of the message)
'0' : 30H (first byte of the station address)
'A' : 41H (second byte of the station address)
'0' : 30H (first byte of the read command)
'3' : 33H (second byte of the read command)
'0' : 30H (first byte of the start data address)
'3' : 33H (second byte of the start data address)
'E' : 45H (third byte of the start data address)
'9' : 39H (fourth byte of the start data address)
'0' : 30H (first byte of the number of read data)
'0' : 30H (second byte of the number of read data)
'0' : 30H (third byte of the number of read data)
'2' : 32H (fourth byte of the number of read data)
(1) Add the data from the top up to just before the checksum.
The add operation is as follows:
0AH + 03H + 03H + E9H + 00H + 02H
The result is FBH.
(2) The low-order byte of the addition result FBH is FBH as is. The two's
complement of FBH is 05H.
(3) Convert the obtained 05H to a two-byte ASCII code.

The result is:
'0' : 30H
'5' : 35H,
and the two bytes, '0' (30H) and '5' (35H), are the checksum.
• CR/LF
This indicates the end of the message. After LF is received, the device
immediately stands by for permission to process the received message.
8-4
Modbus RTU
zz
All messages are written in binary data.
A Modbus RTU message consists of (1) to (3) below.
The part of (2) stores commands, which are transmission contents from the master
station and responses, which are transmission contents from the slave station.
All messages use binary data. (Each slot below corresponds to one character.)
(1) (2) (3)
1 frame
(1) Station address (1 byte)
(2) Send message, response message
(3) Checksum (2 bytes)
• Station address
expressed in one byte. The station address is set up by the station address setup
(setup setting C65). However, when the station address is set to 0, the device
creates no response even if station addresses match. The device returns the same
station address as that of the received message.
• Checksum (CRC)
the message content to change during communications. The checksum is
expressed as 2 bytes.
The checksum (CRC) creation method is shown below.
/* CRC calculation */
/* Input unsigned char length : Number of transmission bytes */
/* unsigned char *top : Transmission data start pointer */
/* Output unsigned short CRC : CRC calculation result */
unsigned short crc16( unsigned char length, unsigned char *top )
{
unsigned short CRC= 0xffff;
unsigned short next;
unsigned short carry;
unsigned short n;
unsigned char crcl;
while ( length-- ) {
next = (unsigned short)*top;
CRC ^= next;
for (n = 0; n < 8; n++) {
carry = CRC & 1;
CRC >>= 1;
if (carry) {
CRC ^= 0xA001;
}
}
top++;
}
crcl = (CRC & 0xff00)>>8;
CRC <<= 8;
CRC |= crcl;
return CRC;
}
8-5
• 1-frame end judgment

A message end (1-frame end) is determined when a time period specified for
each transmission speed has passed during which no character is received. It is
considered that 1 frame has ended when the next character is not received before
the time-out time shown below passes.
However, the time-out time has a fluctuation of ±1ms from the values in the table
below.
Set transmission speed Time-out time

(bps)
4800 16ms or more
9600 8ms or more
19200 4ms or more
38400 2ms or more
Command type

There are two command (send message) types as shown below.
Command Description
ASCII RTU (binary)

Read command "03" (sample) 03H (sample)
Write command "10" (sample) 10H (sample)
Other specifications

• Supporting the Modbus Class 0
• Abnormal termination codes
Code Description
01 Command error
02 Address error
03 Data error
• Maximum number of communication data words
Command Number of data
ASCII RTU
03 (READ) 16 16
10 (WRITE) 16 16
• The others
For the details of Modbus specifications,
OPEN Modbus/TCP SPECIFICATION (Release 1.0) by Modicon Inc.
8-6
8 - 3 Description of Commands

Read command (03H)

Send Message
zz
This is a command capable of reading the contents of continuous data addresses
from a specified read start data address with a single message. The following is an
example of send message while reading data:
Modbus ASCII
3AH 30H 41H 30H 33H 30H 33H 45H 39H 30H 30H 30H 32H 30H 35H 0DH 0AH
: 0 A 0 3 0 3 E 9 0 0 0 2 0 5 CR LF
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(1) Start of message

(2) Station address
(3) Read command
(6) Checksum (LRC)
(7) Delimiter
Modbus RTU
0AH 03H 03H E9H 00H 02H 14H C0H
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(1) Station address

(2) Read command
(5) Checksum (CRC)
Response Message
zz
A response message corresponding to the command content is returned when the
message is correctly received.
The figure below shows the structure of the response message while reading data.
Modbus ASCII
• Example in case of normal reception
3AH 30H 41H 30H 33H 30H 34H 30H 33H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 33H 45H 38H D0H 0AH
: 0 A 0 3 0 4 0 3 0 1 0 0 0 3 E 8 CR LF
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

(2) Station address
(3) Read command
(4) Number of read data X 2
(5) Read data 1
(6) Read data 2
(7) Checksum (LRC)
(8) Delimiter
8-7
• Example in case of error

3AH 30H 41H 38H 34H 30H 31H 37H 31H 0DH 0AH
: 0 A 8 4 0 1 7 1 CR LF
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(2) Station address
(3) Error flag (since undefined "04" is sent as a command with a send message,
the most significant bit is turned ON and sent back as "84".)
(4) Abnormal termination code ( p. 8-6)
(5) Checksum (LRC)
(6) Delimiter
Modbus RTU
• Example in case of normal reception

0AH 03H 04H 03H 01H 00H 03H 51H 76H
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(1) Station address

(2) Read command
(3) Number of read data X 2 (bytes)
(4) Read data 1
(5) Read data 2
(6) Checksum (CRC)
• Example in case of error

0AH 84H 01H F3H 02H
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(1) Station address

(2) Error flag (since undefined "04H" is sent as a command with a send
message, the most significant bit is turned ON and sent back as "84H".)
(3) Abnormal termination code ( p. 8-6)
(4) Checksum (CRC)
8-8
Write command (10H)

Send Message
zz
This is a command capable of writing the contents of continuous data addresses
from a specified write start data address with a single message. The following is an
example of send message while writing data:
(Example) Writing 01A0H and 0E53H in the continuous data addresses

consisting of 2 words following 1501W (05DDH).
Modbus ASCII
3AH 30H 31H 31H 30H 30H 35H 44H 44H 30H 30H 30H 32H 30H 34H
: 0 1 1 0 0 5 D D 0 0 0 2 0 4
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
30H 31H 41H 30H 30H 45H 35H 33H 30H 35H 0DH 0AH
0 1 A 0 0 E 5 3 0 5 CR LF
(7) (8) (9) (10)

(2) Station address
(3) Write command 10H
(5) Number of write data
(6) Number of write data X 2
(7) Write data 1
(8) Write data 2
(9) Checksum
(10) Delimiter
Modbus RTU
01H 10H 05H DDH 00H 02H 04H 01H A0H 0EH 53H 45H B9H
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(1) Station address

(5) Number of write data X 2
(6) Write data 1
(7) Write data 2
(8) Checksum
8-9
Response Message
zz
A response message corresponding to the command content is returned when the
message is correctly received.
The figure below shows the structure of the response message when the data is
written.
Modbus ASCII
3AH 30H 31H 31H 30H 30H 35H 44H 44H 30H 30H 30H 32H 30H 42H 0DH 0AH
: 0 1 1 0 0 5 D D 0 0 0 2 0 B CR LF
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

(2) Station address
(6) Checksum
(7) Delimiter
Modbus RTU
01H 10H 05H DDH 00H 02H D1H 3EH
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(1) Station address

(5) Checksum
Note
The response message at the time of abnormal termination is the same as that for
the read command.
8-10
8 - 4 Specifications Common with CPL Communication Function

Definition of data addresses

7 - 4 Definition of Data Addresses (p. 7-13)
Numeric representation

The specifications of numeric representation is the same as the following:
l RD, WD, RU and WU commands in 7 - 5 Numeric Representation in the

Application Layer (p. 7-14).
RS-485 driver control timing specifications

7 - 7 Reception and Transmission Timing (p. 7-16).
8-11
List of communication data

The following shows the meanings of the symbols stated in the “RAM/EEPROM Read/Write” columns:
No symbol: Possible.
*: Possible according to the conditions.
∆: Possible, but data is invalid.
X: Impossible.
Note: When reading the EEPROM address, data in the RAM is read in the same manner as reading of the
RAM address.
Decimal point information:
—: No decimal point
1 to 3: Decimal point position (The communication data becomes that the original value is
multiplied by 10, 100, or 1000.)
P: Follows the PV input range.
S: Follows various conditions.
RS/WS commands of CPL communication Decimal data address with “W” attached next to it is
used.
RD/WD/RU/WU commands of CPL communication: Hexadecimal data address is used.
Commands of Modbus communication: Hexadecimal data address is used.
RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal

Bank Item name point Notes
Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal Read Write Read Write information
Instrument ROM ID 273 0111 16657 4111 X X — "2" when using SDC35/36.
information ROM Version 1 274 0112 16658 4112 X X 2
ROM Version 2 275 0113 16659 4113 X X 2
LOADER Information 276 0114 16660 4114 X X —
EST Information 277 0115 16661 4115 X X —
Manufacturing date code (year) 278 0116 16662 4116 X X — Year - 2000 Example:
Year of 2003 is expressed as "3"
Manufacturing date code (month, 279 0117 16663 4117 X X 2 Month + (Day ÷ 100) Example:
day) Dec. 1st is expressed as "12.01".
Serial No. 280 0118 16664 4118 X X —
Lock Key lock 5001 1389 21385 5389 —
Communication lock 5002 138A 21386 538A * X * X — When the communication lock
exists, the error response is sent.
Loader lock 5003 138B 21387 538B X X —
Password display 5004 138C 21388 538C X —
Password 1A — — — — X X X X — Communication and loader
cannot read and write the
password.
Password 2A — — — — X X X X — Same as above.
Password 1B — — — — X X X X — Same as above.
Password 2B — — — — X X X X — Same as above.
User Function User Function 1 5101 13ED 21485 53ED —
User Function 2 5102 13EE 21486 53EE —
User Function 3 5103 13EF 21487 53EF —
User Function 4 5104 13F0 21488 53F0 —
User Function 5 5105 13F1 21489 53F1 —
User Function 6 5106 13F2 21490 53F2 —
User Function 7 5107 13F3 21491 53F3 —
User Function 8 5108 13F4 21492 53F4 —
Setup PV input range type 5201 1451 21585 5451 —
Temperature unit 5202 1452 21586 5452 * * —
Cold junction compensation (T/C) 5203 1453 21587 5453 * * —
Decimal point position 5204 1454 21588 5454 * * —
9-1

Setup PV range low limit 5205 1455 21589 5455 * * P

PV range high limit 5206 1456 21590 5456 * * P
SP low limit 5207 1457 21591 5457 P
SP high limit 5208 1458 21592 5458 P
PV square root extraction dropout 5209 1459 21593 5459 * * 1
RSP input range type 5210 145A 21594 545A * * —
RSP range low limit 5211 145B 21595 545B * * P
RSP range high limit 5212 145C 21596 545C * * P
PID calculation adjustment function 5213 145D 21597 545D — (Note 1)
Control action (Direct/Reverse) 5214 145E 21598 545E —
Output operation at PV alarm 5215 145F 21599 545F —
Output at PV alarm 5216 1460 21600 5460 1
Output at READY (Heat) 5217 1461 21601 5461 1
Output at READY (Cool) 5218 1462 21602 5462 1
Output operation at changing 5219 1463 21603 5463 —
Auto/Manual
Preset MANUAL value 5220 1464 21604 5464 1
Initial output type (mode) of PID 5221 1465 21605 5465 —
control
Initial output of PID control 5222 1466 21606 5466 1
PID decimal point position 5223 1467 21607 5467 —
Zone PID operation 5224 1468 21608 5468 —
(Reserved for future extension.) 5225 1469 21609 5469 ∆ X ∆ X —
Heat/Cool control 5226 146A 21610 546A —
Heat/Cool 5227 146B 21611 546B —
Heat/Cool control dead zone 5228 146C 21612 546C 1
Heat/Cool change point 5229 146D 21613 546D 1
LSP system group 5230 146E 21614 546E —
SP ramp type 5231 146F 21615 546F —
SP ramp unit 5232 1470 21616 5470 —
STEP time unit 5233 1471 21617 5471 —
STEP PV start 5234 1472 21618 5472 —
STEP loop 5235 1473 21619 5473 —
CT1 operation type 5236 1474 21620 5474 —
CT1 output 5237 1475 21621 5475 —
CT1 measurement wait time 5238 1476 21622 5476 —
CT2 operation type 5239 1477 21623 5477 —
CT2 output 5240 1478 21624 5478 —
CT2 measurement wait time 5241 1479 21625 5479 —
Control output 1 range 5242 147A 21626 547A —
Control output 1 type 5243 147B 21627 547B —
Control output 1 scaling low limit 5244 147C 21628 547C S
Control output 1 scaling high limit 5245 147D 21629 547D S
Control output 1 MV scalable 5246 147E 21630 547E P (Note 2)
bandwidth
Control output 2 range 5247 147F 21631 547F —
Control output 2 type 5248 1480 21632 5480 —
Control output 2 scaling low limit 5249 1481 21633 5481 S
Control output 2 scaling high limit 5250 1482 21634 5482 S
Control output 2 MV scalable 5251 1483 21635 5483 P (Note 2)
bandwidth
Auxiliary output range 5252 1484 21636 5484 —
Auxiliary output type 5253 1485 21637 5485 —
9-2

Setup Auxiliary output scaling low limit 5254 1486 21638 5486 S
Auxiliary output scaling high limit 5255 1487 21639 5487 S
Auxiliary output MV scalable 5256 1488 21640 5488 P (Note 2)
bandwidth
Position proportional type 5257 1489 21641 5489 * * —
Position proportional control dead zone 5258 148A 21642 548A * * 1
Motor long life mode 5259 148B 21643 548B * * —
Motor adjust 5260 148C 21644 548C * * —
Input with motor fully closed 5261 148D 21645 548D * * —
Input with motor fully open 5262 148E 21646 548E * * —
Motor full close-full open time 5263 148F 21647 548F * * 1
Communication type 5264 1490 21648 5490 X X —
Station address 5265 1491 21649 5491 X X —
Transmission speed 5266 1492 21650 5492 X X —
Data format (Data length) 5267 1493 21651 5493 X X —
Data format (Parity) 5268 1494 21652 5494 X X —
Data format (Stop bit) 5269 1495 21653 5495 X X —
Communication minimum response 5270 1496 21654 5496 X X —
time
Key operation type 5271 1497 21655 5497 —
[mode] key function 5272 1498 21656 5498 —
MODE display setup 5273 1499 21657 5499 —
PV/SP display setup 5274 149A 21658 549A —
MV display setup 5275 149B 21659 549B —
Event setting value display setup 5276 149C 21660 549C —
Event remaining time display setup 5277 149D 21661 549D —
CT input current value display setup 5278 149E 21662 549E —
User level 5279 149F 21663 549F —
LED monitor 5280 14A0 21664 54A0 —
MS indicating lamp ON condition 5281 14A1 21665 54A1 —
(1st priority)
MS indicating lamp ON status 5282 14A2 21666 54A2 —
(1st priority)
(2nd priority)
(2nd priority)
(3rd priority)
(3rd priority)
MS indicating lamp deviation range 5287 14A7 21671 54A7 —
Special function 5288 14A8 21672 54A8 X —
Zener barrier adjustment 5289 14A9 21673 54A9 X X —
CT1 turns 5290 14AA 21674 54AA — (Note 2)
Number of CT1 power wire loops 5291 14AB 21675 54AB — (Note 2)
CT2 turns 5292 14AC 21676 54AC — (Note 2)
Number of CT2 power wire loops 5293 14AD 21677 54AD — (Note 2)
PV input failure (under range) type 5297 14B1 21681 54B1 — (Note 1)
DI Internal Contact 1 Operation type 5401 1519 21785 5519 —
Assignment Internal Contact 1 Input bit operation 5402 151A 21786 551A —
Internal Contact 1 Input assignment A 5403 151B 21787 551B —
Internal Contact 1 Input assignment B 5404 151C 21788 551C —
Internal Contact 1 Input assignment C 5405 151D 21789 551D —
Internal Contact 1 Input assignment D 5406 151E 21790 551E —

(Note 1) If ROM version 1 in the instrument information bank (I d02) is 2.26 or earlier,
write accessibility is X and read accessibility is ∆.
(Note 2) If ROM version 1 in the instrument information bank (I d02) is 2.04 or earlier, this item is reserved for
future extension, write accessibility is X and read accessibility is ∆ for both RAM and EEPROM.
9-3

DI Internal Contact 1 Polarity A 5407 151F 21791 551F —

Assignment Internal Contact 1 Polarity B 5408 1520 21792 5520 —
Internal Contact 1 Polarity C 5409 1521 21793 5521 —
Internal Contact 1 Polarity D 5410 1522 21794 5522 —
Internal Contact 1 Polarity 5411 1523 21795 5523 —
Internal Contact 1 Internal event 5412 1524 21796 5524 —
No. assignment
Internal Contact 2 Operation type 5413 1525 21797 5525 —
Internal Contact 2 Input bit operation 5414 1526 21798 5526 —
Internal Contact 2 Input assignment A 5415 1527 21799 5527 —
Internal Contact 2 Input assignment B 5416 1528 21800 5528 —
Internal Contact 2 Input assignment C 5417 1529 21801 5529 —
Internal Contact 2 Input assignment D 5418 152A 21802 552A —
Internal Contact 2 Polarity A 5419 152B 21803 552B —
Internal Contact 2 Polarity B 5420 152C 21804 552C —
Internal Contact 2 Polarity C 5421 152D 21805 552D —
Internal Contact 2 Polarity D 5422 152E 21806 552E —
Internal Contact 2 Polarity 5423 152F 21807 552F —
No. assignment
Internal Contact 3 Input bit operation 5426 1532 21810 5532 —
Internal Contact 3 Input assignment A 5427 1533 21811 5533 —
Internal Contact 3 Input assignment D 5430 1536 21814 5536 —
Internal Contact 3 Polarity A 5431 1537 21815 5537 —
Internal Contact 3 Polarity B 5432 1538 21816 5538 —
Internal Contact 3 Polarity D 5434 153A 21818 553A —
Internal Contact 3 Polarity 5435 153B 21819 553B —
Internal Contact 3 Internal event 5436 153C 21820 553C —
No. assignment
Internal Contact 4 Operation type 5437 153D 21821 553D —
Internal Contact 4 Input bit operation 5438 153E 2182 553E —
Internal Contact 4 Input assignment A 5439 153F 2182 553F —
Internal Contact 4 Input assignment D 5442 1542 21826 5542 —
Internal Contact 4 Polarity A 5443 1543 21827 5543 —
Internal Contact 4 Polarity B 5444 1544 21828 5544 —
No. assignment
Internal Contact 5 Input bit operation 5450 154A 21834 554A —
Internal Contact 5 Input assignment A 5451 154B 21835 554B —
Internal Contact 5 Input assignment B 5452 154C 21836 554C —
Internal Contact 5 Input assignment C 5453 154D 21837 554D —
Internal Contact 5 Input assignment D 5454 154E 21838 554E —
9-4

DI Internal Contact 5 Polarity A 5455 154F 21839 554F —

Assignment Internal Contact 5 Polarity B 5456 1550 21840 5550 —
No. assignment
DO Control output 1 Operation type 5601 15E1 21985 55E1 —
Assignment Control output 1 Output assignment A 5602 15E2 21986 55E2 —
Control output 1 Output assignment B 5603 15E3 21987 55E3 —
Control output 1 Output assignment C 5604 15E4 21988 55E4 —
Control output 1 Output assignment D 5605 15E5 21989 55E5 —
Control output 1 Polarity A 5606 15E6 21990 55E6 —
Control output 1 Polarity B 5607 15E7 21991 55E7 —
Control output 1 Polarity C 5608 15E8 21992 55E8 —
Control output 1 Polarity D 5609 15E9 21993 55E9 —
Control output 1 Polarity 5610 15EA 21994 55EA —
Control output 1 Latch 5611 15EB 21995 55EB —
Control output 2 Operation type 5612 15EC 21996 55EC —
Control output 2 Output assignment A 5613 15ED 21997 55ED —
Control output 2 Output assignment B 5614 15EE 21998 55EE —
Control output 2 Output assignment C 5615 15EF 21999 55EF —
Control output 2 Output assignment D 5616 15F0 22000 55F0 —
Control output 2 Polarity A 5617 15F1 22001 55F1 —
Control output 2 Polarity B 5618 15F2 22002 55F2 —
Control output 2 Polarity C 5619 15F3 22003 55F3 —
Control output 2 Polarity D 5620 15F4 22004 55F4 —
Control output 2 Polarity 5621 15F5 22005 55F5 —
Control output 2 Latch 5622 15F6 22006 55F6 —
Event output 1 Operation type 5623 15F7 22007 55F7 —
Event output 1 Output assignment A 5624 15F8 22008 55F8 —
Event output 1 Output assignment B 5625 15F9 22009 55F9 —
Event output 1 Output assignment C 5626 15FA 22010 55FA —
Event output 1 Output assignment D 5627 15FB 22011 55FB —
Event output 1 Polarity A 5628 15FC 22012 55FC —
Event output 1 Polarity B 5629 15FD 22013 55FD —
Event output 1 Polarity C 5630 15FE 22014 55FE —
Event output 1 Polarity D 5631 15FF 22015 55FF —
Event output 1 Polarity 5632 1600 22016 5600 —
Event output 1 Latch 5633 1601 22017 5601 —
Event output 2 Operation type 5634 1602 22018 5602 —
Event output 2 Output assignment A 5635 1603 22019 5603 —
Event output 2 Output assignment B 5636 1604 22020 5604 —
Event output 2 Output assignment C 5637 1605 22021 5605 —
Event output 2 Output assignment D 5638 1606 22022 5606 —
Event output 2 Polarity A 5639 1607 22023 5607 —
Event output 2 Polarity B 5640 1608 22024 5608 —
Event output 2 Polarity C 5641 1609 22025 5609 —
Event output 2 Polarity D 5642 160A 22026 560A —
Event output 2 Polarity 5643 160B 22027 560B —
Event output 2 Latch 5644 160C 22028 560C —
9-5

DO Event output 3 Operation type 5645 160D 22029 560D —

Assignment Event output 3 Output assignment A 5646 160E 22030 560E —
Event output 3 Output assignment B 5647 160F 22031 560F —
Event output 3 Output assignment C 5648 1610 22032 5610 —
Event output 3 Output assignment D 5649 1611 22033 5611 —
Event output 3 Polarity A 5650 1612 22034 5612 —
Event output 3 Polarity B 5651 1613 22035 5613 —
Event output 3 Polarity C 5652 1614 22036 5614 —
Event output 3 Polarity D 5653 1615 22037 5615 —
Event output 3 Polarity 5654 1616 22038 5616 —
Event output 3 Latch 5655 1617 22039 5617 —
Event Internal Event 1 Operation type 5801 16A9 22185 56A9 —
Configuration Internal Event 1 Direct/Reverse 5802 16AA 22186 56AA —
Internal Event 1 Standby 5803 16AB 22187 56AB —
Internal Event 1 state at READY 5804 16AC 22188 56AC —
(Reserved for future extension.) 5805 16AD 22189 56AD ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Internal Event 1 Alarm OR 5806 16AE 22190 56AE —
Internal Event 1 Special OFF 5807 16AF 22191 56AF —
Internal Event 1 Delay time unit 5808 16B0 22192 56B0 —
(Reserved for future extension.) 5809 16B1 22193 56B1 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Internal Event 2 Operation type 5810 16B2 22194 56B2 —
Internal Event 2 Direct/Reverse 5811 16B3 22195 56B3 —
Internal Event 2 Standby 5812 16B4 22196 56B4 —
Internal Event 2 state at READY 5813 16B5 22197 56B5 —
(Reserved for future extension.) 5814 16B6 22198 56B6 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Internal Event 2 Alarm OR 5815 16B7 22199 56B7 —
Internal Event 2 Special OFF 5816 16B8 22200 56B8 —
Internal Event 2 Delay time unit 5817 16B9 22201 56B9 —
(Reserved for future extension.) 5818 16BA 22202 56BA ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Internal Event 3 Operation type 5819 16BB 22203 56BB —
Internal Event 3 Direct/Reverse 5820 16BC 22204 56BC —
Internal Event 3 Standby 5821 16BD 22205 56BD —
Internal Event 3 state at READY 5822 16BE 22206 56BE —
(Reserved for future extension.) 5823 16BF 22207 56BF ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Internal Event 3 Alarm OR 5824 16C0 22208 56C0 —
Internal Event 3 Special OFF 5825 16C1 22209 56C1 —
Internal Event 3 Delay time unit 5826 16C2 22210 56C2 —
(Reserved for future extension.) 5827 16C3 22211 56C3 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Internal Event 4 Operation type 5828 16C4 22212 56C4 —
Internal Event 4 Direct/Reverse 5829 16C5 22213 56C5 —
Internal Event 4 Standby 5830 16C6 22214 56C6 —
Internal Event 4 state at READY 5831 16C7 22215 56C7 —
(Reserved for future extension.) 5832 16C8 22216 56C8 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Internal Event 4 Alarm OR 5833 16C9 22217 56C9 —
Internal Event 4 Special OFF 5834 16CA 22218 56CA —
Internal Event 4 Delay time unit 5835 16CB 22219 56CB —
(Reserved for future extension.) 5836 16CC 22220 56CC ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Internal Event 5 Operation type 5837 16CD 22221 56CD —
Internal Event 5 Direct/Reverse 5838 16CE 22222 56CE —
Internal Event 5 Standby 5839 16CF 22223 56CF —
9-6

Event Internal Event 5 state at READY 5840 16D0 22224 56D0 —

Configuration (Reserved for future extension.) 5841 16D1 22225 56D1 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Internal Event 5 Alarm OR 5842 16D2 22226 56D2 —
Internal Event 5 Special OFF 5843 16D3 22227 56D3 —
Internal Event 5 Delay time unit 5844 16D4 22228 56D4 —
(Reserved for future extension.) 5845 16D5 22229 56D5 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Internal Event 6 Operation type 5846 16D6 22230 56D6 —
Internal Event 6 Direct/Reverse 5847 16D7 22231 56D7 —
Internal Event 6 Standby 5848 16D8 22232 56D8 —
Internal Event 6 state at READY 5849 16D9 22233 56D9 —
(Reserved for future extension.) 5850 16DA 22234 56DA ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Internal Event 6 Alarm OR 5851 16DB 22235 56DB —
Internal Event 6 Special OFF 5852 16DC 22236 56DC —
Internal Event 6 Delay time unit 5853 16DD 22237 56DD —
(Reserved for future extension.) 5854 16DE 22238 56DE ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Internal Event 7 Operation type 5855 16DF 22239 56DF —
Internal Event 7 Direct/Reverse 5856 16E0 22240 56E0 —
Internal Event 7 Standby 5857 16E1 22241 56E1 —
Internal Event 7 state at READY 5858 16E2 22242 56E2 —
(Reserved for future extension.) 5859 16E3 22243 56E3 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Internal Event 7 Alarm OR 5860 16E4 22244 56E4 —
Internal Event 7 Special OFF 5861 16E5 22245 56E5 —
Internal Event 7 Delay time unit 5862 16E6 22246 56E6 —
(Reserved for future extension.) 5863 16E7 22247 56E7 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Internal Event 8 Operation type 5864 16E8 22248 56E8 —
Internal Event 8 Direct/Reverse 5865 16E9 22249 56E9 —
Internal Event 8 Standby 5866 16EA 22250 56EA —
Internal Event 8 state at READY 5867 16EB 22251 56EB —
(Reserved for future extension.) 5868 16EC 22252 56EC ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Internal Event 8 Alarm OR 5869 16ED 22253 56ED —
Internal Event 8 Special OFF 5870 16EE 22254 56EE —
Internal Event 8 Delay time unit 5871 16EF 22255 56EF —
(Reserved for future extension.) 5872 16F0 22256 56F0 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Parameter Control method 6001 1771 22385 5771 —
MV low limit at AT 6002 1772 22386 5772 1
MV high limit at AT 6003 1773 22387 5773 1
ON/OFF control differential 6004 1774 22388 5774 P
ON/OFF control operating point offset 6005 1775 22389 5775 P
PV filter 6006 1776 22390 5776 1
PV ratio 6007 1777 22391 5777 3
PV bias 6008 1778 22392 5778 P
RSP filter 6009 1779 22393 5779 1
RSP ratio 6010 177A 22394 577A 3
RSP bias 6011 177B 22395 577B P
Time proportional unit 1 6012 177C 22396 577C —
Time proportional cycle 1 6013 177D 22397 577D —
Time proportional unit 2 6014 177E 22398 577E —
Time proportional cycle 2 6015 177F 22399 577F —
Time proportional cycle mode 6016 1780 22400 5780 —
MV variation limit 6017 1781 22401 5781 1
9-7

Prameter SP ramp-up (U/min) 6018 1782 22402 5782 S

SP ramp-down (U/min) 6019 1783 22403 5783 S
(Reserved for future extension.) 6020 1784 22404 5784 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ P
Zone Zone 1 6201 1839 22585 5839 P
Zone 2 6202 183A 22586 583A P
Zone 3 6203 183B 22587 583B P
Zone 4 6204 183C 22588 583C P
Zone 5 6205 183D 22589 583D P
Zone 6 6206 183E 22590 583E P
Zone 7 6207 183F 22591 583F P
Zone hysteresis 6208 1840 22592 5840 P
SP RSP 7001 1B59 23385 5B59 X X P
PID group No. (RSP) 7002 1B5A 23386 5B5A —
(Reserved for future extension.) 7003 1B5B 23387 5B5B ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ S
(Reserved for future extension.) 7004 1B5C 23388 5B5C ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ S
LSP1 7005 1B5D 23389 5B5D P Same as RAM address 13312
(decimal).
PID group No. (for LSP1) 7006 1B5E 23390 5B5E —
Ramp (for LSP1) 7007 1B5F 23391 5B5F S
Time (for LSP1) 7008 1B60 23392 5B60 S
LSP2 7009 1B61 23393 5B61 P Same as RAM address 13313
(decimal).
PID group No. (for LSP2) 7010 1B62 23394 5B62 —
Ramp (for LSP2) 7011 1B63 23395 5B63 S
Time (for LSP2) 7012 1B64 23396 5B64 S
(decimal).
Ramp (for LSP3) 7015 1B67 23399 5B67 S
Time (for LSP3) 7016 1B68 23400 5B68 S
(decimal).
PID group No. (for LSP4) 7018 1B6A 23402 5B6A —
Ramp (for LSP4) 7019 1B6B 23403 5B6B S
Time (for LSP4) 7020 1B6C 23404 5B6C S
LSP5 7021 1B6D 23405 5B6D P Same as RAM address 13316
(decimal).
PID group No. (for LSP5) 7022 1B6E 23406 5B6E —
Ramp (for LSP5) 7023 1B6F 23407 5B6F S
Time (for LSP5) 7024 1B70 23408 5B70 S
(decimal).
Ramp (for LSP6) 7027 1B73 23411 5B73 S
Time (for LSP6) 7028 1B74 23412 5B74 S
(decimal).
Ramp (for LSP7) 7031 1B77 23415 5B77 S
Time (for LSP7) 7032 1B78 23416 5B78 S
9-8

SP LSP8 7033 1B79 23417 5B79 P Same as RAM address 13319

(decimal).
PID group No. (for LSP8) 7034 1B7A 23418 5B7A —
Ramp (for LSP8) 7035 1B7B 23419 5B7B S
Time (for LSP8) 7036 1B7C 23420 5B7C S
Event Internal Event 1 main setting 7501 1D4D 23885 5D4D S Same as RAM address 13056
(decimal).
Internal Event 1 sub-setting 7502 1D4E 23886 5D4E S Same as RAM address 13057
(decimal).
Internal Event 1 Hysteresis 7503 1D4F 23887 5D4F S
Internal Event 1 ON delay time 7504 1D50 23888 5D50 S
Internal Event 1 OFF delay time 7505 1D51 23889 5D51 S
Internal Event 2 main setting 7506 1D52 23890 5D52 S Same as RAM address 13058
(decimal).
Internal Event 2 sub-setting 7507 1D53 23891 5D53 S Same as RAM address 13059
(decimal).
Internal Event 2 Hysteresis 7508 1D54 23892 5D54 S
(decimal).
(decimal).
Internal Event 3 ON delay time 7514 1D5A 23898 5D5A S
Internal Event 3 OFF delay time 7515 1D5B 23899 5D5B S
Internal Event 4 main setting 7516 1D5C 23900 5D5C S Same as RAM address 13062
(decimal).
Internal Event 4 sub-setting 7517 1D5D 23901 5D5D S Same as RAM address 13063
(decimal).
Internal Event 4 Hysteresis 7518 1D5E 23902 5D5E S
Internal Event 4 ON delay time 7519 1D5F 23903 5D5F S
(decimal).
(decimal).
(decimal).
(decimal).
Internal Event 6 OFF delay time 7530 1D6A 23914 5D6A S
Internal Event 7 main setting 7531 1D6B 23915 5D6B S Same as RAM address 13068
(decimal).
Internal Event 7 sub-setting 7532 1D6C 23916 5D6C S Same as RAM address 13069
(decimal).
Internal Event 7 Hysteresis 7533 1D6D 23917 5D6D S
9-9

Event Internal Event 7 ON delay time 7534 1D6E 23918 5D6E S

Internal Event 7 OFF delay time 7535 1D6F 23919 5D6F S
(decimal).
(decimal).
Extended AT type 8501 2135 24885 6135 —
tuning (Reserved for future extension.) 8502 2136 24886 6136 ∆ X ∆ X —
Just-FiTTER settling band 8503 2137 24887 6137 —
SP lag constant 8504 2138 24888 6138 1
AT Proportional band adjust 8506 213A 24890 613A 2
AT Integral time adjust 8507 213B 24891 613B 2
AT Derivative time adjust 8508 213C 24892 613C 2
Control algorithm 8509 213D 24893 613D —
Just-FiTTER assistance coefficient 8510 213E 24894 613E —
(Reserved for future extension.) 8511 213F 24895 613F ∆ X ∆ X —
(Reserved for future extension.) 8515 2143 24899 6143 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ 2
(Reserved for future extension.) 8518 2146 24902 6146 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Mode AUTO/MANUAL mode selection 9001 2329 25385 6329 * * — Same as RAM address 14596
(decimal). Writing is enabled
under no DI Assignment and
other conditions.
RUN/READY mode selection 9002 232A 25386 632A * * — Same as RAM address 14595
under no DI Assignment
conditions.
LSP/RSP mode selection 9003 232B 25387 632B * * — Same as RAM address 14598
conditions.
AT stop/start selection 9004 232C 25388 632C * * — Same as RAM address 14597
under no DI Assignment and
other conditions.
Release all DO latches 9005 232D 25389 632D * * — Writing is enabled under no DI
Assignment conditions.
Operation PV 9101 238D 25485 638D X X P Same as RAM address 14356
display (decimal).
SP (Target value) 9102 238E 25486 638E P (Note 3)
LSP group selection 9103 238F 25487 638F * * — Same as RAM address 14592
conditions. (Note 4)
PID group being selected. 9104 2390 25488 6390 X X —
9-10

Operation Manipulated Variable (MV) 9105 2391 25489 6391 * * 1 Same as RAM address 14594
display (decimal). Writing is enabled in
the MANUAL mode.
Heat Manipulated Variable (Heat MV) 9106 2392 25490 6392 X X 1 Same as RAM address 14420
(decimal).
Cool Manipulated Variable (Cool MV) 9107 2393 25491 6393 X X 1 Same as RAM address 14421
(decimal).
Motor opening feedback value (MFB) 9108 2394 25492 6394 X X 1 Same as RAM address 14417
(decimal).
AT progress 9109 2395 25493 6395 X X —
Current transformer (CT) current 9110 2396 25494 6396 X X 1 Same as RAM address 14418
value 1 (decimal).
Current transformer (CT) current 9111 2397 25495 6397 X X 1 Same as RAM address 14419
value 2 (decimal).
Timer remaining time 1 9112 2398 25496 6398 X X S
Timer remaining time 2 9113 2399 25497 6399 X X S
Timer remaining time 3 9114 239A 25498 639A X X S
Timer remaining time 4 9115 239B 25499 639B X X S
Timer remaining time 5 9116 239C 25500 639C X X S
Timer remaining time 6 9117 239D 25501 639D X X S
Timer remaining time 7 9118 239E 25502 639E X X S
Timer remaining time 8 9119 239F 25503 639F X X S
STEP operation No. 9120 23A0 25504 63A0 X X S
STEP operation remaining time 9121 23A1 25505 63A1 X X S
STEP operation remaining time (sec.) 9122 23A2 25506 63A2 X X S
LSP value in use 9123 23A3 25507 63A3 P Same as RAM address 14593
(decimal). (Note 3)
PV before ratio, bias, and filter 9124 23A4 25508 63A4 X X P
RSP before ratio, bias, and filter 9125 23A5 25509 63A5 X X P
Status Input alarm status 9201 23F1 25585 63F1 X X — Bit 0: AL0 1 (PV over-range)
Bit 1: AL02 (PV under-range)
Bit 2: AL03 (CJ, RTD burnout)
Bit 3: Undefined.
Bit 4: AL05 (RSP over-range)
Bit 5: AL06 (RSP under-range)
Bit 6: AL07 (MFB burnout)
Bit 7 to 8: Undefined.
Bit 9: A L 10 (Motor adjustment
failure)
Bit 10: AL 1 1 (CT over-range)
(Note 3) If the value is read immediately after it has been written into the SP or the LSP in use, the value still may
not be changed. The value is updated after the cycle time has elapsed.
(Note 4) If the SP or the LSP in use is read immediately after the value has been written into the LSP group
selection, the value still may not be changed. The value is updated after the cycle time has elapsed.
9-11

Status Instrument alarm status 9202 23F2 25586 63F2 X X — Bits 0 to 1: Undefined.
Bit 2: AL70 (A/D)
Bit 3: AL95 (Set data)
Bit 4: AL96 (Adjustment data)
Bit 5: AL97 (Set data/RAM)
Bit 6: A L98 (Adjustment data/
RAM)
Bit 7: AL99 (ROM)
Bits 8 to 15 Undefined.
Internal Event/Internal Contact 9203 23F3 25587 63F3 X X — Bit 0 to 7: Internal event 1 to 8
function Bit 8 to 12: Internal contact
1 to 5
Control status 9204 23F4 25588 63F4 X X — Bit 0: MANUAL mode
Bit 1: READY mode
Bit 2: RSP mode
Bit 3: During AT
Bit 4: During ST
(Invalid in this unit)
Bit 5: During SOAK of step
operation
Bit 6: During SP ramp
Bit 7: During SP ramp-up
Bit 8: During SP ramp-down
Bits 9 to 10: Undefined.
Bit 11: During estimate of
MFB
Bit 12: During adjustment
of MFB
Bit 13: PID (Heat) is being
used.
Bit 14: PID (Cool) is being
used.
Bit 15: Undefined.
DO status 9205 23F5 25589 63F5 X X — Same as RAM address 14337
(decimal).
Bit 0: Control output 1
Bit 1: Control output 2
Bit 2: Event output 1
DI status 9206 23F6 25590 63F6 X X — Same as RAM address 14338
(decimal).
Bit 0: DI1
Bit 1: DI2
Bit 2: DI3
Bit 3: DI4
Communication DI (DI1 to 4) 9207 23F7 25591 63F7 — Bit 0: Communication DI1
Bit 1: Communication DI2
Communication DI1 9208 23F8 25592 63F8 —
Communication DI2 9209 23F9 25593 63F9 —
Communication DI3 9210 23FA 25594 63FA —
Communication DI4 9211 23FB 25595 63FB —
Tag Tag 1 9301 2455 25685 6455 — Display and setting cannot be
made with the console.
Tag 2 9302 2456 25686 6456 — Same as above.
Tag 3 9303 2457 25687 6457 — Same as above.
9-12

Tag Tag 4 9304 2458 25688 6458 — Display and setting cannot be
made with the console.
Tag 5 9305 2459 25689 6459 — Same as above.
Tag 6 9306 245A 25690 645A — Same as above.
Tag 7 9307 245B 25691 645B — Same as above.
Tag 8 9308 245C 25692 645C — Same as above.
Tag 9 9309 245D 25693 645D — Same as above.
Tag 10 9310 245E 25694 645E — Same as above.
Tag 11 9311 245F 25695 645F — Same as above.
Tag 12 9312 2460 25696 6460 — Same as above.
Tag 13 9313 2461 25697 6461 — Same as above.
Tag 14 9314 2462 25698 6462 — Same as above.
Tag 15 9315 2463 25699 6463 — Same as above.
Tag 16 9316 2464 25700 6464 — Same as above.
PID Proportional band (P-1) 12288 3000 28672 7000 1
Integration time (I-1) 12289 3001 28673 7001 S
Derivative time (D-1) 12290 3002 28674 7002 S
Manual reset (RE-1) 12291 3003 28675 7003 1
MV low limit (OL-1) 12292 3004 28676 7004 1
MV high limit (OH-1) 12293 3005 28677 7005 1
Proportional band (P-2) 12294 3006 28678 7006 1
Manual reset (RE-2) 12297 3009 28681 7009 1
MV low limit (OL-2) 12298 300A 28682 700A 1
MV high limit (OH-2) 12299 300B 28683 700B 1
Proportional band (P-3) 12300 300C 28684 700C 1
Integration time (I-3) 12301 300D 28685 700D S
Derivative time (D-3) 12302 300E 28686 700E S
Manual reset (RE-3) 12303 300F 28687 700F 1
MV low limit (OL-3) 12304 3010 28688 7010 1
MV high limit (OH-3) 12305 3011 28689 7011 1
Manual reset (RE-4) 12309 3015 28693 7015 1
MV low limit (OL-4) 12310 3016 28694 7016 1
MV high limit (OH-4) 12311 3017 28695 7017 1
Derivative time (D-5) 12314 301A 28698 701A S
Manual reset (RE-5) 12315 301B 28699 701B 1
MV low limit (OL-5) 12316 301C 28700 701C 1
MV high limit (OH-5) 12317 301D 28701 701D 1
Proportional band (P-6) 12318 301E 28702 701E 1
Integration time (I-6) 12319 301F 28703 701F S
Manual reset (RE-6) 12321 3021 28705 7021 1
MV low limit (OL-6) 12322 3022 28706 7022 1
MV high limit (OH-6) 12323 3023 28707 7023 1
9-13

PID Integration time (I-7) 12325 3025 28709 7025 S

Manual reset (RE-7) 12327 3027 28711 7027 1
MV low limit (OL-7) 12328 3028 28712 7028 1
MV high limit (OH-7) 12329 3029 28713 7029 1
Proportional band (P-8) 12330 302A 28714 702A 1
Integration time (I-8) 12331 302B 28715 702B S
Derivative time (D-8) 12332 302C 28716 702C S
Manual reset (RE-8) 12333 302D 28717 702D 1
MV low limit (OL-8) 12334 302E 28718 702E 1
MV high limit (OH-8) 12335 302F 28719 702F 1
Cool-side proportional band (P-1.C) 12336 3030 28720 7030 1
Cool-side integration time (I-1.C) 12337 3031 28721 7031 S
Cool-side derivative time (D-1.C) 12338 3032 28722 7032 S
Cool-side MV low limit (OL 1.C) 12340 3034 28724 7034 1
Cool-side MV high limit (OH 1.C) 12341 3035 28725 7035 1
Cool-side MV low limit (OL2.C) 12346 303A 28730 703A 1
Cool-side MV high limit (OH2.C) 12347 303B 28731 703B 1
Cool-side proportional band (P-3.C) 12348 303C 28732 703C 1
Cool-side integration time (I-3.C) 12349 303D 28733 703D S
Cool-side derivative time (D-3.C) 12350 303E 28734 703E S
(Reserved for future extension.) 12351 303F 28735 703F ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Cool-side MV low limit (OL3.C) 12352 3040 28736 7040 1
Cool-side MV high limit (OH3.C) 12353 3041 28737 7041 1
Cool-side derivative time (D-5.C) 12362 304A 28746 704A S
(Reserved for future extension.) 12363 304B 28747 704B ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Cool-side MV low limit (OL5.C) 12364 304C 28748 704C 1
Cool-side MV high limit (OH5.C) 12365 304D 28749 704D 1
Cool-side proportional band (P-6.C) 12366 304E 28750 704E 1
Cool-side integration time (I-6.C) 12367 304F 28751 704F S
9-14

PID (Reserved for future extension.) 12375 3057 28759 7057 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —

Cool-side proportional ban 12378 305A 28762 705A 1
(P-8.C)
Cool-side integration time (I-8.C) 12379 305B 28763 705B S
Cool-side derivative time (D-8.C) 12380 305C 28764 705C S
(Reserved for future extension.) 12381 305D 28765 705D ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ —
Cool-side MV low limit (OL8.C) 12382 305E 28766 705E 1
Cool-side MV high limit (OH8.C) 12383 305F 28767 705F 1
Event Internal Event 1 main setting 13056 3300 29440 7300 S
Internal Event 1 sub-setting 13057 3301 29441 7301 S
Internal Event 2 main setting 13058 3302 29442 7302 S
Internal Event 6 main setting 13066 330A 29450 730A S
Internal Event 6 sub-setting 13067 330B 29451 730B S
Internal Event 7 main setting 13068 330C 29452 730C S
Internal Event 7 sub-setting 13069 330D 29453 730D S
Internal Event 8 main setting 13070 330E 29454 730E S
Internal Event 8 sub-setting 13071 330F 29455 730F S
LSP LSP1 13312 3400 29696 7400 P
LSP2 13313 3401 29697 7401 P
LSP3 13314 3402 29698 7402 P
LSP4 13315 3403 29699 7403 P
LSP5 13316 3404 29700 7404 P
LSP6 13317 3405 29701 7405 P
LSP7 13318 3406 29702 7406 P
LSP8 13319 3407 29703 7407 P
Instrument Typical alarm 14336 3800 30720 7800 X X — Bit 0: PV failure (AL0 1 to 03)
status 1 Bits 1 to 11: Undefined.
Bit 12: Hardware failure (AL70)
Bit 13: Parameter failure
(AL95/97)
Bit 14: Adjustment data failure
(AL96/98)
Bit 15: ROM failure (AL99)
DO status 14337 3801 30721 7801 X X — Same as RAM address 9205
(decimal).
DI status 14338 3802 30722 7802 X X — Same as RAM address 9206
(decimal).
9-15

Instrument RUN/READY 14352 3810 30736 7810 X X —

status 2 AUTO/MANUAL 14353 3811 30737 7811 X X —
AT stop/start 14354 3812 30738 7812 X X —
LSP/RSP 14355 3813 30739 7813 X X — Writing is enabled under no
DI Assignment conditions.
Same as RAM address
9003(decimal).
PV 14356 3814 30740 7814 X X P
SP (Target value) 14357 3815 30741 7815 X X P
Manipulated Variable (MV) 14358 3816 30742 7816 X X 1
Instrument RSP 14416 3850 30800 7850 X X P Same as RAM address 7001
status 3 (decimal).
MFB (Motor opening feedback 14417 3851 30801 7851 X X 1 Same as RAM address 9108
value) (decimal).
Current transformer (CT) input 1 14418 3852 30802 7852 X X 1 Same as RAM address 9110
current value (decimal).
Current transformer (CT) input 2 14419 3853 30803 7853 X X 1 Same as RAM address 9111
current value (decimal).
Heat MV (for heat/cool control) 14420 3854 30804 7854 X X 1 Same as RAM address 9106
(decimal).
Cool MV (for heat/cool control) 14421 3855 30805 7855 X X 1 Same as RAM address 9107
(decimal).
Operation LSP group selection 14592 3900 30976 7900 * * — Writing is enabled under no DI
Same as RAM address 9103
(decimal).
LSP value in use 14593 3901 30977 7901 P Same as RAM address 9123
(decimal).
Manual manipulated variable (MV) 14594 3902 30978 7902 * * 1 Writing is enabled in the
MANUAL mode.
(decimal).
RUN/READY 14595 3903 30979 7903 * * — Writing is enabled under no DI
(decimal).
AUTO/MANUAL 14596 3904 30980 7904 * * — Writing is enabled under no
DI Assignment and other
conditions.
(decimal).
AT stop/start 14597 3905 30981 7905 * * — Writing is enabled under no
DI Assignment and other
conditions.
(decimal).
LSP/RSP 14598 3906 30982 7906 * * — Writing is enabled under no DI
(decimal).
9-16

PID group Proportional band (P) 14848 3A00 31232 7A00 1

in use Integration time (I) 14849 3A01 31233 7A01 S
Derivative time (D) 14850 3A02 31234 7A02 S
Manual reset 14851 3A03 31235 7A03 1
MV low limit 14852 3A04 31236 7A04 1
MV high limit 14853 3A05 31237 7A05 1
Cool-side proportional band 14854 3A06 31238 7A06 1
Cool-side integration time 14855 3A07 31239 7A07 S
Cool-side derivative time 14856 3A08 31240 7A08 S
(Reserved for future extension.) 14857 3A09 31241 7A09 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ 1
Cool-side MV low limit 14858 3A0A 31242 7A0A 1
Cool-side MV high limit 14859 3A0B 31243 7A0B 1
9-17
Maintenance

Cleaning
zz
When removing dirt from the instrument, wipe it off with a soft cloth rag. At this
time, do not use any organic solvent, such as paint thinner or benzine.
Part replacement
zz
Do not replace any parts of this unit.
Fuse replacement
zz
When replacing the fuse connected to the electric wiring, always use the specified
standard fuse.
Standard IEC127
Shut-down speed Slow-action type (T)
Rated voltage 250 V AC
Rated current 0.5 A
10-1
Alarm displays and corrective action

The following table shows the alarm displays and corrective actions if any failure
occurs in this unit:
Alarm code Failure name Cause Corrective action

(Over-range) wiring, incorrect PV input Set the PV input type again.
type setting
PV input failure Sensor burnout, incorrect
(Under-range) wiring, incorrect PV input
type setting
CJ failure Terminal temperature is Check the ambient
faulty (thermocouple). temperature.
wiring (RTD)
RSP input failure Sensor burnout, incorrect Check the wiring.
(Over-range) wiring, incorrect RSP input Set the RSP input type again.
(Displayed only in type setting
the RSP mode.)
RSP input failure Sensor burnout, incorrect Check the wiring.
(Under-range) wiring, incorrect RSP input Set the RSP input type again.
(Displayed only in type setting
the RSP mode.)
MFB input failure Burnout, incorrect wiring Check the wiring.
Check the MFB input value.
Check the settings for C6 1
and 62 in the setup bank.
Motor adjustment Check for burnout or Readjust the motor after
failure incorrect wiring. checking the wiring and
Motor power shutdown. motor power.
Check the settings for C6 1
and 62 in the setup bank.
p. 5-109 (for details on
AL 10 )
CT input failure A current exceeding the Use a CT with the correct
(over-range) upper limit of the display number of turns for the
(CT input 1 or 2, or range was measured. The display range, reset the
both) number of CT turns or the number of CT turns, reset
number of CT power wire the number of CT power
loops is incorrectly set, or wire loops, and/or check the
wiring is incorrect. wiring.
A/D conversion A/D converter is faulty. Replace the unit.
failure
Parameter failure Data is corrupted by noise, • Restart the unit.
or power is shut-down while • Set the data again (set
the data is being set. data for AL95 /97 and
Adjustment data Data is corrupted by noise, adjustment data for
failure or power is shut-down while AL96 /98 ).
the data is being set. • Replace the unit.
Parameter failure Data is corrupted by noise.
(RAM area)
Adjustment data Data is corrupted by noise.
failure (RAM area)
ROM failure ROM (memory) is faulty. • Restart the unit.
• Replace the unit.
2.04, CT input failure (AL 1 1) is not displayed.
• If AL07 and AL 10 are displayed alternately, take corrective actions for
AL 10 first.
• This device will not recover from AL07 and AL 10 by restarting it.
Corrective actions are described in the above table.
10-2
Behavior in case of PV input failure

(1) AL0 1, 02, or 03 occurs.
Control output: It is possible to make the settings so that the control action is
continued or stopped.
Other actions: Actions are continued.
(2) Alarm occurs other than those shown above.

All actions are continued.
The following table shows the indications and alarms of this unit by the sensor type
if PV input failure occurs:
Thermocouple
zz
Failure status Range No. Indication value Alarm code
Sensor burnout Upscale (110 %FS) AL0 1
CJ failure PV having incorrect cold AL03
junction compensation.
Over-range, burnout 19 (PLII) 1365 ˚C (105 %FS) AL0 1
RTD
zz
RTD burnout Upscale (110 %FS) AL0 1
A-wire burnout Upscale (110 %FS) AL0 1
B-wire burnout Upscale (110 %FS) AL0 1 , AL03
C-wire burnout Upscale (110 %FS) AL0 1 , AL03
2 or 3-wire burnout Upscale (110 %FS) AL0 1 , AL03
A and B-wire short-circuit Downscale (-10 %FS) AL02
A and C-wire short-circuit Downscale (-10 %FS) AL02
A and B-wire/A and C-wire 41,43 (Pt100) -235 ˚C (-5 %FS) AL02
short-circuit
A and B-wire/A and C-wire 42,44 (JPt100) -235 ˚C (-5 %FS) AL02
short-circuit
DC voltage/DC current
zz
Burnout 81 (0 to 10 mV) Upscale (110 %FS) AL0 1
82 (-10 to +10 mV) Upscale (110 %FS) AL0 1
83 (0 to 100 mV) Upscale (110 %FS) AL0 1
84 (0 to 1 V) Downscale (-3 %FS) AL02
88 (0 to 10 V) Downscale (0 %FS) None
89 (0 to 20 mA) Indefiniteness (around None
0 %FS)
90 (4 to 20 mA) Downscale (-10 %FS) AL02
10-3
Behavior in case of RSP input failure

When an alarm occurs, all actions are continued.
The following table shows the indications and alarms of this unit if RSP input
failure occurs:

Burnout 0 (4 to 20 mA) Downscale (-10 %FS) AL06
1 (0 to 20 mA) Indefiniteness (around None
0 %FS)
10-4
CAUTION
Do not change the mode to the calibration mode while the control object is being operated.
When this unit is put in the calibration mode, the control output and event output enter the
fixed status and they do not function. Always start the calibration by considering this point
carefully.
It may be required to disconnect and reconnect the wiring for calibration.
At this time, strictly observe the warnings and cautions about wiring stated in
Chapter 4, WIRING.
This chapter describes how to calibrate this unit.

To calibrate this unit, the SLP-C35 Smart Loader Package is required.
Starting the calibration

Start up the SLP-C35 Smart Loader Package. On the menu screen, select
[Calibration (J)] from the [Menu (M)] pull-down menu. The [Calibrate]
confirmation screen will appear.
On this screen, select [OK]. The Calibration screen will appear and this unit enters
the calibration mode.
When this unit is in the calibration mode, “tESt” will appear on the lower display.
However, note that another message appears when inspecting the LED.
• Azbil Corporation shall not be held responsible for any defects arising
from improper calibration made by the customer.
• To return the unit to the calibration status of the default settings before
shipment during calibration, follow the steps below. From the pull-down
menu, select [Command] → [Data retrieval]. The data, which has been
calibrated, is disposed of and the data is then returned to the default
settings before shipment. If this operation is performed accidentally
during calibration, all contents, which have been calibrated by the
customer, will be lost.
Exiting the calibration

To exit the calibration, perform either of the following operations:
(1) On the Calibration screen of the Smart Loader Package, select [Quit (Q)] from
the [File (F)] pull-down menu.
(2) Click [X] at the upper right corner of the Calibration screen to close the screen.
The screen will be returned to the menu screen and the unit also returns to the
normal mode.
If the loader cable is disconnected before starting the calibration exit
operation with the Smart Loader Package, this unit is continuously kept in
the calibration mode. At this condition, turn OFF the power, and turn it ON
again. The unit will return to the normal mode.
11-1
Cautions before starting the calibration

When calibrating the unit, strictly observe the following cautions. Failure to do so
may cause inaccuracy:
• Before starting the calibration, supply the power to this unit for at least 1 hr.
• The ambient temperature of the calibration place must conform to the standard
conditions specified in the unit specifications.
• Do not calibrate the unit in a place where it is in contact with the wind or during
ambient temperature fluctuation.
• Do not calibrate the unit with the measuring instruments having lower
specifications stated in the next section,  Measuring instruments required for
calibration.
Measuring instruments required for calibration

Measuring instrument Specifications
Reference current/voltage Accuracy: ±0.1 % or less,
generator Minimum resolution: 100 µV or less (voltage),
Minimum resolution: 100 µA or less (current)
Resistor Accuracy: ±0.1 % or less,
Minimum resolution: 0.1 Ω or less
Ammeter Accuracy: ±0.1 % or less,
Minimum resolution: 1 µA or less
Voltmeter Accuracy: ±0.1 % or less,
Minimum resolution: 1 mV or less
Thermometer Accuracy: ±0.1 ˚C or less,
Minimum resolution: 0.1 ˚C or less
Calibration procedures

I/O check
zz
(1) Select the [I/O Check] tab.
(2) Select a desired item from the check contents.
(3) Click [Execute].
The input system (key and digital input) is shown on the personal computer screen
while the input status (ON/OFF) of this unit is being read continuously.
For the output system (control output and event output), the status (ON/OFF) you
have checked on desired check boxes is output from the output terminal of this unit.
PV input calibration
zz
(1) Select the [PV Calibration] tab.
(2) Select the model, [4: C25/26/35/36 T/C], [5: C25/26/35/36 RTD], or [6:
C25/26/35/36 LIN].
(3) Select the gain No. in the ascending order and perform the operation from
step (4).
(4) Click [Read].
(5) Apply the voltage, current, and resistance values written next to the gain No. to
the PV input terminal.
11-2
For details about how to connect measuring instruments in the apply status, refer to
the following figures:
• The PV input type is T/C (thermocouple).
This unit
(10)
Voltage
generator (11) -
(12) +
• The PV input type is RTD.
This unit
(10)
Resistor (11)
(12)
• The PV input type is LIN (DC voltage/DC current).
Gain Nos. 1 to 12 (voltage) This unit Gain Nos. 13 to 16 (current) This unit
(10) (10) +
Voltage Current
(11) - (11) -
generator generator
(12) + (12)
(6) Keep the apply status for approximately 30 s.
(7) Click [Write].
(8) Return to step (3) and repeat the procedure until the final gain No. is
completed.
• In the PV input calibration, always adjust all gains.
• Do not leave the PV input terminal open during heat-up between
power ON of this unit and starting of calibration. When the input type is
thermocouple or DC voltage, put the unit in the 0 volt input (or terminals
are short-circuited) status. When the input type is RTD, put the unit in the
100 Ω-input (or terminals are short-circuited) status.
11-3
RSP input calibration

zz
(1) Select the [PV Calibration] tab.
(2) Select the model [7: C35/36 RSP].
(3) Select the gain No. in the ascending order and perform the operation from
step (4).
(4) Click [Read].
(5) Apply the voltage and current values written next to the gain No. to the PV
input terminal.
For details about how to connect measuring instruments in the apply status, refer to
the following Figures:
Gain Nos. 1 and 2 (current) Gain Nos. 3 and 4 (voltage)

This unit This unit
Current Voltage
generator (18) + generator (18) +
(19) - (19) -
(6) Keep the apply status for approximately 30 s.
(7) Click [Write].
(8) Return to step (3) and repeat the procedure until the final gain No. is
completed.
• In the RSP input calibration, it is always necessary to adjust all gains.
• Do not leave the RSP input terminal open during heat-up between power
ON of this unit and starting of calibration. When the input type is DC
voltage, put the unit in the 0 volt input (or terminals are short-circuited)
status.
11-4
Current Transformer (CT) input calibration

zz
(1) Select the [CT input calibration] tab.
(2) Select a desired channel to be calibrated.
(3) Select [Zero] from the zero span selection items.

(When selecting a channel, perform the [Zero] calibration first, and then
perform the [Span] calibration next since “Zero/Span” is set for one channel.)
(4) Click [Read].
(5) A current value of “0” is applied to the CT input terminal of the channel you
have selected and keep the apply status for approximately 30 s. For details
about how to connect measuring instruments in the apply status, refer to the
following Figures:
CT input 1 This unit CT input 2 This unit
(7) + (7)
Current Current
generator (8) - generator (8) -
(9) (9) +
(6) Click [Write].
(7) Select [Span] from the zero span selection items.
(8) Click [Read].
(9) Apply a span current value to the CT input terminal of the channel you have
selected and keep the apply status for approximately 30 s.
(10) Click [Write].
(11) If any channels to be calibrated remain, return to operation step (2).
To calibrate the CT input, connect the DC current (mA) to the input
terminal.
11-5
Current output/continuous voltage output calibration

zz
(1) Select the [Analog Output Calibration] tab.
(2) Select a desired channel to be calibrated.

Select [ch1] for control output 1, [ch2] for control output 2, and [ch3] for
auxiliary output.
(3) Select [Zero] from the zero span selection items.

(When selecting a channel, perform the [Zero] calibration first, and then
perform the [Span] calibration next since “Zero/Span” is set for one channel.)
(4) When clicking [Read], the zero calibration current/continuous voltage is

output to the output terminal of the channel you have selected.
(5) Keep this status for approximately 30 s.
(6) Read the current value in units of 0.001 mA from the ammeter or the voltage
value in units of 0.001 V from the voltmeter, input them in [Current (mA)/
Voltage (V)], and click [Write].
(7) Select [Span] from the zero span selection items.
(8) When clicking [Read], the span calibration current/continuous voltage is

output to the output terminal of the channel you have selected.
(9) Keep this status for approximately 30 s.
(10) Read the current value in units of 0.001 mA from the ammeter or the voltage
value in units of 0.001 V from the voltmeter, input them in [Current (mA)/
Voltage (V)], and click [Write].
(11) If any channels to be calibrated remain, return to operation step (2).

For details about how to connect measuring instruments, refer to the following
Figures:
Control output 1 is Control output 2 is Auxiliary output is

the current output. the current output. the current output.
(13) + (13)
Ammeter (14) - Ammeter (14) - Ammeter (16) +
(15) (15) + (17) -
Control output 1 is the Control output 2 is the Auxiliary output is the

continuous voltage output. continuous voltage output. continuous voltage output.
(13) + (13)
Voltmeter (14) - Voltmeter (14) - Voltmeter (16) +
(15) (15) + (17) -
11-6
Chapter 12. DISPOSAL
When disposing of this unit, dispose of it appropriately as an industrial waste in accordance with local laws and
regulations.
12-1
Specifications

PV input
zz
Thermocouple: K,J,E,T,R,S,B,N (JIS C1602-1995)
PL II (Engelhard Industries Data (ITS90))
WRe5-26 (ASTM E988-96(Reapproved 2002))
Ni-NiMo (ASTM E1751-00)
PR40-20 (Johnson Matthey Data)
DIN U,DIN L (DIN 43710-1985)
Gold iron chromel (Hayashidenko Data)
Resistance temperature detector (RTD):
Pt100 (JIS C1604-1997)
JPt100 (JIS C1604-1989)
DC voltage: 0 to 10 mV, -10 to +10 mV, 0 to 100 mV,
0 to 1 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V
DC current: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Selection of input type: A desired type can be selected (full-multi range).
Sampling cycle time: 100 ms
Indication accuracy: ±0.1 %FS±1 digit, ±0.2 %FS±1digit in the negative area of the thermocouple
(Specified by the input conversion at an ambient temperature of 23±2 °C)
However, the following ranges have different values:
• Sensor type B (range 17):
±4 %FS at 260 °C or less, ±0.4 %FS at 260 to 800 °C, ±0.2 %FS at 800 to
1800 °C
The low limit for indication is 20 °C. However, if ROM version 1 of the
instrument information bank (I d02) is prior to 2.04, the low limit for
indication is -180 °C.
• Sensor type R (range 15), sensor type S (range 16):
±0.2 %FS at 100 °C or less, ±0.15 %FS at 100 to 1600 °C
• Sensor type PR40-20 (range 23):
±2.5 %FS at 0 to 300 °C, ±1.5 %FS at 300 to 800 °C, ±0.5 %FS at 800 to
1900 °C
• Sensor type golden iron chromel (range 26): ±1.5 K
• Sensor type Pt, JPt (RTD) (range 55 to 62): ±0.15 %FS
• Sensor type 0 to 10 mV (DC voltage) (range 81): ±0.15 %FS
Note: F or the indication accuracy of the unit in combination with zener barriers,
see chapter 4
Cold junction
compensation
accuracy: ±0.5 °C (at an ambient temperature of 23±2 °C)
±1.0 °C (at an ambient temperature of 15 to 35 °C)
±1.5 °C (at an ambient temperature of 0 to 15 °C or 35 to 50 °C)
Cold junction
compensation method: Compensation inside or outside (only at 0 °C) the measuring instrument
can be selected.
PV bias: -1999 to +9999 or -199.9 to +999.9
Thermocouple (T/C) input

zz
Input bias current: +0.2 μA (flows from terminal A.)
Burnout indication: Upscale + AL01
Diameter of the applicable
thermocouple or
compensating wire: 0.3 to 0.65 mm
Allowablr input voltage: -0.5 to +12 V
13-1
Resistance temperature detector (RTD) input

zz
Input bias current: Approx. +1 mA (flows from terminal A.)
Burnout indication: RTD burnout or A-wire burnout. . ......Upscale + AL01
B-wire burnout or C-wire burnout.....Upscale + AL01, AL03
2 or more wires burnout.. ..................Upscale + AL01, AL03
Effect of wiring
resistance: Max. ±0.05 %FS/Ω
Allowable wiring
resistance: 10 Ω or less for range No. 53 to 62 (Zener barrier cannot be used.)
85 Ω or less for ranges other than above range (including the resistance of
the Zener barrier)
Allowable input voltage: -0.5 to +12 V
DC voltage input
zz
Input impedance: Min. 1 MΩ
Input bias current: 1 V range or less. . ............................Max. 1 μA (flows to the (+) terminal)
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V range.....................Max. 3.5 μA (flows to the (+) terminal)
0 to 10 V range. . ..............................Max. 7 μA (flows to the (+) terminal)
Burnout indication: Downscale + AL02
However, the burnout cannot be detected in a range of 0 to 10V.
Allowable input voltage: -0.5 to +12 V
DC current input
zz
Input impedance: Max. 100 Ω
However, the burnout cannot be detected in a range of 0 to 20 mA.
Allowable input current: Max. 30 mA
Allowable input voltage: Max. 4 V (a higher voltage might cause input circuit failure)
*W
hen the power to this controller is turned off, the current input circuit is cut off. If you connect
two or more current-input type controllers in series, change the current input to voltage input by
connecting a resistor (No. 81401325, sold separately). See Chapter 4.
Motor feedback potentiometer input (R1 model)

zz
Allowable resistance: 100 to 2500 Ω
Burnout detection: AL07 indication
RSP input
zz
Input type: Linear 0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA or linear 0 to 5 V/1 to 5 V/0 to 10 V
Scaling: Possible in a range of -1999 to +9999. It is also possible to set the decimal
point position.
Sampling cycle: 100 ms
Indication accuracy: ±0.1 %FS±1digit (at an ambient temperature of 23±2 °C)
Voltage input specifications

zz
Input impedance: Min. 1 MΩ
Input bias current: 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V range......................... Max. 3 μA (flows to the (+) terminal)
0 to 10 V range...................................... Max. 5 μA (flows to the (+) terminal)
Current input specifications

zz
Input impedance: Max. 100 Ω
However, the burnout cannot be detected in a range of 0 to 20 mA.
Allowable input current: Max. 30 mA
Allowable input voltage: Max. 4 V(a higher voltage might cause device failure)
13-2
External contact input

zz
Number of input points: 4 points
Input type: Potential free contact or open collector
Allowable ON
contact resistance: Max. 250 Ω
Allowable OFF
contact resistance: Min.100 kΩ
Allowable ON-state
residual voltage: Max. 1.0 V
Open terminal voltage: DC5.5 V±1 V
ON terminal current: Approx. 7.5 mA (at short-circuit), Approx. 5.0 mA (at contact resistance of
250 Ω)
Min. hold time: 200 ms or more
Current transformer input

zz
Number of input points: 2 points
Input object: Current transformer with 100 to 4,000 turns (availability is by 100-turn
units)
Optional unit Model No.: QN206A* (800 turns, hole diameter: 5.8 mm)
Optional unit Model No.: QN212A* (800 turns, hole diameter: 12 mm)
* Not UL-certified.
Current measurement
lower limit: 0.4 A AC (800 turns, 1 time)
Formula; Number of turns ÷ (2000 × number of power wire loops)
Current measurement
upper limit: 50.0 A AC (800 turns, 1 time)
Formula; Number of turns ÷ (16 × number of power wire loops)
Allowable measured
current: 70.0 A AC (800 turns, 1 time)
Formula; Number of turns ÷ (16 × number of power wire loops) × 1.4
Display range lower
limit: 0.0 A AC
Display range upper
limit: 70.0 A AC (800 turns, 1 time)
Formula; Number of turns ÷ (16 × number of power wire loops) × 1.4
Display accuracy: ±5 %FS
Display resolution: 0.1 A AC
13-3
Control output
zz
Relay output
zz
Contact rating: NO side 250 V AC/30 V DC, 3 A (resistance load)
NC side 250 V AC/30 V DC, 1 A (resistance load)
Life: 50,000 cycles or more on NO side
100,000 cycles or more on NC side
Min. open/close
specifications: 5 V, 100 mA
Min. open time/
close times 250 ms
Motor relay output (model R1)

zz
Contact type: 1c (2 circuits: A contacts only)
Contact rating: 250 V AC, 8 A (resistive load)
250 V AC, 2 A (cos φ = 0.4)
24 V DC, 2.5 A (L/R = 0.7 ms)
Life: At least 120000 cycles (at the rated resistive load)
At least 100000 cycles (at the rated inductive load)
Minimum requirements for switching:
24 V DC, 40 mA
Voltage pulse output (For SSR drive)

zz
Voltage between
terminals at open: 19 V DC±15 %
Internal resistance: 82 Ω±0.5 %
Allowable current: Max. 24 mA DC (a higher current might cause output circuit failure)
OFF leak current: Max. 100 μA
Min. OFF time/
ON time: 1 ms when the time proportional cycle time is less than 10 s.
250 ms when the time proportional cycle time is more than 10 s.
Current output
zz
Output type: 0 to 20 mA DC or 4 to 20 mA DC
Allowance load
resistance: Max. 600 Ω
Output accuracy: ±0.1 %FS (at an ambient temperature of 23±2 °C)
However, ±1.0 %FS in a range of 0 to 1 mA.
Output resolution: 1/10000
Continuous voltage output

zz
Output type: 0 to 5 V DC, 1 to 5 V DC or 0 to 10 V DC
Allowable load
resistance: Min. 1000 Ω
However, ±1 %FS at 0 to 0.05 V.
Auxiliary output
zz
Current output
zz
Output type: 0 to 20 mA DC or 4 to 20 mA DC
Allowable load
resistance: Max. 600 Ω
However, ±1 %FS at 0 to 1 mA.
13-4
Continuous voltage output

zz
Output type: 0 to 5 V DC, 1 to 5 V DC or 0 to 10 V DC voltage output
Allowable load
resistance: Min. 1000 Ω
However, ±1 %FS at 0 to 0.05 V.
Event relay output

zz
Number of output
points: 2 to 3 points (This may vary depending on the model.)
Output type: SPST contact
3 points, 3 points/common; 2 points, Each individual contact
Output rating: 250 V AC/30 V DC, 2 A (resistive load)
Life: 100,000 cycles or more
Min. open/close
specifications: 5 V, 10 mA (Reference value)
RS-485 communication
zz
Transmission line: 3-wire method
Transmission speed: 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps
Communication
distance: Max. 500 m
Communication
method: Half duplex, start/stop synchronization method
Communication
protocol: In conformity with CPL and Modbus
Number of
connection units: Max. 31 units
Terminating resistor: Connection prohibited.
Loader communication
zz
Transmission line: 3-wire method
Transmission speed: Fixed at 19200 bps.
Recommended cable: Included with the SLP-C35J50.
Isolation between input and output

zz
Portions enclosed by solid lines are insulated from other signals.
Portions enclosed by dotted lines are not insulated.
Power supply Control output 1
PV input Control output 2
CT input 1 Auxiliary output
CT input 2
MFB input
Loader communication
Internal circuit
Digital input 1 Event output 1 *
Digital input 2 Event output 2 *
Event output 3
Digital input 3
Digital input 4
RS-485 communication
RSP input
The inputs and outputs provided may vary depending upon the model.
* In case of the independent contacts, the output 1 and the output 2 are isolated.
13-5
Environment conditions
zz
Standard conditions
zz
Ambient temperature: 23±2 °C
Ambient humidity: 60±5 %RH
Power supply voltage: AC power model, 105 V AC±1 %, 50/60 Hz±1 Hz
DC power model, 24 V AC±1 %, 50/60 Hz±1 Hz
24 V DC±5 %
Vibration: 0 m/s2
Shock: 0 m/s2
Mounting angle: (Reference plane) ±3 °
Operating conditions
zz
Ambient temperature: 0 to 50 °C (0 to 40 °C for gang-mounting)
Ambient humidity: 10 to 90 %RH (non-condensing)
Rated power
supply voltage: AC power model, 100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
DC power model, 24 V AC, 50/60 Hz or 24 V DC
Power supply voltage: AC power model, 85 to 264 V AC, 50/60 Hz±2 Hz
DC power model, 21.6 to 26.4 V AC, 50/60±2 Hz or 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Vibration: 0 to 2 m/s2 (10 to 60 Hz for 2 h in each of the X, Y, and Z-direction)
Shock: 0 to 10 m/s2
Mounting angle: Reference plane (vertical) ±10 °
Transportation conditions
zz
Ambient temperature: -20 to +70 °C
Ambient humidity: 10 to 95 %RH (non-condensing)
Other specifications
zz
Power consumption: AC power model, Max. 12 VA
DC power model, Max. 12 VA (24 V AC), Max. 8 W (24 V DC)
Insulation resistance: Between power supply terminal and secondary terminal, 500 V DC, 20 MΩ
or more
Dielectric strength: AC power model, Between power supply terminal and secondary terminal,
1500 V AC for 1 min.
DC power model, Between power supply terminal and secondary terminal,
500 V AC for 1 min.
Inrush current at
power ON: AC power model, Max. 20 A
DC power model, Max. 20 A
Non-detected power
failure time: Max.20 ms (AC model)
No power failure allowed (DC model)
Altitude: 2000 m or less
Mass: C35 48 × 96 Approx. 250 g (including mounting bracket)
C36 96 × 96 Approx. 300 g (including mounting bracket)
Terminal screw
tightening torque: 0.4 to 0.6 N·m
Standards compliance: EN61010-1,
EN61326-1 (For use in industrial locations)
During EMC testing, the reading or output may fluctuate by ±10 %FS.
Over-voltage category: Category II (IEC60364-4-443, IEC60664-1)
Allowable pollution
degree: 2
Console material: Polycarbonate
Case material/color: Reformed PPE/Light gray (DIC650)
13-6

Name Model No.
Mounting bracket 81409654-001 (Accessory)
Current transformer QN206A* (800 turns, 5.8 mm hole dia.)
QN212A* (800 turns, 12 mm hole dia.)
Hard cover 81446915-001 (for C35)
81446916-001 (for C36)
Soft cover 81441121-001 (for C35)
81441122-001 (for C36)
Terminal cover 81446912-001 (for C35)
81446913-001 (for C36)
Smart Loader Package SLP-C35J50
* Not UL-certified.
13-7
Appendix
Glossary
Abbreviations are used in the descriptions, tables, and figures in this manual. The following shows the main abbreviations:
AT Auto Tuning
CT Current Transformer
DI Digital Input
DO Digital Output
(Control outputs of relay and voltage pulse, and event output)
EV Event
LSP Local Set Point. This value is the SP value stored in the instrument.
MFB Motor Feed Back. This indicates the feed back of motor opening which is used for position proportional control.
MV Manipulated Variable
PV Process Variable
RSP Remote Set Point. This is the set point which is set by the analog input from an external device.
SP Set Point
U Unit. This indicates the minimum digit of the selected PV input range with industrial unit (°C, Pa, L/min., etc.).
1 U = 1 °C in a range of –200 to +200 °C. 1 U = 0.1 °C in a range of 0.0 to 200.0 °C. Additionally, 1 U = 0.01
when the DC voltage input is scaled to 0.00 to 10.00. Furthermore, 0.1 U means 1/10 of 1 U.
App.-1
Index
Number C22 Initial output of PID control 5-17
3-wire system 4-6 C23 PID Decimal point position 5-17
5-wire system 4-7 C24 Zone PID operation 5-23
C26 Heat/Cool control 5-15
A C27 Heat/Cool 5-24
Accessories 1-3 C28 Heat/Cool control dead zone 5-24
Alarm code 10-2 C29 Heat/Cool change point 5-24
Application example 5-80 C30 LSP system group 5-33, 5-43
Application layer 7-6, 7-3 C31 SP ramp type 5-33, 5-44
AT Derivative time adjust 5-26 C32 SP ramp unit 5-38, 5-45
AT Integral time adjust 5-26 C33 STEP time unit 5-45
AT Proportional Band adjust 5-26 C34 STEP PV start 5-46
AT start 5-29 C35 STEP loop 5-47
AT Stop/Start 5-11 C36 CT1 operation type 5-91
AT type 5-26 C37 CT1 output 5-91
Auto tuning (AT) 5-26, 5-29 C38 CT1 measurement wait time 5-91
AUTO/MANUAL mode 5-10 C39 CT2 operation type 5-91
Auxiliary relay 4-4 C40 CT2 output 5-91
C41 CT2 measurement wait time 5-91
B C42 Control output 1 range 5-87
Bank selection display 2-3 C43 Control output 1 type 5-87
Bank setup display 2-3 C44 Control output 1 scaling low limit 5-88
Basic configuration 2-1, 2-7 C45 Control output 1 scaling high limit 5-88
C46 Control output 1 MV scalable bandwidth 5-89
C C47 Control output 2 range 5-87
C01 PV input range type 5-1 C48 Control output 2 type 5-87
C02 Temperature unit 5-3 C49 Control output 2 scaling low limit 5-88
C03 Cold junction compensation (T/C) 5-3 C50 Control output 2 scaling high limit 5-88
C04 Decimal point position 5-5 C51 Control output 2 MV scalable bandwidth 5-89
C05 PV range low limit 5-6 C52 Auxiliary output range 5-87
C06 PV range high limit 5-6 C53 Auxiliary output type 5-87
C07 SP low limit 5-42 C54 Auxiliary output scaling low limit 5-88
C08 SP high limit 5-42 C55 Auxiliary output scaling high limit 5-88
C09 PV square root extraction dropout 5-4 C56 Auxiliary output MV scalable bandwidth 5-89
C10 RSP input range type 5-33 C57 Position proportional type 5-109
C11 RSP range low limit 5-34 C58 Position proportional dead zone 5-111
C12 RSP range high limit 5-34 C59 Motor long life mode 5-111
C14 Control action (Direct/Reverse) 5-15 C60 Motor adjust 5-111
C15 Output operation at PV alarm 5-15 C61 Input with motor fully closed 5-115
C16 Output at PV alarm 5-15 C62 Input with motor fully open 5-115
C17 Output at READY (Heat) 5-15 C63 Motor full close-full open time 5-115
C18 Output at READY (Cool) 5-15 C64 Communication type 7-1
C19 Output operation at changing Auto/Manual 5-16 C65 Station address 7-1
C20 Preset manual value 5-16 C66 Transmission speed 7-1
C21 Initial output type (mode) of PID control 5-16 C67 Data format (Data length) 7-1
Index-1
C68 Data format (Parity) 7-1 WD command 7-10
C69 Data format (Stop bit) 7-1 WS command 7-8
C70 Response time-out 7-1 WU command 7-12
C71 Key operation mode/type 5-94 Communication data 9-1
C72 [mode] key function 5-94 Communication DI 5-11
C73 MODE display setup 5-95 Communication lock 5-107
C74 PV/SP display setup 5-96 Communication mode 7-1
C75 MV display setup 5-97 Communication monitor display 5-99
C76 Event setting value display setup 5-98 Communication function 7-1
C77 Event remaining time display setup 5-98 Communication procedures 7-2, 8-2
C78 CT input current value display setup 5-99 Connection of communication cable 4-6
C79 User level 5-99 Console display 5-94
C80 LED monitor 5-99 Console 1-4, 1-5, 2-2
C81 MS indicating lamp ON condition Constant current type 4-8
(1st priority) 5-100 Continuous data read 7-7
C82 MS indicating lamp ON status Continuous data write 7-8
(1st priority) 5-100 Continuous output 5-87
C83 MS indicating lamp ON condition Continuous voltage output 5-86
(2nd priority) 5-100 Control action (Direct/Reverse) 5-15
C84 MS indicating lamp ON status Control algorithm 5-28
(2nd priority) 5-100 Control method 5-14
C85 MS indicating lamp ON condition Controller alarm OR 5-67
(3rd priority) 5-100 CPL communication 7-1
C86 MS indicating lamp ON status CR filter 4-12
(3rd priority) 5-100 Crimp type terminal 4-5
C87 MS indicating lamp deviation range 5-100 Current transformer (CT) input 2-1, 5-89
C88 Special function 5-8 CT display setup 5-99
C89 Zener barrier adjustment 5-8 CT input calibration 11-5
C90 Number of CT1 turns 5-92 CT measurement wait time 5-91
C91 Number of CT1 power wire loops 5-92 CT operation type 5-89, 5-91
C92 Number of CT2 turns 5-92 CT output 5-91
C93 Number of CT2 power wire loops 5-92 Current output 5-87
C97 PV input failure (under range) type 5-6 Current transformer input 2-1
Calibration of current output/continuous Current transformer 1-3
voltage output 11-6
Calibration 11-1 D
Cap 1-4 Data Address 7-13, 8-11
CE marking 1-1 Data format 7-1
Checksum (LRC) 8-3 Data link layer 7-3
Checksum 7-4 Data setting procedures 2-4
Cold junction compensation (T/C) 5-1, 5-3 Decimal point position 5-1, 5-5
Command Delay unit 5-67
RD command 7-9 Derivative time 5-19
RS command 7-7 Device ID code 7-3, 7-4
RU command 7-11 DI Assignment, Internal contact 5-37, 5-42
Index-2
DI 2-1, 5-51 Fixed length random data write 7-12
Digital input 2-1, 4-6 Fuse replacement 10-1
Display at power ON 2-3
DISPOSAL 12-1 G
DO 5-71 Gain adjustment 11-3
Gang-mounting 3-2
E
Energy saving 5-24 H
EV display setup 5-98 Hard cover 1-3, 3-4
Event output 2-1 Heat/Cool change point 5-24
Event 5-58 Heat/Cool control calculation 5-24
Alarm 5-64 Heat/Cool control deadband 5-24
Control action (Direct) 5-64 Heat/Cool control 5-15
Deviation high limit 5-59 Heat/Cool 5-24
Deviation high/low limit 5-60 High function configuration 2-7
Deviation low limit 5-59 Host device 7-1
During AT 5-64 Hysteresis 5-68
During SP ramp 5-64
During estimated position control 5-64 I
Heater 1 burnout 5-60 I/O check 11-2
Heater 1 short-circuit 5-60 IEC directive 1-1
Heater 2 burnout 5-60 Initial output of PID control 5-17
Heater 2 short-circuit 5-60 Initial output 5-19
Invalid 5-64 Initialization 5-16
Loop diagnosis 5-61, 5-62, 5-63 Input assign polarity 5-56
MANUAL 5-64 Input assign 5-55
MV high limit 5-60 Input bit function 5-51, 5-54
MV high/low limit 5-60 input types 1-1
MV low limit 5-60 Input with motor fully closed 5-115
PV high limit 5-59 Input with motor fully open 5-115
PV high/low limit 5-59 Installation place 3-1
PV low limit 5-59 Integration time 5-19
READY 5-64 Internal contact operation type 5-52
RSP 5-64 Internal contact 5-51
SP high limit 5-60 Internal event No. definition 5-53
SP high/low limit 5-60 Internal Event Operation type 5-65
SP low limit 5-60 Internal Event 5-51
Timer 5-64 Isolation 13-4
External dimensions 3-2
J
F Jack cover 1-4, 1-6
Fixed length continuous data read 7-9 Just-FiTTER assistance coefficient 5-28
Fixed length continuous data write 7-10 Just-FiTTER settling band 5-28
Fixed length random data read 7-11 Just-FiTTER 1-1, 5-28
Index-3
K Multi Status (MS) display, Status 5-100
Key lock 5-107 Multi-ramp 5-33, 5-40
Key operation type 5-91 MV display setup 5-97
MV high limit at AT 5-26
L MV low limit at AT 5-26
Latch 5-78 MV process 5-72
Line filter 4-12 MV scaling range 5-89
Loader 1-4, 1-6 MV 5-19
Loader lock 5-107
Loop 5-47 N
Lower display 1-4, 1-5 Noise Preventive Measures 4-12
LSP group No. 5-36 Number of connectable units 4-8, 4-9, 4-10
LSP system group 5-33, 5-43 Number of CT turns and number of CT
LSP 5-32, 5-33 power wire loops 5-92
LSP/RSP mode 5-10 Number of steps 5-43
Numeric representation 7-14
M
Main setting 5-68 O
Maintenance 10-1 OFF delay 5-69
Manual reset 5-19 ON delay 5-69
Master station 7-1 ON/OFF control point 5-18
Message Structure 7-3, 8-3 ON/OFF control 5-14, 5-18
MFB input 2-1 ON/OFF control differential 5-18
MFB 5-109 Operation display 2-3
Modbus ASCII 8-3 Operation Modes 2-8
Modbus communications 8-1 Operation type of internal contact 5-50
Modbus RTU 8-5 Optional parts 1-3
MODE display setup 5-95 Output assign 5-75
Mode indicators 1-4, 1-6 Output at PV alarm 5-15
[mode] key function 5-96 Output at READY 5-15
[mode] key operating procedures 2-7 Output operation at changing Auto/Manual 5-16
Model selection table 1-2 Output operation at PV alarm 5-15
Motor auto adjust 5-111 Output range 5-87
Motor drive relay output 4-4 Output scaling 5-88
Motor full close-full open time 5-115 Output type 1-1, 5-87
Motor long life mode 5-111 Output 2-1
Motor wiring 5-115 Over-voltage category 13-5
Mounting bracket 3-3
Mounting procedures 3-3 P
Multi Status (MS) display 1-4, 1-6, 5-100 Password 5-108
Multi Status (MS) display, Condition 5-100 Phase angle control 4-3
Multi Status (MS) display, Deviation graph 5-101 PID control initialization 5-16
Multi Status (MS) display, Deviation OK 5-101 PID control 5-19
Multi Status (MS) display, Monitor 5-102 PID decimal point position 5-19
Multi Status (MS) display, MV graph 5-102 PID fixed control 5-19
Index-4
PID group No. for LSP 5-35 Response start conditions 7-3
PID group No. for RSP 5-35 RS command 7-7
PID group No. 5-36 RS-485 driver control timing 7-16
Polarity of function 5-56, 5-78 RSP bias 5-34
Polarity of output assign 5-76 RSP filter 5-35
Position proportional control 5-109 RSP high limit alarm 5-35
Position proportional deadband 5-110 RSP high limit 5-35
Position proportional type 5-109 RSP input calibration 11-4
Preset MANUAL value 5-16 RSP input 2-1
Proportional band 5-19 RSP low limit alarm 5-35
PV bias 5-6 RSP low limit 5-35
PV filter 5-7 RSP range high limit 5-34
PV high limit alarm 5-7 RSP range low limit 5-34
PV high limit 5-7 RSP range 5-34
PV hold 5-7 RSP ratio 5-34
PV input calibration RSP 5-32, 5-35
DC voltage/DC current input 11-3 RTD 5-1, 5-2
PV input calibration (RTD input) 11-3 RU command 7-11
PV input calibration (thermocouple input) 11-3 RUN/READY mode 5-10
PV input calibration 11-2
PV input failure 10-3 S
PV input range high limit 5-6 Sample program 7-17, 7-18
PV input range low limit 5-6 Sampling cycle 13-1
PV input range type 5-1, 5-2 Scaling 5-1
PV input 2-1, 5-1 Sensor type 5-2
PV low limit alarm 5-7 SOAK 5-43
PV low limit 5-7 Soft cover 1-3, 3-5
PV range table 5-2 SP high limit 5-42
PV ratio 5-6 SP lag 5-28
PV square root extraction 5-1 SP low limit 5-42
PV square root extraction dropout 5-4 SP multi-ramp 5-40
PV start 5-46 SP ramp disabled 5-42
PV/SP display setup 5-96 SP ramp enabled 5-42
SP ramp type 5-33, 5-44
R SP ramp unit 5-38, 5-45
RAMP 5-43 SP down ramp 5-38
Ramp-down 5-38 SP up ramp 5-38
Ramp-up 5-38 SP 5-32
RationaLOOP 1-1, 5-28 Special function 5-8
RD command 7-9 Special OFF setup 5-67
Read command (03H) 8-6, 8-7 Special type 2-5
Reception and transmission timing 7-16 SSR 4-8
Release all DO latches 5-11 Stand-alone mounting 3-3
Resistor type 4-8 Standard ramp 5-33
Response monitor time 7-16 Standard setup 2-7
Index-5
Standard type 2-4 Z
Standby 5-66 Zener barrier adjustment 5-8
Station address 7-1, 7-4 Zone PID 5-23
Step hold status 5-50
STEP loop 5-47
STEP operation 5-43
STEP PV start 5-46
STEP time unit 5-45
Sub setting 5-68
Sub-address 7-3, 7-4
T
Temperature unit 5-1, 5-3
Terminal assignment label 4-3
Terminal cover 1-3, 4-2
Terminal part 1-7
Terminating resistor 4-4, 4-6, 4-7
Termination code 7-15
Thermocouple 5-1
Tightening torque 4-3, 13-5
Time proportional cycle mode 5-72
Time proportional cycle 5-72
Timer remaining time display setup 5-98
Transition 2-8
Transmission speed 7-1
Transmission start time 7-16
Tree structure 2-2
U
Upper display 1-4, 1-5
User function 5-103
User level 2-7, 5-99
V
Voltage between terminals 4-8, 4-9, 4-10
W
WD command 7-10
Wiring resistance 5-9
Write command (10H) 8-9, 8-6
Writing conditions 7-13
Writing data range 7-13
WS command 7-8
WU command 7-12
Index-6
Revision History of CP-SP-1150E
Date Rev. Revised pages Description

Feb. 2004 1
Oct. 2004 2 1-2, 4-3, 13-5 DC power model added.
1-7, 13-5 The tightening torque of the terminal screw changed. 0.4N•m or less→0.4 to
0.6 N•m or less.
4-9 Resistor type SSR added.
4-10 Connection method for the motor drive relay output(R1) added.
5-59 Note about CT1/2 heater burnout/over-current and short-circuit added.
5-86 Contents about unit added in the table.
5-104 Setting 0 and an explanation added in the table. Handling Precautions added.
5-106 Handling Precautions added.
6-14 Remarks about C42 to C45 added.
13-1 A standard of temperature sensor about input type added.
May 2005 3 3-4 Mounting procedures 2nd contents changed.
5-2 PV input range table *1,*2 added.
5-5 Handling Precautions explanation added.
5-13 MV rate-change limit (Setting: Parameter oUtL) added.
5-18 Output viriation limit added.
5-23 Priorities for PID group change added.
5-24 Hysteresis for zone added.
5-25 Change point→50.0% changed.
5-38 SP ramp-up/ramp-down,explanation item added.
5-51 Event channel definitions Contents changed.
5-62 High and Low limits of MFB value added. Note *1 added.
5-63 Handling Precautions added.
5-85 Output type Contents No. 10,11 added. explanation 2 item.
5-87 MV scaling range added.
5-88, 5-89 Old 5-87 to 5-89 pages.
5-90, 5-91 Number of CT turns and number of CT power wire loops added.
5-92 to 5-113 Old 5-89 to 5-110 pages.
6-14, 6-15 C46, 51, 56 added. Handling Precautions added.
6-18 C90 to 93 added. Handling Precautions added.
6-19 Display E1.C1 Contents 33 added. Handling Precautions added.
7-3 to 7-5 Device ID code changed to Device code.
9-2, 9-3 Control output 1, 2 and Auxiliary output 3 MV scaling added.
10-2 Alarm displays and corrective action AL11 added. Handling Precautions added.
10-3 to 10-4 Old 10-2 to 10-3 pages.
13-1 A standard of temperature sensor about input type added. DC voltage input
Input impedance added.
13-3 Current transformer input changed.
13-5 to 13-7 Old 13-4 to 13-6 pages.
13-6 Non-detected power failure time added.
Sep. 2005 4 4-5 Digital input circuit diagram changed.
4-7 Constant current type added.
5-73 Contents 44 (AL01 to AL99) added. Contents 45 (AL01 to AL03) added.
6-10 Display CYU, CY2 Remarks changed.
13-1 Diameter of the applicable thermocouple or compensating wire added.
Feb. 2006 5 Manual name changed.
5-1 PV input range type: this item transferred from page 5-2.
5-2 PV range tables totally changed.
Explanation changed in the first item of Handling Precautions.
5-5 Explanation changed.
5-8 Adjusting procedures (1), table: Applicable PV range type changed for
Wiring status 1.
5-105 Note added to the section on key lock, communications lock, and loader lock.
13-2 DC current input: “Allowable input current: Max. 30mA” added.
June 2006 6 v Manual name changed.
4-11 Section 4-2 Recommended Cables added.
5-2 PV input range table (Thermocouple) and
PV input range table (RTD): range (Fahrenheit) added.
5-39 PV multi-ramp table: user level item high function to standard changed.
5-64 Table added in the two item of Handling Precautions.
5-97 User level table: Initial value item 0 to 1 changed.
5-101 User Function bank: explanation added.
6-4 rmP.1 to rmP.8 user level item: 2 to 1 changed, tIm.1 to tIm.8 user level item: 2
to 1 changed.
6-17 C79 user level item: 0 to 1 changed.
Nov. 2006 7 1-3 Soft cover added.
3-1 to 3-4 Layout changed. Old 3-1 to 3-6 page.
3-5 Using a soft cover: this item was added.
5-49 Flow chart for “Input bit function is not used”: polarity added.
5-51 Set value No.8: “(Note 1)” deleted.
Set value No.7: “(Note 1)” added.
5-85 Contents No.6 of Out type: “(PV-SP)” added.
6-30 Contents of ROM ID: 2fixed.
13-6 Applicable standards: EN61326-1 changed to EN61326.
13-7 Soft cover added.
Mar. 2007 8 Various clarifications.
1-1 Standards compliance: EN61326-1 changed to EN61326.
5-26 Note of AT derivative time adjustment coefficient: added.
Initial value of At-d: changed.
5-31, 5-107 Item 1 added.
13-2 Input impedance of DC voltage input: 1MΩ changed to Min. 1MΩ.
Apr. 2007 9 5-99 Lighting range of deviation graph: -100.1% or less changed to -100.0% or less.
Jan. 2008 10 v, vi Description on SDC35/36 Quick Reference Guide added.
D-1 to D-8 SDC35/36 Quick Reference Guide added.
5-2 Note *3,*4 added.
5-9 2nd item of Handling Precautions changed.
9-11 Remarks of item input alarm status: Description added.
13-2 Allowable input voltage added.
Aug. 2008 11 v Manual No. CP-UM-5289E to CP-UM-5289JE changed.
13-1 Sampling cycle time 0.1s to 100ms changed.
13-2 Input impedance of voltage input specifications:
Max. 1MΩ to min. 1MΩ changed.
Current input specifications:
Allowable input current and allowable input voltage added.
June 2009 12 End paper RESTRICTIONS ON USE deleted.
i, 1-1, 13-6 Standards compliance: “EN61326” changed to “EN61326-1.”
D-6 Parameter bank note *1 was changed.
2-3 Description of key operation corrected.
3-1 Installation locations: item added.
4-10 “Connection with current-input type controllers” section added.
“Noise preventive measures” section was moved to page 4-11.
4-12 Old page 4-11.
5-34, 5-35 “RSP ratio and RSP bias” and “RSP filter” sections: “Standard” was added to the
User level.
5-37 “SP ramp unit” section was moved to page 5-38.
5-38 SP ramp-up/ramp-down: Explanation added.
5-39 SP multi-ramp: “High function” was added to the User level.
5-107 “Modutrol motor” was changed to “motor.”
6-10 User level for RSP filter and RSP bias: “0” changed to “1.”
7-5 Command details were added to the sample message.
7-6 “Application layer” section was moved from page 7-5.
7-7 to 7-18 Old page 7-6 to 7-16.
7-17 “Compiling” section added.
7-18 “Running the sample program” section added.
“Prosessing of the sample program” sections were moved from page 7-17.
13-1, 13-2 • Thermocouple (T/C) input,
• Resistance temperature detector (RTD) input and • DC voltage input:
Allowable input voltage wore added.
End of book Terms and Conditions added.
Nov. 2010 13 iii 2nd WARNING: Explanation changed.
2-3 Figure was changed.
4-1 1st WARNING: Explanation changed.
5-26 AT type: Initial value changed from 0 to1.
5-110 3rd motor auto adjusting procedure: 4th item partly deleted.
4th motor auto adjusting procedure: Description added to 3rd item
13-4 • Motor drive relay output (R1 model):
Description added to contact type
• Voltage pulse output (For SSR drive):
Description added to allowable current
June 2011 14 5-39, 5-40, 5-49 Handling Precautions added.
5-40 to 5-115 Old page 5-39 to 5-113
Apr. 2012 15 Company name changed.
Aug. 2012 16 5-45 The initial value of AT type was changed from 1 to 0.
6-11 Handling precautions for STEP time unit were added.
10-3 Range Nos. 81, 82, and 83: "Downscale (-10, %FS), AL02" was changed to
"Upscale (110 %FS), AL02."
Jan. 2013 17 4-3 Wiring precautions changed.
13-4 • Motor relay output (model R1) changed.
Nov. 2013 18 i, 1-3 Specifications of common mode voltage to ground were changed.
1-2 Model selection table was changed. Note 4 was added.
1-4 Descriptions for figures were added.
3-1 A location was added to “Installation place.”
4-2, 4-3 Wiring Precautions were changed.
4-11 “Wiring with zener barriers” section was added.
5-2 Handling Precaution was added.
5-8 Descriptions were changed in “Zener barrier adjustment” section.
5-9 Handling Precautions were changed and added.
5-24, 5-25 “Heat/cool output” section was added.
13-1 A note was added to the specifications for PV input.
End of the manual Terms and Conditions were changed (to version No. AA511A-014-03).
Mar. 2014 19 1-3, 13-3, 13-7 A note was added to the specifications for current transformer input.
4-11 Azbil Corporation’s line filter model No. was changed.
Nov. 2014 20 Cover A notice saying “Not for use in Japan” was added.
iii, 4-1 Caution was changed.
1-2 Table of “  Model selection table” changed.
6-13 Table of “  Setup bank” changed.
Oct. 2016 21 i, 10-1 The 500 mA rated current was rewritten as 0.5 A.
i Installation location and Altitude were added.
i, 13-6 STANDARDS COMPLIANCE was changed.
D-3, D-6, 6-12, 9-2 C13 was added.
D-3, D-7, 5-6, C97 was added.
6-18, 9-3
1-2 The model selection table was changed.
5-3 Table note of “  PV input range type” changed.
13-5 The description of the loader cable specification was changed.
Sep. 2019 22 Overall revision. 22nd ed = 30th Jp ed.
Terms and Conditions
We would like to express our appreciation for your purchase and use of Azbil Corporation’s products.
You are required to acknowledge and agree upon the following terms and conditions for your purchase of Azbil Corporation’s products (system
products, field instruments, control valves, and control products), unless otherwise stated in any separate document, including, without limitation,
estimation sheets, written agreements, catalogs, specifications and instruction manuals.
1. Warranty period and warranty scope
1.1 Warranty period
Azbil Corporation’s products shall be warranted for one (1) year from the date of your purchase of the said products or the delivery of the
said products to a place designated by you.
1.2 Warranty scope
In the event that Azbil Corporation’s product has any failure attributable to azbil during the aforementioned warranty period, Azbil
Corporation shall, without charge, deliver a replacement for the said product to the place where you purchased, or repair the said
product and deliver it to the aforementioned place. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any failure falling under one of the following shall
not be covered under this warranty:
(1) Failure caused by your improper use of azbil product (noncompliance with conditions, environment of use, precautions, etc. set
forth in catalogs, specifications, instruction manuals, etc.);
(2) Failure caused for other reasons than Azbil Corporation’s product;
(3) Failure caused by any modification or repair made by any person other than Azbil Corporation or Azbil Corporation’s
subcontractors;
(4) Failure caused by your use of Azbil Corporation’s product in a manner not conforming to the intended usage of that product;
(5) Failure that the state-of-the-art at the time of Azbil Corporation’s shipment did not allow Azbil Corporation to predict; or
(6) Failure that arose from any reason not attributable to Azbil Corporation, including, without limitation, acts of God, disasters, and
actions taken by a third party.
Please note that the term “warranty” as used herein refers to equipment-only-warranty, and Azbil Corporation shall not be liable for any
damages, including direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages in connection with or arising out of Azbil Corporation’s
products.
2. Ascertainment of suitability
You are required to ascertain the suitability of Azbil Corporation’s product in case of your use of the same with your machinery,
equipment, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “Equipment”) on your own responsibility, taking the following matters into consideration:
(1) Regulations and standards or laws that your Equipment is to comply with.
(2) Examples of application described in any documents provided by Azbil Corporation are for your reference purpose only, and
you are required to check the functions and safety of your Equipment prior to your use.
(3) Measures to be taken to secure the required level of the reliability and safety of your Equipment in your use
Although azbil is constantly making efforts to improve the quality and reliability of Azbil Corporation’s products, there exists
a possibility that parts and machinery may break down. You are required to provide your Equipment with safety design such
as fool-proof design,*1 and fail-safe design*2 (anti-flame propagation design, etc.), whereby preventing any occurrence of
physical injuries, fires, significant damage, and so forth. Furthermore, fault avoidance,*3 fault tolerance,*4 or the like should be
incorporated so that the said Equipment can satisfy the level of reliability and safety required for your use.
*1. A design that is safe even if the user makes an error.
*2. A design that is safe even if the device fails.
*3. Avoidance of device failure by using highly reliable components, etc.
*4. The use of redundancy.
3. Precautions and restrictions on application
3.1 Restrictions on application
Please follow the table below for use in nuclear power or radiation-related equipment.
Nuclear power quality*5 required Nuclear power quality*5 not required

Within a radiation Cannot be used (except for limit switches for Cannot be used (except for limit switches for
controlled area*6 nuclear power*7) nuclear power*7)
Outside a radiation Cannot be used (except for limit switches for Can be used
controlled area*6 nuclear power*7)
*5. Nuclear power quality: compliance with JEAG 4121 required

*6. R adiation controlled area: an area governed by the requirements of article 3 of “Rules on the Prevention of Harm from
Ionizing Radiation,” article 2 2 4 of “Regulations on Installation and Operation of Nuclear Reactors for Practical Power
Generation,” article 4 of “Determining the Quantity, etc., of Radiation-Emitting Isotopes,”etc.
*7. L imit switch for nuclear power: a limit switch designed, manufactured and sold according to IEEE 382 and JEAG 4121.
Any Azbil Corporation’s products shall not be used for/with medical equipment.
The products are for industrial use. Do not allow general consumers to install or use any Azbil Corporation’s product. However, azbil
products can be incorporated into products used by general consumers. If you intend to use a product for that purpose, please contact
one of our sales representatives.
3.2 Precautions on application
you are required to conduct a consultation with our sales representative and understand detail specifications, cautions for operation,
and so forth by reference to catalogs, specifications, instruction manual, etc. in case that you intend to use azbil product for any purposes
specified in (1) through (6) below. Moreover, you are required to provide your Equipment with fool-proof design, fail-safe design, anti-
flame propagation design, fault avoidance, fault tolerance, and other kinds of protection/safety circuit design on your own responsibility
to ensure reliability and safety, whereby preventing problems caused by failure or nonconformity.
(1) For use under such conditions or in such environments as not stated in technical documents, including catalogs, specification,
and instruction manuals
(2) For use of specific purposes, such as:
* Nuclear energy/radiation related facilities
[When used outside a radiation controlled area and where nuclear power quality is not required]
[When the limit switch for nuclear power is used]
* Machinery or equipment for space/sea bottom
* Transportation equipment
[Railway, aircraft, vessels, vehicle equipment, etc.]
* Antidisaster/crime-prevention equipment
* Burning appliances
* Electrothermal equipment
* Amusement facilities
* Facilities/applications associated directly with billing
(3) Supply systems such as electricity/gas/water supply systems, large-scale communication systems, and traffic/air traffic control
systems requiring high reliability
(4) Facilities that are to comply with regulations of governmental/public agencies or specific industries
(5) Machinery or equipment that may affect human lives, human bodies or properties
(6) Other machinery or equipment equivalent to those set forth in items (1) to (5) above which require high reliability and safety
4. Precautions against long-term use
Use of Azbil Corporation’s products, including switches, which contain electronic components, over a prolonged period may degrade
insulation or increase contact-resistance and may result in heat generation or any other similar problem causing such product or switch
to develop safety hazards such as smoking, ignition, and electrification. Although acceleration of the above situation varies depending
on the conditions or environment of use of the products, you are required not to use any Azbil Corporation’s products for a period
exceeding ten (10) years unless otherwise stated in specifications or instruction manuals.
5. Recommendation for renewal
Mechanical components, such as relays and switches, used for Azbil Corporation’s products will reach the end of their life due to wear by
repetitious open/close operations.
In addition, electronic components such as electrolytic capacitors will reach the end of their life due to aged deterioration based on
the conditions or environment in which such electronic components are used. Although acceleration of the above situation varies
depending on the conditions or environment of use, the number of open/close operations of relays, etc. as prescribed in specifications
or instruction manuals, or depending on the design margin of your machine or equipment, you are required to renew any Azbil
Corporation’s products every 5 to 10 years unless otherwise specified in specifications or instruction manuals. System products, field
instruments (sensors such as pressure/flow/level sensors, regulating valves, etc.) will reach the end of their life due to aged deterioration
of parts. For those parts that will reach the end of their life due to aged deterioration, recommended replacement cycles are prescribed.
You are required to replace parts based on such recommended replacement cycles.
6. Other precautions
Prior to your use of Azbil Corporation’s products, you are required to understand and comply with specifications (e.g., conditions and
environment of use), precautions, warnings/cautions/notices as set forth in the technical documents prepared for individual Azbil
Corporation’s products, such as catalogs, specifications, and instruction manuals to ensure the quality, reliability, and safety of those
products.
7. Changes to specifications
Please note that the descriptions contained in any documents provided by azbil are subject to change without notice for improvement
or for any other reason. For inquires or information on specifications as you may need to check, please contact our branch offices or
sales offices, or your local sales agents.
8. Discontinuance of the supply of products/parts
Please note that the production of any Azbil Corporation’s product may be discontinued without notice. After manufacturing is
discontinued, we may not be able to provide replacement products even within the warranty period.
For repairable products, we will, in principle, undertake repairs for five (5) years after the discontinuance of those products. In
some cases, however, we cannot undertake such repairs for reasons, such as the absence of repair parts. For system products, field
instruments, we may not be able to undertake parts replacement for similar reasons.
9. Scope of services
Prices of Azbil Corporation’s products do not include any charges for services such as engineer dispatch service. Accordingly, a separate
fee will be charged in any of the following cases:
(1) Installation, adjustment, guidance, and attendance at a test run
(2) Maintenance, inspection, adjustment, and repair
(3) Technical guidance and technical education
(4) Special test or special inspection of a product under the conditions specified by you
Please note that we cannot provide any services as set forth above in a nuclear energy controlled area (radiation controlled area) or at a
place where the level of exposure to radiation is equivalent to that in a nuclear energy controlled area.
AAS-511A-014-10
Specifications are subject to change without notice. (11)
1-12-2 Kawana, Fujisawa

Kanagawa 251-8522 Japan
https://www.azbil.com
1st edition: Feb. 2004
22nd edition: Sep. 2019 (B)

Manual SDC 3.5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual SDC 3.5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual SDC 3.5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

(Not for use in Japan) No.

Single Loop Controller

Thank you for purchasing an Azbil

©©2004–2019 Azbil Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

A switch in the main supply is required near the equipment.

Warnings are indicated when mishandling this product

Cautions are indicated when mishandling this product

Use caution when handling the product.

The indicated action is prohibited.

Be sure to follow the indicated instructions.

Note: Notes indicate information that might benefit the user.

Alphabetical characters T he 7-segment LED expresses alphabetical characters shown below.

Do not touch electrically charged parts such as the power terminals.

Do not block ventilation holes.

Wire this device properly according to predetermined standards.

Do not use unused/spare terminals on this device as relay terminals.

Use the relays within the recommended life.

Single Loop Controller Model C35/36 User’s Manual for

Single Loop Controller Model C35/36 User’s Manual for Installation

User’s Manual for Smart Loader Package Model SLP-C35 for

Quick Reference Guide for Model C35/36

 Manual No. CP-UM-1203E

Chapter 2. OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS

Chapter 5. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION

Chapter 6. LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA

Chapter 7. CPL COMMUNICATION FUNCTION

Chapter 8. Modbus COMMUNICATION FUNCTION

Chapter 9. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA

Chapter 10. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Chapter 11. CALIBRATION

Chapter 12. DISPOSAL

Chapter 13. SPECIFICATIONS

Quick Reference Guide for Model C35/36

Flowchart of key operations and displays  D-2

Chapter 1. OVERVIEW  1-1

1 - 1 Overview  1-1

Chapter 2. OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS  2-1

2 - 1 Input/Output Configuration  2-1

Chapter 3. INSTALLATION  3-1

Chapter 4. WIRING  4-1

4 - 1 Wiring  4-1

Chapter 5. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION  5-1

5 - 1 PV Input  5-1

Chapter 6. LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA  6-1

6 - 1 List of Operation Displays  6-1

Chapter 7. CPL COMMUNICATION FUNCTION  7-1

7 - 1 Outline of Communication  7-1

Chapter 8. Modbus COMMUNICATION FUNCTION  8-1

8 - 1 Outline of Communication  8-1

Chapter 9. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA  9-1

List of communication data 

Chapter 10. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING  10-1

Chapter 11. CALIBRATION  11-1

Starting the calibration 

Chapter 12. DISPOSAL  12-1

Chapter 13. SPECIFICATIONS  13-1

Upper display Upper display

[para] key Loader connector Loader connector

(Not for use in Japan) D-1

Alphabetical characters T he 7-segment LED expresses alphabetical characters shown below.

Manual No. CP-UM-1203E

Flowchart of key operations and displays D-2

Chapter 1. OVERVIEW 1-1

1 - 1 Overview 1-1

Chapter 2. OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS 2-1

2 - 1 Input/Output Configuration 2-1

Chapter 3. INSTALLATION 3-1

Chapter 4. WIRING 4-1

4 - 1 Wiring 4-1

Chapter 5. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5-1

5 - 1 PV Input 5-1

Chapter 6. LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA 6-1

6 - 1 List of Operation Displays 6-1

Chapter 7. CPL COMMUNICATION FUNCTION 7-1

7 - 1 Outline of Communication 7-1

Chapter 8. Modbus COMMUNICATION FUNCTION 8-1

8 - 1 Outline of Communication 8-1

Chapter 9. LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA 9-1

List of communication data

Chapter 10. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 10-1

Chapter 11. CALIBRATION 11-1

Starting the calibration

Chapter 12. DISPOSAL 12-1

Chapter 13. SPECIFICATIONS 13-1

[man]: AUTO/MANUAL mode indicator. Lights in MANUAL

Loader connector: This connector is used for connecting to a personal computer